BTS3900A Installation Guide For Enhancing Existing Cabinets (06) (PDF) - en

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing

Existing Cabinets
Issue
06
Date
2014-04-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
About This Document
About This Document

Overview
The BTS3900A (with breathable film), (Ver.A), (Ver.B), and (Ver.C) cabinets can be enhanced
to the same capacity as the BTS3900A (Ver.D). After being enhanced, the BTS3900A (with
breathable film) cabinets is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1), the BTS3900A (Ver.A) is named
(Ver.D_A2), the BTS3900A (Ver.B) is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_B), and BTS3900A (Ver.C)
is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).
This document describes the process for installing the cabinet, boards, modules, and cables in
the enhancement of BTS3900A. It also provides checklist for hardware installation.
Product Version
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Product Version
BTS3900A WCDMA
V200R013C00 and later versions
BTS3900A LTE
BTS3900A GSM
BTS3900A
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
Base station installation personnel
Organization
1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

ii
BTS3900A
About This Document
This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing
Cabinets.
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.C)
to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.B)
to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A
(Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A (with
breathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.
Calls attention to important information, best practices and
tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
General Conventions
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

iii
BTS3900A
About This Document
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

iv
BTS3900A
About This Document
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

BTS3900A
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.............1
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)...................................................4
2.1 Installation Preparations.................................................................................................................................................6
2.1.1 Pre-upgrade Check......................................................................................................................................................6
2.1.2 Upgrade Preparations..................................................................................................................................................6
2.1.3 Documents...................................................................................................................................................................6
2.1.4 Tools and Instruments.................................................................................................................................................7
2.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel............................................................................................................8
2.2 Application Scenarios.....................................................................................................................................................8
2.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs Only.........................................................................8
2.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs and RRUs..............................................................20
2.3 Unpacking Check.........................................................................................................................................................29
2.4 Restructuring Process...................................................................................................................................................30
2.5 Powering Off the Base Station.....................................................................................................................................32
2.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet.............................................................................................................................35
2.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.......................................................................35
2.6.2 Replacing the Front Door..........................................................................................................................................46
2.6.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly.....................................................................................................................................51
2.6.4 Replacing the ELU....................................................................................................................................................54
2.6.5 Replacing the Power System.....................................................................................................................................57
2.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee........................................................................................................64
2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.................................................................................................................................66
2.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.............................................................................................................................72
2.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.........................................................72
2.7.2 Replacing the Front Door..........................................................................................................................................83
2.7.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly.....................................................................................................................................88
2.7.4 Replacing the ELU....................................................................................................................................................90
2.7.5 Replacing the DCDU.................................................................................................................................................93
2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.................................................................................................................................97
2.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................100
2.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................100
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

vi
BTS3900A
Contents
2.8.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................106

2.8.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................108
2.8.4 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................111
2.8.5 Replacing the RFU..................................................................................................................................................115
2.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box..............................................................................................................118
2.8.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................120
2.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet..................................................................................................125
2.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet...............................125
2.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................130
2.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................138
2.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables...................................................................................................142
2.10.1 Installing the BBU Case........................................................................................................................................142
2.10.2 Installing the BBU Components............................................................................................................................147
2.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B....................................................................................................................150
2.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................154
2.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.C)...............................................................................154
2.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................167
2.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................192
2.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................199
2.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................204
2.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................225
2.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................234
2.11.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................239
2.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable......................................................................................................................241
2.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable...............................................................................................243
2.12 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................245
2.13 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................249
2.14 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................260
2.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................260
2.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets......................................................................................................................................260
2.14.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................263
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)................................................266

3.1 Installation Preparations.............................................................................................................................................268
3.1.1 Pre-upgrade Check..................................................................................................................................................268
3.1.2 Upgrade Preparations..............................................................................................................................................268
3.1.3 Documents...............................................................................................................................................................268
3.1.4 Tools and Instruments.............................................................................................................................................269
3.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel........................................................................................................270
3.2 Application Scenarios.................................................................................................................................................270
3.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs Only.....................................................................270
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

vii
BTS3900A
Contents
3.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs and RRUs............................................................282

3.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................291
3.4 Restructuring Process.................................................................................................................................................292
3.5 Powering Off the Base Station...................................................................................................................................294
3.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................297
3.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.....................................................................297
3.6.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................308
3.6.5 Replacing the Power System...................................................................................................................................319
3.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee......................................................................................................326
3.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................334
3.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.......................................................334
3.8.5 Replacing the RFU..................................................................................................................................................377
3.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box..............................................................................................................380
3.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet..................................................................................................387
3.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet...............................387
3.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables...................................................................................................404
3.10.1 Installing the BBU Case........................................................................................................................................404
3.10.2 Installing the BBU Components............................................................................................................................409
3.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B....................................................................................................................412
3.10.4 Installing the Air Baffle.........................................................................................................................................416
3.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.B)...............................................................................417
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

viii
BTS3900A
Contents

3.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable......................................................................................................................505
3.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable...............................................................................................507
3.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets......................................................................................................................................524
3.14.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................527
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).............................................530

4.1 Introduction to Upgrade..............................................................................................................................................532
4.1.1 Restrcutured Cabinets Interior.................................................................................................................................532
4.1.2 Restructuring Process..............................................................................................................................................540
4.2.3 Document Preparations............................................................................................................................................543
4.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................545
4.4 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................546
4.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.....................................................................546
4.4.4 Installing an ELU.....................................................................................................................................................556
4.4.7 (Optional) Installing the Filler Module...................................................................................................................564
4.5 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................569
4.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H.....................................................................569
4.5.4 Installing an ELU.....................................................................................................................................................581
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

ix
BTS3900A
Contents

4.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel...................................................................................................593
4.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02.........................................................................................................................................595
4.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFU.................................................................................................................................597
4.7 Restructuring the IBBS200T......................................................................................................................................606
4.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200T...................................................................606
4.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable.................................................................................................617
4.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables.....................................................................................................620
4.9.1 Installing a BBU Case.............................................................................................................................................620
4.9.2 Installing the BBU Components..............................................................................................................................624
4.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06......................................................................................................................627
4.9.4 Installing the SLPU.................................................................................................................................................636
4.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two Cabinets...........................................................................................................638
4.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables........................................................................................................712
4.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables...................................................................................................713
4.13.2 Sealing Cable Holes...............................................................................................................................................730
4.13.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................733
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).................736

5.1 Introduction to Upgrade..............................................................................................................................................738
5.1.1 Restructured Cabinets Interior.................................................................................................................................738
5.1.2 Restructuring Process..............................................................................................................................................746
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A
Contents
5.2.3 Document Preparations............................................................................................................................................749

5.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................751
5.4 Restructuring the APM30...........................................................................................................................................752
5.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30........................................................................752
5.4.4 Removing the APMI................................................................................................................................................763
5.4.5 Replacing the AFMU...............................................................................................................................................764
5.4.8 Installing the Filler Module and Filler Panel...........................................................................................................774
5.5 Restructuring the TMC...............................................................................................................................................780
5.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC............................................................................781
5.5.4 Removing the APMI................................................................................................................................................790
5.5.5 Replacing the AFMU...............................................................................................................................................791
5.5.7 Installing the Filler Module and Filler Panel...........................................................................................................796
5.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel...................................................................................................807
5.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02.........................................................................................................................................809
5.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFU.................................................................................................................................811
5.7 Restructuring the BBC................................................................................................................................................820
5.7.1 Information You Need to Known Before Reconstructing the BBC........................................................................820
5.7.2 Replacing the Wiring Terminals and Circuit Breakers............................................................................................825
5.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable.................................................................................................831
5.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables.....................................................................................................834
5.9.1 Installing a BBU Case.............................................................................................................................................834
5.9.2 Installing the BBU Components..............................................................................................................................837
5.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06......................................................................................................................840
5.9.5 Installing the SLPU.................................................................................................................................................851
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

xi
BTS3900A
Contents

5.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two Cabinets...........................................................................................................853
5.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables........................................................................................................914
5.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables...................................................................................................915
5.13.2 Sealing Cable Holes...............................................................................................................................................932
5.13.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................935
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

xii
BTS3900A
1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing

Existing Cabinets
Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide

for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing
Cabinets.
06 (2014-04-30)
This is the sixth commercial release.
Compared with 05 (2013-11-08), no topic is added or deleted from this issue.
Compared with 05 (2013-11-08), this issue incorporates the following change:
Topic
Change Description
2.6.2 Replacing the Front Door
Add the step of replacing an N-shaped fixing bracket

of the door support lever.
05 (2013-11-08)
This is the fifth commercial release.
Compared with 04 (2013-07-30), no topic is added or deleted from this issue.
Topic
Change Description
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A

(Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)'s
child topics.
The filler module in APM30H(Ver.D_B) and

TMC11H(Ver.D_B) is replaced with air baffle.
04 (2013-07-30)
This is the fourth commercial release.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A

Existing Cabinets
Compared with 03 (2013-04-28), this issue is added with the following topics:
l
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C) and it's child topics.
Compared with 03 (2013-04-28), no information is modified or deleted.
03 (2013-04-28)
This is the third commercial release.
Compared with 02 (2012-12-30), no topic is added or deleted.
Topic
Change Description
The whole document
Changed the document name from BTS3900A

Hardware Upgrade Guide to BTS3900A Installation
Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
l 2.11.7 (Optional) Installing

Inter-BBU Signal Cables
Modified the steps of binding and routing the interBBU signal cable.

Changed the steps of removing the front door.
02 (2012-12-30)
This is the second commercial release.
Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), this issue is added with the following topics:
l
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) and it's child topics.
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1) and it's
child topics.
Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), no information is modified.

Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), no information is deleted.
01 (2012-11-08)
This is the first commercial release.
Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), no topic is added.
Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A

Existing Cabinets
Topic
Change Description
The whole document
Renamed the BTS3900A (Ver.D2_B) BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B).
2.10.1 Installing the BBU Case
Added the attentions of installing BBU power cables

on a running base station.
l (Optional) Installing the RRU

Power Cable
Added the attentions of installing RRU power cables

on a running base station.
l (Optional) Installing the RRU

Power Cable
Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), this issue deletes the following topics:
l
"Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.D1) to BTS3900A (Ver.D2)" and it's child topics.
Draft B (2012-10-10)
This is a draft.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), this issue is added with the following topics:
l
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B) and it's child topics.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), no information is changed.

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), no information is deleted.
Draft A (2012-09-15)
This is a draft.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to

BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)
About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.C)
to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).
2.1 Installation Preparations
This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It also
specifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
2.2 Application Scenarios
Multiple cabinets can be configured and installed for the BTS3900A to meet the requirements
for different RF unit configurations, backup power capacity, and space for customer equipment.
A BTS3900A can be configured with only RFUs or both RFUs and RRUs depending on different
scenarios.
2.3 Unpacking Check
Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
2.4 Restructuring Process
This section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade of BTS3900A
(Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C).
2.5 Powering Off the Base Station
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for powering off the base station.
2.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30H
cabinet to be restructured.
2.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11H
2.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFC
2.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200D
or IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.
2.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables
This chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting the
modules to external devices.
2.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinets
during the upgrade.
2.12 Installation Checklist
After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation
environment, and cable-related items.
2.13 Powering On a Base Station
This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply
to the components in a cabinet.
2.14 Subsequent Operations
This section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgraded
and checked.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)

2.1.1 Pre-upgrade Check

This section describes the operations that must be taken before the hardware upgrade.
You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:
l
Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properly
before the upgrade.
Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.
Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need to
contact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.
2.1.2 Upgrade Preparations

This section describes the preparations needed for the upgrade.
Table 2-1 lists the requirements on the current software version of the base station before the
upgrade.
Table 2-1 Versions before the upgrade
Product Name
Version before Upgrade
SingleRAN7.0 series
V100R007C00SPC240 and later
SingleRAN6.0 series
2.1.3 Documents
This section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.
l
Before the installation, familiarize yourself with related information in the following
documents:
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Cables
BBU3900 Hardware Description
RFU Hardware Description
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Installation Guide
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Site Maintenance Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Site Maintenance
Guide
Safety Precautions
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
During the installation, refer to the following document:

Installation Reference
2.1.4 Tools and Instruments

This section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation.
Marker
Phillips screwdriver (M3 to

M6)
Diagonal pliers
Flat-head screwdriver (M3 to

M6)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
32 mm (1.26 in.)
combination wrench
Socket wrench
Torque wrench
Power cable crimping tool
RJ45 crimping tool
Cable cutter
Rubber mallet
Soldering iron
Wire stripper
Hammer drill (16)
Heat gun
Level
Multimeter
Measuring tape
Vacuum cleaner
ESD wrist strap
ESD gloves
Torque screwdriver


(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Gloves
2.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel

Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite
personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.
Before the installation, pay attention to the following items:
l
The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with the
proper installation and operation methods.
The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installation
environment. Generally, only three to five onsite personnel are necessary.

scenarios.
2.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs

Only
When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the
BTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and -48 V DC power supply
scenario.
Cabinet Configuration Principles

l
A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.
The maximum cabinet configuration of a BTS3900A site is 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2

RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. There must be a clearance of 40 mm (1.57 in.) between
the cabinets installed side by side.
The RFC can only be stacked below the APM30H or TMC11H.
The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or
TMC11H. The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can only be stacked below the TMC11H.
When a site is configured with over six RFUs and only one IBBS200D or IBBS200T, the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T must be configured with at least two groups of 92 Ah storage
batteries to avoid overcurrent of a single battery group during discharging.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
If an auxiliary cabinet such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H is required during

initial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic
cabinet. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet
is positioned on the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the
battery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain in
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In a
special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets.
When a BTS3900A is configured with two BBUs and both BBUs are connected to RFUs,
the BBUs must be interconnected.
A BTS3900A configured with one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by
default. It can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption
of all BBU boards cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to a new or expansion
scenario.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-mode Base Station

A single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, and the BBU is installed
in the APM30H or TMC11H. When seven to twelve RFUs need to be configured, two RFCs are
required.
Table 2-2 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
5U
6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
5U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
16 U
6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H
16 U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
TMC11H
5U
6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
5U
12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
one battery
cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
16 U
6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H
Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets
-48 V DC
16 U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
5U
6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
5U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
16 U
6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H
16 U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
TMC11H
9U
6 RFUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
12 RFUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
6 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
12 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
20 U
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipment
and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

10
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-1 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is no
backup power
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 2-1 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1 TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1
APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original
configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H.
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,
the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-2 and
Figure 2-3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

11
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is provided by an IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

12
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site,
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-4.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

13
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
is provided by two battery cabinets
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 2-4 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H is the initial
configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations
are shown in Figure 2-5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

14
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 2-5 are two modes of configuring 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs. (A) indicates that 2
TMC11Hs+2 RFCs is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original
configuration of 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC.
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station

Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l
Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30H
and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the
BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
Table 2-3 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different backup
power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
3U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
(1)

15
BTS3900A
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Backup
power
provided by
a single
battery
cabinet

(Ver.D_C)
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
14 U
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
TMC11H
3U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T
14 U
l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H
-48 V DC
Backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets
3U
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
14 U
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
TMC11H
7U
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
18 U
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
NOTE
(1) A maximum of 12 RFUs are supported by a triple-mode base station. If there are more than 12 RFUs,
an extra base station is required.
In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment are
shown in Figure 2-6.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

16
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is not
required
When a single cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-7.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

17
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided
by a single battery cabinet
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
with different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-8.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

18
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
by two battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

19
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-9 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

and RRUs
When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the
BTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and 48 V DC power supply
scenario.

l
A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and nine RRUs.
Therefore, more than one BTS3900As must be deployed if more than six RFUs and nine
RRUs are required.
When a BTS3900A is configured with both RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is needed to
be installed in RFC, the maximum configuration of RRUs is six RRUs of 2*60 W and three
RRUs of 2*40 W.
When both the RFU and RRU support the GSM mode, the BBU3900 must be configured
with a GTMUb. In addition, the RFUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the
GTMUb, and the RRUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the UBRI.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

A single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the
APM30H or TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

20

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
5U
6 RFUs+9
RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
one storage
battery
cabinet
5U
16 U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T
16 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H
-48 V DC
Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
two storage
battery
cabinets
5U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
16 U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
TMC11H
9U
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
20 U
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

21
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-10 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is
no backup power
is provided by one battery cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

22
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode

base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier
configurations are shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC
scenario

l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

23

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
3U
6 RFUs+9
RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
Backup
power
provided by
a single
battery
cabinet
3U
14 U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T
14 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H
-48 V DC
Backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets
3U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+4
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
14 U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+4
TMC11H
7U
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
18 U
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
configurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment and
carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-14.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

24
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
required
When a single battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure
2-15 and Figure 2-16.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

25
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
by one IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

26
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
2-17.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

27
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in
the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown
in Figure 2-18.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

28
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
2.3 Unpacking Check

Context
NOTE
When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:
l
Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.
Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweatsoaked gloves, or dirty gloves.
NOTICE
l Powered on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

29
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
If...
Then...
The total number tallies with the packing

list
Go to Step 2.
The total number does not tally with the

packing list
Find out the cause and report any missing

articles to the local Huawei office.
Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case.

If...
Then...
The exterior of the packing case is intact
Go to Step 3.
The outer packing is severely damaged or Find out the cause and report any missing
soaked
The mark on the shockwatch label is red.
Do not open the case. Claim compensation

from the transportation company.
Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list.
If...
Then...
Types and quantity of the article tally with Sign the Packing List with the customer.
those on the packing list
There are any goods missing, incorrectly
delivered, or damaged
Send feedback to the local Huawei office.
CAUTION
To protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep the
unpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment,
packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file the
photos.
----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

30
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Restructuring Process in AC Scenarios

Figure 2-19 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied with
AC power.
Figure 2-19 Restructuring process
Restructuring Process in DC Scenarios

DC power.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

31
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

32
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Context
From MBTS V100R009C00 onwards, the name of the element management system (EMS) is
changed from M2000 to U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If a replaced RFU is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking for TX
channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
NOTE
l If a replaced RFU is faulty, its maximum output power locking for TX channels does not need to be
disabled.
l If the maximum output power has not been set for the RFU, the maximum output power for TX channels
is the maximum transmit power of the hardware.
1.
Check the maximum output power has been locked for TX channels of the new RFU, and
record the result.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet
number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU. Run the
DSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number,
and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum output power for
TX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has been locked.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the
cabinet number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU.
Run the DSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number,
slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum
output power for TX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has
been locked.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site Maintenance
Terminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-click
Lock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Query Config tab. On the displayed tab page,
select the target RFU.
If...
Then...
The maximum output power has been

locked for TX channels
Go to Step 1.2.
The maximum output power has not been

Go to 2.
NOTE
The maximum output power of some RFUs cannot be queried by running the DSP TXBRANCH
command. If the value of the maximum output power invalid in the query result for an RFU, the RFU
does not support the maximum output power locking.
2.
Set the maximum output power of the RFU to 0 to disable the maximum output power
locking.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable the
maximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to reset
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

33
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum output
power of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable
the maximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to
reset the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum
output power of each RFU is set successfully.
Lock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Config tab. On the displayed tab page, set
the parameters to disable the maximum output power locking for TX channels, and click
Set. Reset the RFU to make the configuration take effect.
NOTE
If there is more than one RFU, reset the TX channels of each RFU separately. If RFUs are cascaded,
perform the operations from the lowest-level RFU to the highest-level RFU to minimize the impact
on services carried by the RFUs.
Step 2 Ask the M2000/U2000 administrator to block the RFU.

l On the NodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the eNodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the BSC, run the SET GTRXADMSTAT command and set ADMSTAT to LOCK to
block all carriers of the RFU.
NOTE
l Block the RFU before replacing the module or separately replacing the RF jumper.
l If RFU to be replaced works in multiple modes, block the RFU in all modes it supports.
l An RFU working in GSM mode cannot be blocked, and therefore you can block only the carriers of
the RFU in GSM mode.
Step 3 Verify that TX channels of the RFU are disabled. In this case, the ACT indicator on the RFU
panel is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).
Step 4 Power off the RFC.
If...
Then...
RFC(Ver.B)
Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 in the RFC.
RFC(Ver.C)
Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11A in the RFC.
Step 5 Power off the TMC.

If...
Then...
TMC11H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C in the
TMC.
TMC11H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C in the
TMC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

34
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 6 Switch off all circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200T or IBBS200D.
Step 7 Power off the APM30H.
If...
Then...
APM30H(Ver.B)
Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPS in the APM30H.
APM30H(Ver.C)
Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPU in the APM30H.
Step 8 Turn off the switch on the external power equipment for the BTS3900A.
----End

2.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the

APM30H
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and added
during the restructuring of the APM30H.
Component Changes in the APM30H

Figure 2-21 shows component changes in the APM30H.
Figure 2-21 Components in the APM30H
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

35
BTS3900A
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

(Ver.D_C)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
FAN 02A
To be
replace
d
The FAN 02A needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D to

enhance the heat dissipation capability.
SLPU
Reused
ELU
To be
replace
d
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needs

to be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.
PSU (AC/
DC)
To be
replace
d
The PSUs need to be replaced to enhance the power

distribution capability.
Door status
sensor
Reused
EPS 01
subrack
To be
replace
d
The EPS 01 subrack needs to be replaced with an

EPU05A to meet higher requirements for the power
system.
BBU3900
Reused
GATM
To be
remove
d
EMUA
Reused
10
AC heater
Reused
11
SOU
Reused
12
Front door
To be
replace
d
The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heat

dissipation capacity of the cabinet.
13
Junction
box
Reused
14
PMU
To be
replace
d
The PMU needs to be replaced to enhance the power

15
FAN 02B
To be
replace
d
The FAN 02B needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D to

16
EPU03A
subrack
To be
replace
d
The EPS 03A subrack needs to be replaced with an

system.

36
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
17
Front door
To be
replace
d

Cable Changes in the APM30H

Figure 2-22 lists the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the APM30H.
Figure 2-22 Equipotential cable and power cables in the APM30H
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

37
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
1
Input
power
cable for
a
junction
box

(Ver.D_C)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the L1
and N1
terminals
in the AC
OUTPUT
terminal
box of the
EPS.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
L1 and N1
terminals in the
AC OUTPUT
terminal box of
the EPU.
Power
cable for
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
l One end
connects
to the
LOAD0
port on
the EPS.
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on the fan
assembly
in the
APM30H
.
Reu
sed
l The other end

connects to the
L and N
terminals in the
junction box.
l The other
end
connects
to the L
and N
terminals
in the
junction
box.
P
2
Cha
nge
Typ
e
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l One end
connects to the
LOAD5 port on
the EPU.
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in the
APM30H.
38

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
3
BBU
power
cable
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connects
to the
LOAD1
port on
the EPS.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connects to the
BBU_0 or
BBU_1 port on
the EPU.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
P
4
EMUA
power
cable
l Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
l The other
end is
cord end
terminals.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
l The other
end
connects
to the
-48V port
on the
UPEU in
the BBU.
l One end
connects
to the
LOAD7
port on
the EPS.
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
l Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
l The other
end is
cord end
terminals.

Cha
nge
Typ
e
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU.
l One end
connects to the
LOAD4 port on
the EPU.
l The other end
connects to the
PWR1 port on
the EMUA.
The
y
can
be
used
cont
inuo
usly
and
their
conn
ecto
rs
need
to be
repl
aced
onsit
e.
39
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
5
SOU
power
cable

(Ver.D_C)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
l One end
is OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the M4
ground
screw,
L1, and
N1
terminals
(AC
OUTPUT
) on the
EPS.
l One end
is OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
M4 ground
screw, L1, and
N1 terminals
(AC OUTPUT)
on the EPU.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.
Cha
nge
Typ
e
Reu
sed
l The other end

connects to the
AC INPUT port
on the SOU.
l The other
end
connects
to the AC
INPUT
port on
the SOU.
P
6
Heater
power
cable
l One end
is OT
terminals.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.
l One end
connects
to the AC
output
wiring
terminal
in the AC
junction
box and
the
ground
bar in the
APM30H
cabinet
l One end
is OT
terminals.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
input port
on the
heater.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l One end
connects to the
AC output
wiring terminal
in the AC
junction box
and the ground
bar in the
APM30H
cabinet
Reu
sed
l The other end

connects to the
power input
port on the
heater.
40
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
7
Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door

(Ver.D_C)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
Cha
nge
Typ
e
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.
To
be
repl
aced
l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.
l The other end

connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.
Figure 2-23 shows the signal cable changes in the APM30H.

Figure 2-23 Signal cable changes in the APM30H
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

41
BTS3900A
No.
S1
Cable
Environmen
t monitoring
signal cable

(Ver.D_C)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are DB50
male
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
COM
port on
the
PMU.
Both ends
are DB50
male
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
COM
port on
the
PMU.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
PMU_D
B50 port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S2
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status
sensor in the
APM30H
l One end
is a 2-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.
l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
Remove
d
l The
other end
connects
to the
PMU_D
B50 port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
l One end
is a 2-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Change
Type

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
42
BTS3900A
No.
S3
Cable
Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable

(Ver.D_C)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port
on the
PMU.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port on
the
PMU.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S4
CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
Change
Type
To be
replaced
l The
other end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
-
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connects
to the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU in
the
BBU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

43
BTS3900A
No.
S5
Cable
ELU signal
cable

(Ver.D_C)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S6
Monitoring
signal cable
for the fan in
the front
door
Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
transfer
box in
the front
door of
the
APM30
H.
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
FAN_E
XT port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Change
Type

l One end
connects
to the
transfer
box in
the front
door of
the
APM30
H.
To be
replaced
l The
other end
connects
to the
FAN_E
XT port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
44
BTS3900A
No.
S7
Cable
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
l One end
is a DB9
male
connecto
r.
l One end
connects
to the
RS-485
port on
the
EMUA.
l One end
is a DB9
male
connecto
r.
l One end
connects
to the
RS-485
port on
the
EMUA.
l The
other is
an RJ45
connecto
r.
S8
Surge
protection
transfer
cable for the
monitoring
signals

(Ver.D_C)
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
PMU.
l One end
connects
to the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.
l The
other is
an RJ45
connecto
r.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
EXT_A
LM0
port on
the
UPEU in
the
BBU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
PMU.
l One end
connects
to the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
EXT_A
LM0
port on
the
UPEU in
the BBU.
45

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
No.
S9
Cable
GPS clock
signal cable
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
l One end
is an
SMA
male
connecto
r.
l One end
connects
to the
GPS port
on the
USCU in
the
BBU.
l One end
is an
SMA
male
connecto
r.
l One end
connects
to the
GPS port
on the
USCU in
the BBU.
l The
other
end is an
N-type
female
connecto
r.
S10
CMUEBBU
monitoring
signal cable
l The
other
end
connects
to a GPS
surge
protector
.
-
l The
other
end is an
N-type
female
connecto
r.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to a GPS
surge
protector
.
l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port on
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
To be
replaced
l The
other end
connects
to the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU in
the BBU.

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door. The front doors
of the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures for removing
the front doors of the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

46
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needlenose pliers.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Turn off the fan in the front door.
If...
Then...
An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
APM30H assembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
(Ver.B) is
used
A
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker controls
TMC11H power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
(Ver.B) is
used
An
APM30H assembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
(Ver.C) is
used
A
(Ver.C) is
used
Step 3 Remove the front door to be replaced.
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Remove the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door from the transfer box, as

47
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-24 Removing the connector from the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the
front door
2.
Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown
in Figure 2-25.
Figure 2-25 Removing the equipotential cable for the door of the cabinet
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two hinges from the front door, and remove the
front door, as shown in Figure 2-26.

48
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-26 Removing the front door
Step 4 Install the new front door.

NOTE
l When installing the front door, use new removable pins.

l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the front door before delivery.
1.
Install the new front door and insert the removable pins.
2.
Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on an inner wall.
Step 5 Replace an N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever.

1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Remove the two M4 screws on the left N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever
and pull out the door support lever from the right N-shaped fixing bracket. Then move the
left N-shaped fixing bracket to the right part of the door support lever and remove the left
N-shaped fixing bracket, as shown in the following figure.

49
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-27 Remove an N-shaped fixing bracket
2.
Take out and slide a new N-shaped fixing bracket onto the right part of the door support
lever and move it to the left part of the lever. Use two M4 screws to secure the new Nshaped fixing bracket, with a torque of 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), and place the right part of
the door support lever in its original position, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-28 Install a new N-shaped fixing bracket
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

50
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the number on
the barcode label starts from 212102, as shown by 1 in Figure 2-29.
If...
Then...
There is a barcode label in the indicated

position
Proceed with the next step.
There is no barcode label in the indicated

position
Record the barcode (shown by 2 in Figure

2-29) on the front door, and stick a barcode
label carrying the same barcode to the
indicated position.
Figure 2-29 Positions of the barcode labels
(1) Position of the barcode label on an inner wall of the (2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of the
cabinet
cabinet
Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End
2.6.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The fan
assemblies in the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures
for removing the fan assemblies from the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.
Prerequisites
flat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

51
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
NOTICE
Step 2 Optional: Remove the power cable for the fan assembly to power off the fan assembly. Skip
this step if this cable has been disconnected during the replacement of the front door.
If...
Then...
An APM30H
(Ver.B) is used
assembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
A TMC11H
(Ver.B) is used
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker
controls power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
An APM30H
(Ver.C) is used
assembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
A TMC11H
(Ver.C) is used
Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.

1.
Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fan
assembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as
NOTE
The procedure for removing a fan assembly from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H
(Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) are the same. Figure 2-30 uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

52
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-30 Removing the fan assembly
DANGER
When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan
assembly.
Step 4 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position and tighten
the four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown in
Figure 2-31. The recommended torque is 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
NOTE
When installing the new fan assembly, ensure that the air exhaust vent of the fan assembly is on the top.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

53
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-31 Installing the new fan assembly
----End
2.6.4 Replacing the ELU

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit
(ELU).
Prerequisites
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
The ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32 Position of the ELU
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

54
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1.
Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.
2.
Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,
as shown in Figure 2-33.
Figure 2-33 Opening the housing of the ELU
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown in
Figure 2-34.
Figure 2-34 Removing the ELU
Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.

Step 4 Install a new ELU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

55
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
NOTE
l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure
2-35. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 2-6.
Figure 2-35 Position of the barcode label
(1) Barcode label on the ELU
(2) BOM code
Table 2-6 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets

Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed base

station
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826
APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macro

base station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission

equipment
l Ver.B: 02113830
TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 and

uses the -48 V DC power supply
l Ver.B: 02113827
RFC (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
l Ver.C: 02113398
l Ver.C: 02113395
l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397
1.
Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. The
recommended torque is 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
2.
Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.
3.
Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

56
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic label
information of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplate
in the upgrade package.
l
If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.
If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.
----End
2.6.5 Replacing the Power System

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power system.
Prerequisites
Before replacing the power system, ensure that the entire base station has been powered off.
Context
l
Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.
The procedure for replacing the power system of the APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H
(Ver.C) is the same. The figures in this section uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.
Figure 2-36 shows component changes in the AC/DC power system.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

57

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Figure 2-36 Component changes in the AC/DC power system
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU
(3) EPS 01
(EPW30-48A) subrack
(4) PSU
(PSU4850A)
(5) EPU03A
subrack
(6) PMU 11A
(8) EPU05A
subrack
(7) PSU
(R4850G2)
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Remove cables from the EPS or EPU.
1.
Disconnect the ground cable for the EPS or EPU from the ground bar on the inner left wall
of the cabinet.
2.
Loosen the two captive screws on the metal protective cover on the left side of the EPS or
EPU, and then remove the protective cover.
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the plastic protective covers from the AC input and
output wiring terminal blocks on the left side of the EPS or EPU.
4.
Record the connections of the AC input power cable and AC output power cable, and then
remove the cables.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

58
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
5.
Reinstall the two plastic protective covers, and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M4
screws to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).
6.
Record the connections of the DC power cables on the EPS or EPU panel, and then remove
the DC power cables.
7.
Record the connections of the DC power cables that are connected to the power cables on
the right side of the EPS or EPU, and then remove the DC power cables.
Step 3 Remove the PMU and all PSUs from the EPS or EPU.
NOTICE
The original EPS or EPU contains one PMU and three PSUs and therefore is heavy. You are
advised to remove the PMU and PSUs before removing the EPS or EPU.
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of each
PSU.
2.
Pull the handle slightly to slide each PSU out of the subrack and remove each PSU from
the subrack, as shown in Figure 2-37.
Figure 2-37 Removing the PSUs
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of the
PMU.
4.
Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU out of the subrack and remove the PMU from the
subrack, as shown in Figure 2-38.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

59
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-38 Removing the PMU
Step 4 Remove the plate for the power series 120 connector from the right side of the EPS or EPU, as
Figure 2-39 Removing the plate for the power series 120 connector
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the remaining seven screws from both sides of the EPS or
EPU, and remove the EPS or EPU from the cabinet along the guide rails slowly, as shown in
Figure 2-40.
NOTICE
The EPS or EPU subrack is heavy. Therefore, you need to hold the subrack with one hand and
support the bottom with the other hand to slowly pull the subrack out of the cabinet. This prevents
the subrack from falling and ensures personal safety.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

60
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-40 Removing the EPS or EPU
Step 6 Remove the metal support from the left side of the EPS or EPU.
1.
Loosen the two captive screws on the cover plate of the metal support.
2.
Remove the two screws from the metal support and remove the metal support, as shown in
Figure 2-41.
Figure 2-41 Removing the metal support
Step 7 Place the removed EPS or EPU subrack, PSUs, PMU, and metal support into an ESD box or
bag.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

61
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 8 Optional: Install the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of
the cabinet. Only an APM30H (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an APM30H
(Ver.C) is used, skip this step.
CAUTION
If a guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will
increase by 2C to 3C at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report
overtemperature alarms if the environmental temperature is high.
1.
Remove the guide rails on the left side of the position where the EPS or EPU is originally
installed, as shown by a in Figure 2-42. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve the screws.
2.
Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mounting
bar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton padding
contacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in Figure 2-42.
3.
Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 8.1 to secure the guide rails and tighten the screws
to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.), as shown by c in Step 8.1.
Figure 2-42 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left
side of the cabinet
Step 9 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet. If there are
other modules installed at the bottom of the cabinet, skip this step.
1.
Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton
padding for about 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in Figure 2-43.
2.
Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completely
strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of the
cabinet, as shown by b and c in Figure 2-43.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

62
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-43 Installing windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet
Step 10 Install the windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet, as shown in Figure
2-44.
CAUTION
1.
Remove the M6 screw at the bottom of the right mounting bar.
2.
Place the windproof cotton padding next to the inner right wall of the cabinet, use two M6
screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

63
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-44 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet
Step 11 Install a new EPU.

1.
Place the new EPU on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the power system
into the cabinet.
2.
Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven panel screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.) and one
hex screw to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.) so that the EPU subrack is secured.
3.
Use M6x12 screws to secure the ground cable for the new EPU to the ground bar. The
----End
2.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee

This section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.
Prerequisites
l
The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. When
DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.
If the BTS3900A has two GATMs, remove the upper one before the lower one.
Procedure
Step 1 Power off the GATM. The following table lists the terminals that can be used by a GATM power
cable, which may differ from the actually used terminal.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

64
BTS3900A
If...

(Ver.D_C)
Then...
An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATM
APM30H power cable from the LOAD4 port on the EPS.
(Ver.B) is
used
If an
APM30H power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPU.
(Ver.C) is
used
Step 2 Remove the GATM.
1.
Remove the monitoring signal cable from the GATM panel.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the ground cable for the GATM. Then use a wrench
to remove the RF jumper from the GATM.
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, remove the
GATM, and secure the removed screws on their original positions on the mounting bar, as
NOTE
The method of removing the GATM from an APM30H (Ver.B) is the same as the method of removing it
from an APM30H (Ver.C). The following figure uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.
Figure 2-45 Removing the GATM
Step 3 Remove the Bias-Tee.

1.
Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable and PGND cable.
2.
Remove the Bias-Tee.
3.
Use a wrench to connect the jumper and the feeder to 25 Nm to 35 Nm (221.25 lbfin. to
309.75 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 2-46.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

65
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-46 Connecting the jumper and the feeder
(1) Feeder
(2) Jumper
----End
2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30H cabinet
after you restructure the APM30H.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,
and a pair of ESD gloves.
Context
Table 2-7 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 2-7 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the APM30H
EPC4
connector
LOAD2 port
on the EPU
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the APM30H
A 1.1 m (3.61
ft) cable is
newly
delivered.

66
BTS3900A
Cable
Connector
at One End
Input power
cable for the
junction box

(Ver.D_C)
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
OT terminals M4 ground
(M4)
screw as
well as L1,
and N1
terminals
near the AC
OUTPUT
silkscreen on
the EPU in
the
APM30H
OT terminals
L and N
terminals in
the junction
box
To be reused
EMUA
power cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD5 port
on the EPU
Cord end
terminals
PWR1 port
on the
EMUA
To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.
BBU power
cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD0 or
LOAD6 port
on the EPU
3V3
connector
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU
A cable is
newly
delivered.
Table 2-8 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.

Table 2-8 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installation
Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
in the
APM30H
2-pin
connector
GATE port
on the PMU
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
To be reused
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU
RJ45
connector
ELU port in
the CMUEA
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for the fan in
the front
door
Interconnect
ion terminal
Power cable
for the fan in
the front door
of the
APM30H
4-pin
connector
FAN_EXT
port on the
fan assembly
A cable is
newly
delivered.

67

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installation
Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
RJ45
connector
MON1 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
A 1.1 m
(3.61 ft)
cable is
newly
delivered.
Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
PMU
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the fan
assembly of
the APM30H
A 1.1 m
(3.61 ft)
cable is
newly
delivered.
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
DB9 male
connector
RS-485 port
on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
PMU
To be reused
Procedure
l
Remove related cables in the cabinet.

Remove the related cables listed in Table 2-7 and Table 2-8. If the cables have been
removed during the module replacement, skip this step.
Install power cables in the APM30H.

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the APM30H, as shown by P1 in Figure
2-47.
a.
Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD2 port on the panel of the EPU.
b.
Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD2 port
on the EPU.
c.
Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port on
the fan assembly in the APM30H, and use a torque wrench to tighten the screws
on the 3V3 connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54 lbfin.).
Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-47.

a.
Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For detailed operations, see
Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the
EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b.
c.
Connect the one end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD5
port on the EPU.
d.
Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 port
on the EMUA.
Install input power cable for the junction box, as shown by P3 in Figure 2-47.
68
BTS3900A
4.

(Ver.D_C)
a.
Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L1 and N1
terminals near the AC OUTPUT silkscreen on the EPU, and tighten the terminals
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
b.
Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L and
N terminals in the junction box, and tighten the terminals to 1.2 Nm (10.62
lbfin.).
Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P4 in Figure 2-47.

a.
Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the
instructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4
connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
b.
Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD0 or LOAD1 port on the panel of
the EPU.
c.
Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD0 or
LOAD1 port on the EPU.
d.
Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on the
UPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54
lbfin.).
Figure 2-47 Installing power cables in the APM30H
5.
Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind the cable.
6.
Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
Install signal cables in the APM30H.

1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-48.

69
BTS3900A
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

(Ver.D_C)
a.
Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on the
top of the ELU.
b.
Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU port
on the fan assembly.
Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure
2-48.
a.
Connect one end of the signal cable to the GATE port on the PMU.
b.
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the door status sensor.
Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door, as shown by S3 in
Figure 2-48.
a.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door to
its transfer terminal.
b.
Connect the other end of the signal cable with a 4-pin connector to the FAN_EXT
port on the fan assembly.
Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S4 in Figure 2-48.

a.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the
COM_IN port on the CMUEA.
b.
Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to
the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
Install the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 2-48.

a.
Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUT
port on the CMUEA.
b.
Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_IN
port on the PMU.
Optional: Install the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, as shown by S6 in Figure
2-48.
a.
Connect the end of the signal cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS485 port
on the EMUA, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54 lbfin.).
b.
Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUT
port on the PMU.

70
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-48 Installing signal cables in the APM30H
7.
Optional: Install the surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals.
a.
Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of the
SLPU.
b.
Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in the
BBU.
c.
Connect the other three surge protection transfer cables, as shown in Figure
2-49.
Figure 2-49 Connections of surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals
8.
9.
Label the installed cables according to Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

71
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)


TMC11H Cabinet
during the restructuring of the TMC11H cabinet.
Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Components in the TMC11H

Cabinet
There are two types of TMC11Hs:
l
One type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration A in

Figure 2-50.
The other type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as
shown in illustration B in Figure 2-50.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

72
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-50 Exterior and configurations of the TMC11H
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Remarks
Fan
assembly
To be
replace
d
The fan assembly needs to be replaced to enhance the

heat dissipation capacity.
SLPU
To be
reused
ELU
To be
replace
d

DCDU-03
C
To be
replace
d
It needs to be replaced with the DCDU-12B or

DCDU-12C.

73
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Remarks
BBU3900
To be
reused
Door status
sensor
To be
reused
Environme
nt
monitoring
unit type A
(EMUA)
To be
reused
AC heater
To be
reused
Front door
To be
replace
d
The heat exchanger in the cabinet needs to be replaced

to enhance the heat dissipation capacity of the cabinet.
10
Junction
box
To be
reused
11
DCDU-11
B, or
DCDU-11
C
To be
replace
d

DCDU-12C.
Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Cables in the TMC11H

Cabinet
Figure 2-51 shows the power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses
the BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power.
Figure 2-51 Power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

74
BTS3900A
No.
P1
P2
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Power
cable for
the fan
assembly in
the
TMC11H
BBU power
cable

(Ver.D_C)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installatio
n Position
Connecto
r
Installatio
n Position
l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD8
port on
the
DCDU03C.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD9
port on
the
DCDU12C.
l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
TMC11
H.
l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
TMC11
H.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD6
port on
the
DCDU03C.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
-48V
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD6
or
LOAD7
port on
the
DCDU11C.

Change
Type
To be
replaced
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
-48V
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
75

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
No.
P3
P4
Cable
EMUA
power
cable
Equipotenti
al cable for
grounding
of the front
door
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installatio
n Position
Connecto
r
Installatio
n Position
l One end
is toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD7
port on
the
DCDU03C.
l One end
is toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD8
port on
the
DCDU11C.
l The
other
end is
cord
end
terminal
s.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.
l The
other
end is
cord
end
terminal
s.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.
Both ends
are OT
terminals.
l One end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
Both ends
are OT
terminals.
l One end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of
the
cabinet.
Change
Type
They can be
used
continuousl
y and their
connectors
need to be
replaced
onsite.
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of
the
cabinet.
Figure 2-52 shows the signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses the BBU3900 and is
supplied with -48 V DC power.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

76
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-52 Signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet
No.
S1
Cable
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the door
status
sensor
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
l One
end is a
2-pin
connec
tor.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GATE
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
l One
end is a
2-pin
connec
tor.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GATE
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
door
status
sensor.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
To be
reused
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
door
status
sensor.
77
BTS3900A
No.
S2
Cable
CMUABBU
monitorin
g signal
cable

(Ver.D_C)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
IN port
on the
fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
Change
Type
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

78
BTS3900A
No.
S3
Cable
ELU
signal
cable

(Ver.D_C)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
To be
reused
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU.
79
BTS3900A
No.
S4
Cable
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the fan in
the front
door

(Ver.D_C)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors
.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
FAN_
EXT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors
.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
FAN_
EXT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
transfe
r box in
the
front
door of
the
TMC1
1H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
To be
replaced
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
transfe
r box in
the
front
door of
the
TMC1
1H.
80
BTS3900A
No.
S5
Cable
EMUA
monitorin
g signal
cable

(Ver.D_C)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
l One
end is a
DB9
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
OUT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly.
l One
end is a
DB9
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
OUT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly.
l The
other is
an
RJ45
connec
tor.
l The
other is
an
RJ45
connec
tor.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
RS-48
5 port
on the
EMUA
.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
To be
reused
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
RS-48
5 port
on the
EMUA
.
81
BTS3900A
No.
S6
Cable
Surge
protection
transfer
cable for
the
monitorin
g signals

(Ver.D_C)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
EXT_
ALM0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
S7
GPS clock
signal
cable
l One
end is
an
SMA
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end is
an Ntype
female
connec
tor.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GPS
port on
the
USCU
in the
BBU.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to a
GPS
surge
protect
or.
Change
Type
To be
reused
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
EXT_
ALM0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
l One
end is
an
SMA
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end is
an Ntype
female
connec
tor.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GPS
port on
the
USCU
in the
BBU.
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connec
ts to a
GPS
surge
protect
or.
82

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
No.
S8
Cable
CMUEBBU
monitorin
g signal
cable
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
IN port
on the
fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
Change
Type
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.

Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

83
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
NOTICE
If...
Then...
An
(Ver.B) is
used
A
(Ver.B) is
used
An
(Ver.C) is
used
A
(Ver.C) is
used
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

84
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
front door
2.
in Figure 2-54.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

85
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)

NOTE

1.
2.

1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

86
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

87
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
If...
Then...

position

position

indicated position.
cabinet
cabinet
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

88
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
NOTICE
Step 2 (Optional) Turn off the circuit breaker LOAD8 on the DCDU-03C. Skip this step if the fan
assembly has been powered off during replacement of the front door.
1.
2.
NOTE
DANGER
assembly.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

89
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
NOTE
----End

(ELU).
Prerequisites
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

90
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Procedure
NOTICE
1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Figure 2-63.
91
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)

NOTE
(2) BOM code
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU

station
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

base station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

equipment
l Ver.B: 02113830

l Ver.B: 02113827
l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
l Ver.C: 02113398
l Ver.C: 02113395

92
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390
l Ver.B: 02113819
IBBS200D (Ver.B)
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480

l Ver.B: 02113820
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l Ver.C: 02113397
1.
2.
3.
l
----End
2.7.5 Replacing the DCDU

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDUs in an TMC11H.
These DCDUs include the DCDU-03B, DCDU-03C, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-11C.
Prerequisites
Context
The following table helps you determine whether a DCDU needs to be replaced with a
DCDU-12B or DCDU-12C.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cabinet
Base Station
Application
Scenarios
DCDU Model
Before
Replacement
DCDU Model
After
Replacement
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
DBS3900
It provides
transmission
space.
DCDU-03C
DCDU-12C

93
BTS3900A
Cabinet
Base Station
BTS3900A
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
DBS3900
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Application
Scenarios
DCDU Model
Before
Replacement
DCDU Model
After
Replacement
It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.
DCDU-03B
DCDU-12B
It provides
transmission
space.
DCDU-03C
DCDU-12C
It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.
DCDU-03C
DCDU-12C
It provides
transmission
space.
DCDU-11C
DCDU-12C
It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.
DCDU-11B
DCDU-12B
It provides
transmission
space.
DCDU-11C
DCDU-12C
It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.
DCDU-11C
DCDU-12C
Procedure
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

94
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 2 Power off the DCDU according to the following table.

If...
Then...
A DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B needs to be

powered off
Switch off the external power supply.
A DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C in a TMC11H

Turn off the TMC circuit breaker on the
needs to be powered off, and the TMC11H only EPS in the APM30H.
provides transmission space
At a BTS3900A site, a DCDU-03C in a
TMC11H needs to be powered off, and the
TMC11H houses BBU3900 and is supplied
with -48 V DC power
Turn off the SPARE2 circuit breaker on the

DCDU-01 in the RFC.
A DCDU-11C in a TMC11H needs to be

powered off, and the TMC11H houses
BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power
At a DBS3900 site, a DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C Switch off the external power supply.
in a TMC11H needs to be powered off, and the
with -48 V DC power
Step 3 Remove the DCDU.
1.
Remove all cable connectors from the DCDU.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal
block from the DCDU, as shown in Figure 2-65.
3.
Record the connection of the input power cables, and then remove the power cables.
4.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from both sides of the DCDU, and
pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as shown in Figure 2-66.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

95
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-65 Removing the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block from the
DCDU
Figure 2-66 Removing the DCDU
Step 4 Place the removed DCDU and protective covers in an ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install a new DCDU-12B.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

96

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
1.
Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.
2.
Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC11H cabinet
after restructuring the TMC11H cabinet.
Prerequisites
Context
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the TMC11H
EPC4
connector
LOAD9 port
on the
DCDU-12C
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the TMC11H
The cable is
newly
delivered.
BBU power
cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD6 or
LOAD7 port
on the
DCDU-12C
in the
TMC11H
3V3
connector
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU of
the TMC11H
The cable is
newly
delivered.
EMUA
power cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD8 port
on the
DCDU-12C
Cord end
terminals
PWR1
terminal on
the EMUA
To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

97

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A

Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
Bare wire
GATE port
on the fan
assembly
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
Reused
CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
The cable is
newly
delivered. It
is 1.1 m (3.61
ft) long.
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the fan
assembly
Reused
Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable for the
fan in the
front door
Interconnecti
on terminal
Power cable
for the fan in
the front
door of the
TMC11H
cabinet
4-pin
connector
FAN_EXT
port on the
fan assembly
Newly
delivered
cable
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
DB9 male
connector
RS485 port
on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
fan assembly
Reused
Procedure
l
Install power cables in the TMC11H cabinet.

1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the TMC11H cabinet, as shown by P1
in Figure 2-67.
a.
on the DCDU-12C.
b.
the fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54
lbfin.).
Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-67. If a BBU is
not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.
a.
b.
LOAD7 port on the DCDU-12C.

98
BTS3900A
c.
3.

(Ver.D_C)
lbfin.).

a.
Replace the OT terminals at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4
connector, as described in Table 2-10. For details about how to replace the
terminals, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b.
on the DCDU-12C.
c.
on the EMUA.
Figure 2-67 Installing power cables in the TMC11H cabinet
4.
Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then use
cable ties to bind the cables.
5.
Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
Install signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet.

1.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to the GATE
port on the fan assembly, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-68.
2.
Optional: Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S2 in

Figure 2-68. If a BBU is not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.
3.
a.
b.

a.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
top of the ELU.
99
BTS3900A
b.
4.
5.

(Ver.D_C)
Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly in the front door, as shown by
S4 in Figure 2-68.
a.
b.
Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 2-68.

a.
b.
port on the CMUEA.
Figure 2-68 Installing signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet
6.
7.
----End

2.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC

This section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

100
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Component Changes in the RFC

Figure 2-69 shows component changes in the RFC.
Figure 2-69 Components in the RFC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
DCDU-01
To be
replace
d
The DCDU-01 needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A to

enhance the power distribution capability.
ELU
To be
replace
d

Door status
sensor
Reused
FAN 01A
To be
replace
d
The FAN 01A needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C to

RFU
To be
replace
d
The original RFUs are replaced by new RFUs with

enhanced capacities.
DCDU-11
A
To be
replace
d
The DCDU-11A needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A

to enhance the power distribution capability.

101

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
FAN 01B
To be
replace
d
The FAN 01B needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C to

DC
Junction
Box
l The DC junction box in an RFC (Ver.B) uses one or

two DC power inputs and provides two DC power
outputs.
l The original DC junction box will be used in the RFC
(Ver.C).
Cable Changes in the RFC

Figure 2-70 shows the power cable changes in the RFC.
Figure 2-70 Power cables in the RFC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

102
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
0
DCDU-1
1A
power
cable

(Ver.D_C)
RFC (Ver.B)
RFC (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals on the
DCDU-11A.
Cha
nge
Typ
e
Reu
sed
l The other end

connects to the
DC junction
box.
P
1
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Power
cable for
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC
l One end
is a
parallel
terminal.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
l One end
connects
to the
FAN port
on the
DCDU-0
1.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l One end
connects to the
LOAD6 port on
the
DCDU-11A.
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in the
RFC.
103
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
2
to
P
7
RFU
power
cables

(Ver.D_C)
RFC (Ver.B)
RFC (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
l One end
is a
parallel
terminal.
l One end
connects
to one of
the RFU0
to RFU5
ports on
the
DCDU-0
1.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connects to one
of the LOAD0
to LOAD5
ports on the
DCDU-11A in
the RFC.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
l The other end

connects to the
PWR port on an
RRU among
RFU 0 to RFU
5.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on an
RRU
among
RFU 0 to
RFU 5.
P
8
Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.
Cha
nge
Typ
e
To
be
repl
aced
Reu
sed
l The other end

connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.
Figure 2-71 shows the signal cable changes in the RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

104
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-71 Signal cable changes in the RFC
No.
S1
Cable
RFC (Ver.B)
Monitoring
Signal
Cable for
the Door
Status
Sensor
RFC (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are bare
wires.
l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.
Both ends
are bare
wires.
l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
105
BTS3900A
No.
S2
Cable

(Ver.D_C)
RFC (Ver.B)
ELU signal
cable
RFC (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU.
S3
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
RFC
l One end
is a 4-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is a
temperat
ure
sensor.
l One end
connects
to the
TEM
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.
l The
other
end is
bound
nearby
the air
intake
vent at
the
bottom
of the
RFC.
Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU.
l One end
is a 4-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is a
temperat
ure
sensor.
l One end
connects
to the
TEM
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
Reused
l The
other end
is bound
nearby
the air
intake
vent at
the
bottom
of the
RFC.

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The
procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C) is the same as the procedure for
replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

106
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Prerequisites
Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Power off the fan assembly.
If...
Then...
An RFC (Ver.B) Turn off the FAN circuit breaker on the DCDU-01.
is used
An RFC (Ver.C) Turn off the SW6 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11A.
is used
Step 3 Remove the original fan assembly.
1.
Record all cable connections on the panel of the fan assembly.
2.
Remove all the cables from the front panel of the fan assembly.
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears on both sides
of the fan assembly, and pull the box out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as
NOTE
The procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B) is the same as the procedure for replacing
a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C). Figure 2-72 uses an RFC (Ver.C) as an example.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

107
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
4.
Place the removed fan assembly into an ESD box or bag.
Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten
the four screws on the mounting ears on both sides to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
----End

(ELU).
Prerequisites
Context
The ELU is on the inner right side of the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-73.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

108
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Procedure
NOTICE
1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Figure 2-75.
109
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)

NOTE
(2) BOM code
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU

station
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

base station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

equipment
l Ver.B: 02113830

l Ver.B: 02113827
l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
l Ver.C: 02113398
l Ver.C: 02113395

110
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397
1.
2.
3.
l
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-01 or DCDU-11A
in an RFC.
Prerequisites
Context
As shown by Figure 2-77, a DCDU-01 is located in the top 1 U space of an RFC (Ver.B). The
DCDU-11A in an RFC (Ver.C) is in the same position as the DCDU-01.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

111
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-77 Position of the DCDU-01
Procedure
NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD
gloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 2 Switch off all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU to power off the fan assembly and RFUs.
Step 3 Power off the DCDU.
If...
Then...
An RFC (Ver.B) Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPS.
is installed in an
AC power
supply scenario
An RFC (Ver.B) Switch off the external power supply.
is installed in a
DC power
supply scenario
An RFC (Ver.C) Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPU.
is installed in an
AC power
supply scenario
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

112
BTS3900A
If...

(Ver.D_C)
Then...
An RFC (Ver.C) Switch off the external power supply.

is installed in a
DC power
supply scenario
Step 4 Remove the old DCDU.
1.
Record the positions of all connectors on the DCDU, and remove the connectors.
2.
3.
4.
NOTE
The procedure for removing a DCDU-01 is the same as that for removing a DCDU-11A. Figure 2-78 and Figure
2-79 use a DCDU-11A as an example.
DCDU
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

113
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 6 Install a new DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 2-81.
1.
Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 2-80.
Figure 2-80 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A
(1) Double-sided tape
2.
Place the new DCDU-12A on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the
DCDU-12A into the cabinet.
3.
Tighten the two screws on each side of the DCDU-12A to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

114
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-81 Installing the DCDU-12A
(1) DCDU-12A
(2) Cable claw
----End
2.8.5 Replacing the RFU

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the RFU.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or a pair
of ESD gloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.
Context
l
RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU
V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, and LRFU.
If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking
for TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
Replacing an RFU interrupts services carried by the RFU.
Replacing an RFU takes about 6 to 10 minutes.
DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced. For details about
how to remove the GATM and Bias-Tee, see 2.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and
Bias-Tee.
A handle is used during the replacement. The handle is placed on the lower left side of the
document holder on the cabinet door, as shown in Figure 2-82.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

115
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-82 Position of the handle
NOTE
The handle is only for pulling an RFU outwards horizontally.
Procedure
NOTE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, to prevent
electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the RFU to be replaced.

1.
Turn off the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to power off the
RFU.
2.
Label the power cable for the RFU to be replaced, and disconnect the cable.
3.
Label the RF jumper for the RFU to be replaced, loosen the DIN 7/16 male elbow connector
on the RF jumper, and disconnect the RF jumper.
4.
Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the fiber.
5.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws at the four corners of the RFU, and then
pull the RFU handle to move the RFU outwards 50 mm (1.97 in.) to 100 mm (3.94 in.), as
shown in Figure 2-83. Hold the RFU with one hand, and remove the RFU from the cabinet
with the other hand.
CAUTION
The RFU is heavy. Therefore, handle it with caution.
6.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Place the handle in its original position.

116
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-83 Removing the RFU
Step 3 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC, as shown in
Figure 2-84. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is
used, skip this step.
1.
Strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton padding, and adhere the windproof cotton
padding to the position of "1" in Figure 2-84.
2.
Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the
RFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure
2-84, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.
3.
Strip all pieces of windproof cotton padding left on the cabinet wall after removing the
windproof cotton padding.
Figure 2-84 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC
(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom right
side of the RFC
Step 4 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC, as shown in Figure
2-85. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is used, skip
this step.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

117
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1.
2.
Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom left side of the
3.
Figure 2-85 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC
(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom
left side of the RFC
Step 5 Install the new RFU.

1.
Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the rails until it snaps into place.
2.
Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners of the RFU panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.) to
secure the RFU to the subrack.
----End
2.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box

The DC junction box in an RFC converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.
Skip this section if an RFC (Ver.C) is used, which has already been configured with a DC junction
box.
Prerequisites
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
In AC scenarios, the RFC power terminals in the EPU are connected to the DCDU-12A,
which then distributes DC power to the RFC, the DC junction box is not configured.
118
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
In DC scenarios, the external power supply is directly connected to the DC junction box,
which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Remove the DC junction box, as shown in Figure 2-86.
1.
Remove the screw from the protective cover for the DC junction box and then remove
protective cover.
2.
Remove the two screws from the DC junction box and then remove the DC junction box.
Figure 2-86 Removing the DC junction box
Step 3 Install the DC junction box in the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-87.
1.
Remove the two M6 screws from the left wall of the RFC.
2.
Align the two holes on the right side of the installation plate with the two holes left in Step
3.1, and secure them with the two removed M6 screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
3.
Place the DC junction box on the installation plate, and secure them with two M4 screws
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

119
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-87 Installing the DC junction box
NOTE
It is recommended that the protective cover be reinstalled after all required cables are connected to the DC
junction box.
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC cabinet
after you restructure the RFC.
Prerequisites
Context
Table 2-13 describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

120
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the RFC
EPC4
connector
LOAD6 port
on the
DCDU-12A
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the RFC
The cable is
newly
delivered. It
is 1.1 m (3.61
ft) long.
Input power
cable from
the DC
junction box
to the
DCDU-12A
in the RFC
OT terminal
(M6)
DC junction
box in the
RFC
OT terminals DCDU-12A
in the RFC
l A 0.3 m
(0.98 ft)
cable
with a
blue wire
and a
black
wire is
newly
delivered
for an
RFC
(Ver.B).
l The
original
cable is
used in an
RFC
(Ver.C).
The
newly
delivered
cable can
be
disposed
of.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

121

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
RFU power
cables
EPC4
connector
One of
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
ports on the
DCDU-12A
3V3
connector
PWR port on
one of RFU 0
to RFU 5
Six RFU
power cables
are newly
delivered.
Power cables
for RFU 0 to
RFU 2 are
1.5 m (4.92
ft) and power
cables for
RFU 3 to
RFU 5 are
1.1 m (3.61
ft).

Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
Bare wire
GATE port
on the fan
assembly
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
Reused
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the fan
assembly
RJ45
connector
ELU
Reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
RFC
4-pin
connector
TEM port on
the fan
assembly in
the RFC
Temperature
sensor
Air intake
vent at the
bottom of an
RFC
Reused
Procedure
l
Install power cables in the RFC.

1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the RFC, as shown by P1 in Figure
2-88.
122
BTS3900A
2.
3.

(Ver.D_C)
a.
on the DCDU-12A.
b.
lbfin.).
Optional: Install the input power cable for the RFC (from the DC junction box to the
DCDU-12A), as shown by P2 in Figure 2-88. If the cabinet is an RFC (Ver.B) in an
AC power supply scenario, skip this step.
a.
Optional: Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+)
and NEG(-) terminals in the DC junction box on an inner wall of the RFC, and
tighten the terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.). In an RFC (Ver.C), one end of
the power cable has been connected to the DC junction box. Therefore, skip this
step for an RFC (Ver.C).
b.
Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN+ and
NEG- terminals on the DCDU-12A, and tighten the terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).
Install the RFU power cables, as shown by P3 to P8 in Figure 2-88.

a.
Connect the end of the power cables with an EPC4 connector to one of the
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12A.
b.
Connect the end of the power cables with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port on
the corresponding RFU, and tighten the screws on the connectors to 0.4 Nm
(3.54 lbfin.).
Figure 2-88 Installing power cables in the RFC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

123
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
4.
5.
Install signal cables in the RFC.

1.

a.
top of the ELU.
b.
on the fan assembly in the RFC.
2.
Connect one end of the door status monitoring signal cable with bare wires to the
GATE port on the fan assembly, as shown by S2 in Figure 2-89.
3.
Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the RFC, as shown
by S3 in Figure 2-89.
a.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the temperature sensor near
the air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.
b.
Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable to
the TEM port on the fan assembly in the RFC.
Figure 2-89 Installing signal cables in the RFC
4.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
124
BTS3900A
5.

(Ver.D_C)
----End


IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet
This section describes the changes to be made on the components and cables in an IBBS200D
Component Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet

The component changes in the IBBS200D cabinet are the same as those in the IBBS200T cabinet.
This section uses the IBBS200D as an example. Figure 2-90 shows component changes in the
IBBS200D cabinet.
Figure 2-90 Components in the IBBS200D cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
ELU
To be
replace
d

Storage
battery
Reused

125
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Door status
sensor
Reused
Power
distribution
box
To be
replace
d
The power distribution box needs to be replaced to

enhance the power backup capacity.
Junction
terminal for
the input
power
cable of the
heating
film
Reused
Battery
temperatur
e sensor
Reused
Cable Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet

Figure 2-91 shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the IBBS200T.
Figure 2-91 Equipotential cable and power cables in the battery cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

126
BTS3900A
N
o.
P
1
P
2
Cable

(Ver.D_C)
IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T

(Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
Power
transfer
cable for
the fan or
TEC in
the front
door
l One end
is a 3V3
connector
.
l One end
connects
to the
CMUA.
l One end
is a 3V3
connector
.
l One end
connects to the
PWR port on
the CMUE.
l The other
end is an
OT
terminal.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
l The other
end is an
OT
terminal.
l The other end

connects to the
power
distribution
box.
RTN(+)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.
NEG(-)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
To
be
repl
aced
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
power
distribution
box.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
3
Cha
nge
Typ
e

l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
power
distribution
box.
127

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
N
o.
P
4
Cable
RTN(+)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries
IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)

(Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.
NEG(-)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
power
distribution
box.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
6
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
power
distribution
box.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
5
Cha
nge
Typ
e

l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.
l The other end
connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.
To
be
reus
ed
(repl
ace
men
t of
the
term
inals
not
requ
ired)
128
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-92 shows signal cable changes in the cabinet.

Figure 2-92 Signal cable changes in the battery cabinet
No.
S1
Cable
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status
sensor
IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or
IBBS200T (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are bare
wires.
l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RF
cabinet
(RFC).
Both ends
are bare
wires.
l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
129

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
No.
S2
Cable
ELU signal
cable
IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or
IBBS200T (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU.
Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU.
2.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power distribution box
in the battery cabinet.
Prerequisites
DANGER
When replacing batteries, prevent short circuits or reverse connections between the positive and
negative poles of the storage batteries. All tools used for installation must be insulated to prevent
the batteries from burning and to ensure personal safety.
Context
Before replacing the power distribution box, remove all storage batteries from the cabinet.
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

130
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
NOTICE
Step 2 Power off the battery cabinet.
If...
Then...
An IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T

(Ver.B) is used
1. Remove the tool-less female connector

(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on the
EPS.
2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker on
the EPS.
3. Turn off the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1
circuit breakers on the power distribution
box.
4. Turn off the BAT circuit breaker on the EPS.
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C) 1. Remove the tool-less female connector

EPU.
the EPU.
box.
4. Turn off the FAN/TEC_SW2 circuit breaker
on the power distribution box.
Step 3 Remove the storage batteries.
1.
Remove the terminal covers from the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 2-93.
Figure 2-93 Removing the terminal covers from the storage batteries
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

131
BTS3900A
2.

(Ver.D_C)
Use temporary labels to mark the input power cables for the positive and negative poles on
the storage batteries and the serial connection copper bars between the storage batteries,
and remove the input power cables and copper bars, as shown in Figure 2-94.
Figure 2-94 Removing the power cables for storage batteries
3.
Reinstall the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.
4.
Hold the slings on the storage batteries and pull the storage batteries out. Then use both
hands to remove the storage batteries at the same layer, and place the storage batteries in
a safe position.
NOTE
l Remove the baffle plate and storage batteries layer by layer from top down. After removing the
baffle plate at one layer, you must remove all storage batteries at this layer before removing the
baffle plate at the lower layer.
l Use both hands to hold each storage battery to avoid falling.
l When placing the storage batteries outdoors, do not expose them to the sunlight.
Step 4 Remove the storage battery power cables and power transfer cable for the TEC or fan in the
front door from the power distribution box.
Step 5 Remove the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 2-95.
1.
Remove the two screws from the left cover plate of the power distribution box and remove
the cover plate.
2.
Remove the four screws from the interior of the power distribution box.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

132
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-95 Removing the power distribution box
3.
Take the power distribution box out and use insulation tape to wrap the OT terminals on
the cables connected to the power distribution box.
4.
Place the power distribution box into an ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Install rubber protective caps onto the screws for the earthquake-proof support on the top of the
battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-96.
Figure 2-96 Installing rubber protective caps
(1) Screws for the earthquake-proof support
(2) Rubber protective caps
Step 7 Install cables in the power distribution box.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

133
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1.
Remove the cover plate from the new power distribution box.
2.
Install cables in the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 2-97.

Figure 2-97 Installing cables in the power distribution box
(1) NEG(-) cable for the (2) RTN(+) cable for the (3) NEG(-) cable for the (4) RTN(+) cable for the
upper storage batteries upper storage batteries lower storage batteries lower storage batteries
NOTE
The power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the battery cabinet has been connected
to the new power distribution box before delivery.
Step 8 Install the power distribution box in the battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-98.
1.
Place the new power distribution box in the battery cabinet.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the four M4x8 screws in the power distribution box
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
3.
Install the cover plate on the left side of the power distribution box and tighten the two
M3x6 screws on the cover plate to 0.55 Nm (4.87 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

134
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-98 Installing the power distribution box
----End

(ELU).
Prerequisites
l
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves,
a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
There is an ELU on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet, as shown in
Figure 2-99.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

135
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-99 Position of the ELU in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet
Procedure
NOTICE
1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Figure 2-101.
136
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)

NOTE
(2) BOM code
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU

station
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

base station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

equipment
l Ver.B: 02113830

l Ver.B: 02113827
l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
l Ver.C: 02113398
l Ver.C: 02113395

137
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397
1.
2.
3.
l
----End
2.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing storage batteries and cables
in the battery cabinet after you restructure the battery cabinet.
Prerequisites
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

138
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
Power
transfer
cable for the
TEC or fan in
the front
door
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the CMUEA
OT terminals Power
(M4, 2.5
Distribution
Box
mm2 or
2
0.004 in. )
Delivered
with the
power
distribution
box
RTN(+)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
Distribution
Box
The cable is
newly
delivered.
NEG(-)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
Distribution
Box
The cable is
newly
delivered.
RTN(+)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
Distribution
Box
The cable is
newly
delivered.
NEG(-)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
Distribution
Box
The cable is
newly
delivered.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU port in
the CMUEA
RJ45
connector
ELU
To be reused

139
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
Bare wire
GATE port
on the
CMUEA
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
To be reused
Procedure
l
Install storage batteries and power cables in the battery cabinet.

1.
Install the power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the cabinet, as
shown by P1 in Figure 2-103.
2.
Place power cables for the storage batteries. The NEG(-) cables are black and RTN
(+) cables are red. P2 and P3 in Figure 2-103 show the routing of these power cables.
Figure 2-103 Installing copper bars and power cables in the battery cabinet
3.
Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in
Figure 2-104.
NOTE
The battery cell should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reserved
between battery cells.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

140
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-104 Installing the storage batteries
4.
Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 2-105.
a.
Remove terminal covers from the storage batteries.
b.
Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for series
connections.
c.
Install the NEG(-) cables and then RTN(+) cables for the storage batteries, and
tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
141
BTS3900A
6.
l

(Ver.D_C)
Install signal cables in the battery cabinet.

1.
2.

a.
Connect the ELU signal cable to the port on the ELU.
b.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU
port on the CMUEA.
2-106.
a.
Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the door status sensor.
b.
Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on the
CMUEA.
Figure 2-106 Installing signal cables in the battery cabinet
3.
4.
----End


This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in an
APM30H or TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

142
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Prerequisites
Phillips screwdriver, and a torque screwdriver.
Context
l
When a second BBU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that the second BBU
be installed right above or below the original BBU without removing the guide rails.
Figure 2-107 shows the position for installing the BBU case in the APM30H and TMC11H.
Figure 2-107 Position for installing the BBU case
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Remove the filler module from the position where the BBU case is to be installed, as
shown in Figure 2-108. If no filler module is installed in this position, skip this step.
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting ear on each
side of the filler module.
2.
Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.

NOTE
Install removed filler modules in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top to bottom. Redundant
filler modules can be discarded.
Figure 2-108 Removing the filler module
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

143
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 2 Record the ESN on the BBU case and report it to the base station commissioning personnel. For
details, see Obtaining the ESN.
Step 3 Install cable claws on the BBU, as shown in Figure 2-109.
1.
Align the two cable claws with the holes on either side of the BBU case.
2.
Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw with a torque of 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 2-109 Installing cable claws on the BBU
Step 4 Install the BBU case, as shown in Figure 2-110.

1.
Place the BBU on the guide rails and slowly slide the BBU into the cabinet.
2.
Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ears on either side of the BBU to 2 Nm (17.70
lbfin.).
Figure 2-110 Installing the BBU case
Step 5 Install the BBU power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-111.
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructions
in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
144
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
NOTE
A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connector
must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.
2.
Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.
3.
Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on the
EPU in the APM30H.
CAUTION
When installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connect
the BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the EPU. Operations in the reverse sequence
may cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
NOTE
Figure 2-111 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30H. When the BBU case is installed in a TMC11H, the
cable connections are the same.
Figure 2-111 Installing the BBU power cable in AC scenarios
Step 6 Install the BBU power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-112.
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
145
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
NOTE
2.
3.
DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.
CAUTION
the BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequence
NOTE
Figure 2-112 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC11H. When the BBU case is installed in an extension
TMC11H, the cable connections are the same.
Figure 2-112 Installing the BBU power cable in DC scenarios
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

146
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 7 Install inter-BBU signal cables. For details, see 2.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal
Cables.
Step 8 Install the transmission cables. For details, see 2.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables.
----End
2.10.2 Installing the BBU Components

This section describes how to install the boards into the BBU and SLPU.
Context
NOTE
This chapter only describes the procedure for installing components in the BBU. For details about the slots
where the BBU components are installed, see the BBU configuration information.
CAUTION
Take correct ESD prevention measures, such as wearing an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, to
avoid static damage to boards, modules, and electronic components.
Operation Rules
l
When moving a board, hold the board with both hands, as shown in Figure 2-113.
Figure 2-113 Incorrect and correct operations for moving a board
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
When installing a board, hold the front panel with one hand and support the edge of the
board with the other hand to insert it into the slot. Do not use only one hand to hold the
board or apply pressure to the edge of the board. Figure 2-114 shows correct and incorrect
operations.

147
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-114 Incorrect and correct operations for supporting a board for installation
When inserting a board into a slot, keep the board on the same plane as the slot. Do not
bend the board or insert it at an angle. Figure 2-115 shows correct and incorrect operations.
Figure 2-115 Incorrect and correct operations for inserting a board
CAUTION
l Exercise cautions when holding and placing boards to avoid collision or scratches. Do not
stack or deform boards after they are unpacked.
l When inserting a board, ensure that it does not collide with the subrack and is properly
installed.
Installing the boards into the BBU

Figure 2-116 uses the WMPT and UPEU as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the
BBU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

148
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1.
Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the filler
panels from the slots.
2.
If there are ejector levers on the panel, raise them.
3.
Gently slide the board into the slot.
4.
If there are ejector levers on the panel, close them.
5.
Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).
Figure 2-116 Installing the boards into the BBU
Installing the boards into the SLPU

Figure 2-117 uses the UELP as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the SLPU.
1.
2.
3.
Figure 2-117 Installing the boards into the SLPU
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

149
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
2.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the DCDU-12B.
Prerequisites
Context
When RFUs and RRUs are configured in the BTS3900A, a DCDU-12B must be installed in the
RFC to supply power to RRUs.
Figure 2-118 shows the position of the DCDU-12B in the RFC.
Figure 2-118 Position of the DCDU-12B
Table 2-18 lists the specifications of DCDU-12B power cables in AC and DC scenarios.
Table 2-18 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables
Cable
DCDU12B
input
power
cable
(in AC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
RT
N
(+)
Col
or
CrossSectional
Area of
the Cable
One End
The Other End
Connec
tor
Installation
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Bla
ck
25 mm2 or
0.039 in2,
one group
OT
terminal
(M6)
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals in
the INPUT
part of the
DCDU-12B in
the RFC
OT
terminal
(M6)
RFC2
terminal on
the EPU in
the
APM30H

150
BTS3900A
Cable
Col
or
scenari
os)
NE
G
(-)
Blu
e
DCDU12B
input
power
cable
(in DC
scenari
os)
RT
N
(+)
Bla
ck
NE
G
(-)
Blu
e

(Ver.D_C)
CrossSectional
Area of
the Cable
One End
The Other End
Connec
tor
Installation
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
l 35
mm2 or
0.054
in.2
(low
smoke
zero
halogen
), one
group
OT
terminal
(M6)
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals in
the INPUT
part of the
DCDU-12B in
the RFC
Depending
on the
external
equipment
External
power
equipment
l 16
mm2 or
0.025
in2, two
groups
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B.
Step 2 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 2-119.
1.
Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on the DCDU-12B contact the columns.
2.
Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.), as
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

151
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-119 Installing the DCDU-12B
(1) DCDU-12B
(2) Cable claw
Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-120. Skip this
step in DC scenarios.
1.
Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For details, see Assembling the OT
Terminal and the Power Cable.
2.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal RFC2
on the EPU in the APM30H.
3.
Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the
DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input wiring
terminals on the DCDU-12B. Then reinstall the protective cover.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

152
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-120 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in AC scenarios
Step 4 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-121.
1.
Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For how to add a connector to the power
cable on the DCDU-12B side, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The
type of the connector at the other end depends on the onsite conditions.
2.
Connect the connector at the other end of the power cable to external power equipment.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

153
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-121 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in DC scenarios
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cables.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End

during the upgrade.
2.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.C)

This section describes the changes of power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables,
transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between cabinets during
the upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).
Power Cables, PGND Cables, and Equipotential Cables

Table 2-19 lists the changes of power cables, PGND cables, and equipotential cables.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

154

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Table 2-19 Changes of power cables, PGND cables, and Equipotential cables
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Input
power
cable
for the
APM3
0H (in
AC
scenar
ios)
To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
OT
termin
al
(M6)
AC
INPU
T port
on the
EPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment
Exter
nal
power
equip
ment
OT
termin
al
(M6)
AC
INPU
T port
on the
EPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment
Extern
al
power
equip
ment
Input
power
cable
for the
TMC1
1H (in
AC
scenar
ios)
To be
reuse
d, and
the
conne
ctor at
one
end
needs
to be
replac
ed
onsite
.
Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)
TMC
port on
the
EPU
OT
termin
al
(M6, 4
mm2
or
0.006
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-11
C
EPC4
connec
tor
LOAD
7 port
on the
EPU
OT
termin
al (M6,
4 mm2
or
0.006
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-12C

155

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Power
cable
for the
juncti
on box
in the
TMC1
1H
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L3 and
N3
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L and
N
termi
nals
near
the
AC
OUT
PUT
part
on the
juncti
on
box in
the
TMC
11H
OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L3 and
N3
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L and
N
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
TMC1
1H
Input
power
cable
for the
TMC1
1H
(when
the
TMC1
1H
uses
DC
power
suppli
ed by
the
RFC
cabine
t)
To be
replac
ed
OT
termin
al
(M6,
25
mm2
or
0.039
in.2)
Juncti
on box
in the
RFC
OT
termin
al
(M6,
25
mm2
or
0.039
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-11
C
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Juncti
on box
in the
RFC
OT
termin
al (M6,
25
mm2
or
0.039
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-12C

156
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type

(Ver.D_C)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in DC
scenar
ios)
To be
replac
ed
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Juncti
on
box in
the
RFC
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Juncti
on box
in the
RFC
Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in AC
scenar
ios)
To be
replac
ed
Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(blue)
Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(blue)
on the
EPU
OT
termin
al
Juncti
on
box in
the
RFC
OT
termin
al
(M6)
RFC1
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al
Juncti
on box
in the
RFC
RRU
power
cable
To be
reuse
d(1)
Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)
One of
LOAD
8 to
LOAD
13
ports
on the
EPU
Depen
ding
on the
RRU
port
EPC5
or
EPC4
connec
tor
One of
LOAD
0 to
LOAD
8 ports
on the
DCD
U-12B
Depen
ding
on the
RRU
port
PWR
port on
the
RRU
Input
power
cable
for the
heater
(in AC
scenar
ios)
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L1 and
N1
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
EPU
C13
connec
tor
Heate
r/
power
input
port
OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L1 and
N1
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
EPU
C13
connec
tor
Heater
/power
input
port

157

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Power
cables
for a
batter
y
cabine
t
To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(grey)
Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(grey)
on the
EPU
OT
termin
al
(M6,
16
mm2
or
0.025
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
on the
BAT
in the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200D
or
IBBS
200T
OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)
BAT
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als on
the
BAT
in the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T
Power
cables
for the
fan in
an
IBBS2
00D
To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)
LOAD
3 port
on the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al
(M4,
2.5
mm2
or
0.004
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
on the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200D
EPC4
connec
tor
LOAD
8 port
on the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H
EPC4
connec
tor
FAN/
TEC_I
NPUT
port on
the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00D

158
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type

(Ver.D_C)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Power
cable
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS2
00D
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L1 and
N1
termin
als or
L2 and
N2
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box
OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L and
N
termi
nals
on the
juncti
on
box
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS
200D
OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)
L1 and
N1
termin
als or
L2 and
N2
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box
OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L and
N
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS2
00D
Power
cable
for the
TEC
in the
IBBS2
00T
To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)
LOAD
3 port
on the
EPU
OT
termin
al
(M4,
2.5
mm2
or
0.004
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
FAN
silksc
reen
on the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200T
EPC4
connec
tor
LOAD
8 port
on the
EPU
EPC4
connec
tor
FAN/
TEC_I
NPUT
port on
the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00T
Equip
otentia
l cable
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabin
et
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabine
t

159
BTS3900A
Cable
PGND
cable
Chan
ge
Type
To be
reuse
d

(Ver.D_C)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
for the
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d
busba
r
outsid
e the
cabin
et
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
for the
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d
busbar
outsid
e the
cabine
t
NOTE
(1) The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length requirements
of the new RRU.
Signal Cables
Table 2-20 lists the signal cable changes.
Table 2-20 Signal cable changes
Cable
Monitor
ing
signal
cable
between
cascade
d
CMUE
As
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
To
be
reus
ed
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
OUT
port on
the
upperlevel
CMU
A
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
lowerlevel
CMU
A
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
OUT
port on
the
upperlevel
CMU
EA
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
lowerlevel
CMU
EA

160
BTS3900A
Cable
Monitor
ing
signal
cable
for a
battery
cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
To
be
reus
ed

(Ver.D_C)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
CMU
A in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
485
port on
the
PMU
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
CMU
EA in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
485
port on
the
PMU

161
BTS3900A
Cable
CMUA
-BBU
monitor
ing
signal
cable
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
To
be
reus
ed

(Ver.D_C)
Before the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
RJ45
conne
ctor
l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UA
in
the
RF
C
RJ45
conne
ctor
l M
ON
0
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H
RJ45
conne
ctor
l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UE
A
in
the
RF
C
RJ45
conne
ctor
l M
ON
0
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
RF
C
l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UA
in
the
AP
M3
0H
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
After the Change
l M
ON
1
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H

l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UE
A
in
the
AP
M3
0H
l M
ON
1
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H
162
BTS3900A
Cable
BBU
intercon
nection
cable
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
To
be
reus
ed

(Ver.D_C)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
DLC
conne
ctor
One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU
DLC
conne
ctor
l CI
por
t on
the
U
MP
T
in
the
BB
U
DLC
conne
ctor
One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU
DLC
conne
ctor
l CI
por
t on
the
U
MP
T
in
the
BB
U
l S0
por
t on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
l S0
por
t on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U
BBU
alarm
cable
To
be
reus
ed
RJ45
conne
ctor
EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU
RJ45
conne
ctor
Extern
al
alarm
device
RJ45
conne
ctor
EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU
RJ45
conne
ctor
Extern
al
alarm
device
Cable
between
two
combin
ed base
stations
To
be
reus
ed
DB15
male
conne
ctor
GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU
MD36
or
DB15
male
conne
ctor
DGLU
b on
the
DCTB
DB15
male
conne
ctor
GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU
MD36
or
DB15
male
conne
ctor
DGLU
b on
the
DCTB

163
BTS3900A
Cable
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

(Ver.D_C)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Externa
l dry
contact
monitor
ing
signal
cable
To
be
reus
ed
Bare
wire
SLPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment
Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment
Bare
wire
SLPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment
Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment
Adapter
used for
local
mainten
ance
To
be
reus
ed
USB
3.0
conne
ctor
USB
port on
the
UMPT
in the
BBU
Ethern
et
conne
ctor
Ethern
et
cable
USB
3.0
conne
ctor
USB
port on
the
UMPT
in the
BBU
Ethern
et
conne
ctor
Ethern
et
cable
Transmission Cables and CPRI Electrical Cables

Table 2-21 lists the changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables.
Table 2-21 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
E1/T1
cable
To be
reused
DB26 male
connector
OUTSIDE port
on the UELP in
the SLPU
Depending on
the external
transmission
equipment
External
transmission
equipment
FE/GE
Etherne
t cables
To be
reused
RJ45 connector FE electrical

port in the
OUTSIDE part
on the UFLP in
the SLPU
RJ45 connector
Router that is
connected to
the BSC

164
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
FE/GE
fiber
optic
cable
To be
reused
LC connector
l FE optical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT,
UMPT, or
UTRP in
the BBU
l FC
connector
Router that is
connected to
the BSC
l SC
connector
l LC
connector
l FE optical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
E1/T1
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable
To be
reused
DB25
connector
INSIDE port
on the UELP in
the SLPU
FE/GE
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable
To be
reused
RJ45 connector l FE
electrical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT, or
UMPT in
the BBU
DB26
connector
E1/T1 port on
the GTMU,
WMPT,
UMPT, or
UTRP in the
BBU
RJ45 connector
FE electrical
port in the
INSIDE part on
the UFLP in the
SLPU
LC connector
FE optical port
on the WMPT/
UMPT, LMPT/
UMPT, or
GTMU in the
BBU
l FE
electrical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
optical
ports
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
To be
reused
LC connector
FE optical port
on the GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU

165
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
electric
al ports
To be
reused

port on the
GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU
CPRI
electric
al
cables
To be
reused
SFP20 male
connector
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
GTMU in
the BBU
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
RJ45 connector
FE electrical
port on the
WMPT/UMPT,
LMPT/UMPT,
or GTMU in the
BBU
SFP20 male
connector
l CPRI0 or
CPRI1 port
on one of
MRFU 0 to
MRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
GRFU 0 to
GRFU 5
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5 (or
CPRI0 to
CPRI2)
ports on the
WBBP in
the BBU
l CPRI0 port
on one of
WRFU 0 to
WRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
LRFU 0 to
LRFU 5
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
LBBP in the
BBU
RF Cables
Table 2-22 lists the RF cable changes.
Table 2-22 RF cable changes
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Change
Type
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
RF jumper
To be reused
DIN straight
male
connector
Antenna
feeder
DIN elbow
male
connector
ANT_TX/
RXA and
ANT_RXB
ports on the
RFU

166
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Cable
Change
Type
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Inter-RFU
RF signal
cable
To be reused
QMA elbow
male
connector
RX_OUTA
port on the
RFU
QMA elbow
male
connector
RX_INB
port on an
RFU
2.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for various
cabinets when AC power is supplied.
Installing Input Power Cable for the APM30H

The input power cable for the APM30H connects the external power equipment to the input
wiring terminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the cabinets in the BTS3900A.
Prerequisites
l
The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
The PGND cable is installed.
The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.
The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:
Context
The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.

Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
The cabinets used by the BTS3900A in AC scenarios support the power supplies of 220 V AC
three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire. Table 2-23 lists the input
power cables that are delivered for the APM30H supplied with different type of power.
Table 2-23 Specifications of input power cables for the APM30H
Cable
Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
220 V AC threephase power
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
L1
wire
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
Brown
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
l Prepared
onsite

l Black cable
with dual
insulation
167

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
L2
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
L3
wire
Gray
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
N
wire
Blue
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
220 V AC
single-phase
power
L wire
Brown
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
N
wire
Blue
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
110 V AC duallive-wire power
L1
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
L2
wire
Red
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
N
wire
White
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Remarks
layers and
four core
wires
l Prepared
onsite
l Two wires (L
and N), each
with a single
core and two
insulation
layers
l Prepared
onsite
l Three wires
(L1, L2, and
N), each with
a single core
and two
insulation
layers
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the APM30H.
1.
Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Add an OT terminal to each end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling
the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the APM30H, as shown in Figure 2-122, Figure 2-123, or
Figure 2-124.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

168
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover for the AC
input terminals, and open the protective cover.
2.
Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting bar
from the L1, L2, and L3 terminals.
NOTE
When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110 V AC
dual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.
3.
Route the power cable into the cabinet along the left side, connect each wire to the
corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).
4.
Reinstall the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screw on the protective
cover to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).
Figure 2-122 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC
three-phase)
(1) Short-circuiting bar
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

169
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
single-phase)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

170
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
dual-live-wire)
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H

The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H include the input power cable for the
TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed power
from the APM30H into the TMC11H and other equipment. You need to reuse the power cables
from the APM30H to the TMC11H with replacing the connectors at both ends.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

171

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Context
l

Table 2-24 lists the specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H.
Table 2-24 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H
Cable
Input power
cable for the
TMC11H
Power cable
for the
junction box
in the
TMC11H
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
OT terminal
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
EPC4 connector
OT terminal
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)
To be reused, and
the connectors at
both ends need to
be replaced.
L wire
Brow
n
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
N wire
Blue
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the
TMC11H.
1.
2.
Add a connector to each end of the input power cable for the TMC11H and the power cable
for the junction box in the TMC11H according to the instructions in Table 1. For details,
see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector
and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-125.
1.
Remove the protective cover from the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.
2.
Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal
LOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30H.
3.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminals
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

172
BTS3900A
4.

(Ver.D_C)
Reinstall the protective cover onto the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.
Figure 2-125 Installing the input power cable for the TMC11H
Step 3 Install the power cable for the junction box of the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-126.
1.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L3 and N3 terminals in the junction
box of the APM30H.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the AC input terminals L and N in the junction
box of the TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

173
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-126 Installing power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H
bind the cable.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the RFCs

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from the
APM30H to the RFCs.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

174

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Context
l

Table 2-25 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs.
Table 2-25 Power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)
A cable is newly
delivered.
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)
A cable is newly
delivered.
Input power
cable for the
RFC
(between the
APM30H
and the RFC
right below
the
APM30H)
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Input power
cable for the
RFC
(between the
APM30H
and the RFC
on the lower
right side)
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower side),
1.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC1 terminals on the EPU
in the APM30H.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the DC junction box in
the RFC on the lower side.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

175
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-127 Installing input power cables for the RFC
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower right
side), as shown in Figure 2-128.
1.
in the APM30H.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the DC junction box in
the RFC on the lower right side.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

176
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-128 Installing the input power cable for the RFC
bind the cable.
----End
Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (One
IBBS200D or IBBS200T Configured)
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from the
APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T when one IBBS200D or IBBS200T is configured in
the initial configuration.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

177

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Prerequisites
l
Context

l
A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Table 2-26 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Table 2-26 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T
Cable
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
Prepared onsite
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
Prepared onsite
OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.
2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
To be reused
Power cables
for the fan in
an
IBBS200D
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Power cable
for a battery
cabinet
RTN
(+)
wire
Red
NEG
(-)
wire
Black
L wire
Brow
n
N
wire
Blue
Power cable
for the
heating film
in the
IBBS200D
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Color

178
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the cable.
1.
Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS200D or IBBS200T) to be configured and
determine the cable to be prepared and installed according to Table 1.
2.
3.
Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:
l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable
l Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable
Step 2 Install the power cable for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 2-129.
1.
Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen
on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2.
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box in the
lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Figure 2-129 Installing the power cable for the battery cabinet
Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 2-130.
NOTE
If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

179
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1.
Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 on
the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2.
Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.
Figure 2-130 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly in the IBBS200D
Step 4 Install the power cable for the heating film in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 2-131.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.
1.
box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in the
junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

180
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-131 Installing the power cables for the heating films in the IBBS200Ds
NOTICE
When installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do not
connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 2-132.
l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.
l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from the
top, not from the bottom.
Figure 2-132 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of
the IBBS200Ds
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

181
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 5 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 2-133.
NOTE
Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.
1.
2.
Figure 2-133 Installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T
bind the cable.
NOTE
When routing cables along the right side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cables
that are routed in front of the power distribution box. For easy maintenance in the future, do not bind the cables
that are routed in front of the power distribution box.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

182
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
----End
Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
(Two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts Configured)
APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts when two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts are configured
in the initial configuration.
Prerequisites
l
Context

l
Table 2-27 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Table 2-27 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
Prepared onsite
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
The power cable

is reused with
connectors at
both end
replaced.
Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the
IBBS200D
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Cascading
power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the
IBBS200D
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue

183

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
Prepared onsite
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
The power cable

is reused with
connectors at
both end
replaced.
OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.
2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
To be reused
Power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Cascading
power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Power cable
for batteries
RTN
(+)
wire
Red
NEG
(-)
wire
Black
Cascading
power cable
for the
batteries
RTN
(+)
wire
Red
NEG
(-)
wire
Black
Power cable
(two wires)
for the
heating film
in the
IBBS200D
L wire
Brow
n
N
wire
Blue
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

184
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)

Step 2 Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P1 in Figure 2-134.
1.
Connect the OT terminal (M8) at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen
2.
terminals near the BAT silkscreen in the lower part of the power distribution box in the
Step 3 Install cascading power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-134.
1.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the upper part of the power distribution box in the
2.
wiring terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box
in the upper IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Figure 2-134 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the storage batteries
Step 4 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure 2-135.
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

185
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1.
2.
TEC silkscreen on the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
Step 5 Install the cascading power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure
2-135.
NOTE
1.
Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
2.
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.
Figure 2-135 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the fan in the
IBBS200D
Step 6 Install the power cable for the heating film in the upper IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure
2-136.
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

186
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1.
2.
junction box on the inner left wall of the upper IBBS200D.
Step 7 Install the power cable for the heating film in the lower IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure
2-136.
NOTE
1.
2.
junction box on the inner left wall of the lower IBBS200D.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

187
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
NOTICE
the IBBS200Ds
Step 8 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P1 in Figure 5.
NOTE
1.
2.
Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the FAN/TEC port near the
INPUT silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
Step 9 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-138.
NOTE
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

188
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-138 Installing the power cable and cascading power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T
bind the cable.
NOTE
----End
(Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable

When the BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

189
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Prerequisites
l
The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length
requirements of the new RRU.
The colors and structures of the power cables are for reference only, which may differ from
those of the cables onsite.
Context

l
The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the
RRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installation
guide.
Table 2-28 lists the specifications of RRU power cables when a DCDU-12B supplies
power.
Table 2-28 Specifications of the RRU power cable
Cable
RRU
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
RTN
(+)
Black
EPC5 or EPC4
connector
Depending on
the RRU port
NEG
(-)
Blue
l If the
original
RRU power
cable can be
reused, you
need to
replace the
connector on
the
DCDU-12B
side.
l If the
original
RRU power
cable must
be replaced,
you need to
add new
connectors
to both ends
of the new
RRU power
cable onsite.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

190
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Procedure
Step 1 Route the RRU power cable into the cabinet through the cable hole.
Step 2 Remove the ground clip in the cabinet, and put the removed ground clip into the ESD bag or
box.
Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 2-139.
1.
Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC to expose the shield layer.
2.
Strip the shield layer to expose the two core wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC.
3.
Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm
(10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 2-139 Installing the ground clip
4.
Install the PGND cables with the ground clips onto the two self-clinching studs on the right
wall of the RFC. Then tighten the self-clinching studs to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Step 4 Add an EPC5 or EPC4 connector to the RRU power cable on the DCDU-12B side. For details
about how to add the connector, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable or
Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Stick a temporary label onto the RRU power cable to be installed.
Step 6 Connect the one end of the cable to the RRU.
Step 7 Connect the EPC5 or EPC4 connector on the RRU power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD8
ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 2-140.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

191
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
CAUTION
When installing the RRU power cable for an RRU that is added to a running base station, connect
the RRU power cable first to the RRU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequence
Figure 2-140 Installing the RRU power cable
bind the cable.
Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailed
operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
2.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios

cabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

192

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Installing Input Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for the
RFC and TMC11H when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Prerequisites
l
Context

As listed in Table 2-29, power cables for the RFC have two specifications: 35 mm2 (0.05 in.2)
and 16 mm2 (0.02 in.2).
Table 2-29 Input power cables for the RFC
Cable
Input power
cable for the
RFC
RTN
(+)
wire
(35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2, one
group)
NEG
Blue
(-) wire
Input power
cable for the
RFC
RTN
(+)
wire
(16 mm2 or
0.02 in.2, two
groups)
NEG
Blue
(-) wire
Input power
cable for the
TMC11H
(the
TMC11H is
powered by
the RFC)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Color
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
Black
Black
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
OT terminal (M6,
35 mm2 or 0.05 in.
2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
The power
cable is made
onsite.
OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)
The power
cable is made
onsite.
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.02 in.
2)
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
NEG
Blue
(-) wire

193
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the RFC.
1.
2.
Add connectors to both ends of the input power cable for the RFC according to Table 1.
For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-141.
1.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals
in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the external power supply.
1.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the input power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG
(-) terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

194
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
bind the cable.
----End

Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

195
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Context
l
The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.

guide.
Table 2-30 lists the specifications of the RRU power cable when a DCDU-12B supplies
power.
Cable
RRU
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
RTN
(+)
Black
EPC5 or EPC4
connector
Depending on
the RRU port
NEG
(-)
Blue
l If the
original
RRU power
cable can be
reused, you
need to
replace the
connector on
the
DCDU-12B
side.
l If the
original
RRU power
cable must
be replaced,
you need to
add new
connectors
to both ends
of the new
RRU power
cable onsite.
NOTE
If the RRU is to be placed at a longer distance, replace the original RRU power cable with a longer
one.
Procedure
Step 1 Route an RRU power cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

196
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
box.
1.
2.
3.
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
NOTE
When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules:
l When one to three RRU power cables are installed, put all the RRU power cables on one side of the
ground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-143.
l When four or six RRU power cables are installed, put two or three RRU power cables on each side of
the ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-143.
l When five RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread three cables
through one ground clip and two cables through the other group clip, or thread four cables through
one ground clip or one cable through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 3 in Figure
2-143.
l When seven to ten RRU power cables or twelve RRU power cables are installed, use two ground clips
and comply with the preceding rules.
l When eleven RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread five
cables through one ground clip and six cables through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration
4 in Figure 2-143.
Figure 2-143 Installing the ground clips (side elevation view)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

197
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-144 Installing the ground clips
CAUTION
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

198
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
bind the cable.
----End
2.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables

This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing transmission cables between
a cabinet and the external transmission equipment.
Installing the E1/T1 Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the E1/T1 cable.
Context
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the
E1/T1 cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in the APM30H
that is shown in Figure 2-146.
199
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on the UELP, as shown in Figure
2-146.
NOTE
For the details about the cable connections,

l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station
Cables.
Figure 2-146 Installing the E1/T1 cable
Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable outlet on the bottom left side of the
cabinet.
bind the cable.
----End
Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable.
Context
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

200
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)

l
An FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable.
FE/GE Ethernet cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in
the APM30H that is shown in Figure 2-148.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE cable in a proper position within 1 m from the cable outlet
of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-147.
1.
Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE cable, and strip the sheath off the cable
for about 40 mm to expose the shield layer.
2.
Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.
3.
Make the shield layer of the FE/GE cable in full contact with the ground clip, and tighten
the M4 screws on the clip until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 Nm.
Figure 2-147 Installing a grounding clip
Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) port
near the OUTSIDE label on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 2-148.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

201
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
NOTE

Cables.
Figure 2-148 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable
Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet on
the bottom right side of the cabinet.
bind the cable.
----End
Installing the FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable.
Context
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

202
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeled
as MM.
The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multi-mode optical
module is black or gray.
The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
An FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC
connector, or LC connector at the other end.
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not
used simultaneously.
SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they are
not used simultaneously.
The method of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H is the same as the method
of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in a TMC11H. The following describes the procedure
for installing an FE/GE fiber optic cable in an APM30H.
NOTICE
An optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore,
you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 2-149.
1.
Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the corresponding
BBU board.
2.
Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.
3.
Lower the puller on the optical module.
4.
Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.
5.
Raise the puller on the optical module.
Figure 2-149 Installing the optical module
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

203
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 2 Insert the optical module into the corresponding FE/GE optical port, as shown in Figure
2-150.
NOTE

Cables.
Step 3 Stick a temporary label to the FE/GE fiber optic cable to be installed.
Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in Figure
2-150.
Figure 2-150 Installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable
Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet on
bind the cable.
Step 7 Replace the temporary label on the FE/GE fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For
detailed operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
2.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC

Scenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cables
between cabinets when AC power is supplied.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

204
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cable
between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H.
Context
l
When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 2-31 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable changes.
Table 2-31 Specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario
of 1 RFC+1 APM30H
Cable
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
Remarks
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 2-151.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

205
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-151 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Context
l
the cabinet. Table 2-32 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cables between two
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

206
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Table 2-32 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
To be reused
Battery
cabinet
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
RJ45
connector
COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 2-152.
1.
the RFC.
2.
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

207
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
APM30H)
Step 2 Install a battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T and
APM30H), as shown in Figure 2-153.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

208
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-153 Installing the battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D
or IBBS200T and APM30H)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

209
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 2-154.
1.
the RFC.
2.
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

210
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
APM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),
1.
the TMC11H.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

211
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-155 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the TMC11H and RFC)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
cabinets after the cable change.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

212
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
RJ45
connector
COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 2-156.
1.
the RFC.
2.
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

213
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
APM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T and
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

214
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-157 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet
1.
the TMC11H.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

215
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-158 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the TMC11H and RFC)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

216

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installation
Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
upper
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
and lower
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the upper
IBBS200D
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet
(between the
APM30H
and lower
battery
cabinet)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
RJ45
connector
COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 2-159.
1.
the RFC.
2.
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

217
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
APM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the upper IBBS200D/
IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T), as shown in Figure 2-160.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the upper
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA on the door of
the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

218
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-160 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the
upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery cabinet and the
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the lower
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

219
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-161 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery
cabinet and the APM30H)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

220

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet
(between the
APM30H
and lower
battery
cabinet)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
RJ45
connector
COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
upper
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
and lower
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the upper
IBBS200D
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 2-162.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

221
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1.
the RFC.
2.
APM30H.
APM30H)
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

222
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

223
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-164 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower
battery cabinet and the APM30H)
1.
the TMC11H.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

224
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
the TMC11H and RFC)
bind the cable.
----End
2.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48

V DC Scenarios
between cabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

225
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Table 2-37 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario
of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Cable
One End
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC11H)
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU of the
TMC11H
Remarks
To be
reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown in
Figure 2-166.
1.
the RFC.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

226
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
TMC11H)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs.
Context
Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the
cabinet. Table 2-38 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets
after the cable change.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

227
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
TMC11H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
TMC11H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
extension
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
RJ45
port on the
connector
CMUEA in
the extension
TMC11H
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 2-167.
1.
the RFC.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

228
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
TMC11H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the extension TMC11H
and RFC), as shown in Figure 2-168.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the RFC.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the extension TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

229
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
the extension TMC11H and RFC)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs

cabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

230
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs
Cable
One End
The Other End
Change
Type
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC11H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU of the
TMC11H
To be
reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
the
extension
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
extension
TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC
To be
reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
two RFCs)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the right
RFC
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the left RFC
To be
reused
Procedure
Figure 2-169.
1.
the RFC.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

231
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
TMC11H)
1.
of the right RFC.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

232
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between two RFCs), as shown
in Figure 2-171.
1.
of the left RFC.
2.
of the right RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

233
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
two RFCs)
bind the cable.
----End
2.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables

This section describes the procedure for installing inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or singlemode base station.
Prerequisites
l
The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.
The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.
The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable.
Optical modules can be divided into single- and multimode optical modules, which can be
distinguished as follows:
l
The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical
The transmission mode is displayed as "SM" on the label of a single-mode optical module
and "MM" on the label of a multimode optical module.
There is a label on each optical module, which provides information such as the rate, wavelength,
and transmission mode, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

234
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-172 Label on an optical module
(1) Rate
(2) Wavelength
(3) Transmission mode
Context
The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBU
signal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU Signal
Cable Connections.
Table 2-40 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected
Interconnection
Mode
Installation Position
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT_U
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT_L
HEI port on the WBBPf
NOTE
BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.
NOTICE
The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than
20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20
minutes.
Cable Connections.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

235
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)

Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
UMPT+UMPT
NOTICE
A color-coding tape marked Master is attached to one end of an inter-BBU cable that connects
two UMPTs in different BBUs. When installing the cable, connect the end marked Master to
the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 0 and the other end to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 1.
NOTE
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the optical
modules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Lower the puller of the optical module.
2.
Insert the optical module into the port.
3.
Raise the puller of the optical module.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

236
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 2-174.
Figure 2-174 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable
Step 3 Install one or two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT. The following
figure shows the installation of two inter-BBU signal cables.
NOTE
l You need to install two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+UL mode.
l You need to install only one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+L or GL+U
mode.
1.
Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0.
2.
Connect the other end of the cables to the CI ports on the UMPT_U and UMPT_L in BBU
1.
Step 4 Install one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the WBBPf to the WBBPf, as shown in the
following figure. The inter-BBU signal cable is installed only to interconnect the WBBPf in a
BBU to the WBBPf in another BBU.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 0.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1.
NOTE
l When two BBUs are installed in the APM30H, connect the signal cables, as shown in Figure 2-175. When
BBU 0 is installed in the APM30H and BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H, connect the signal cables, as
l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the same
type as those on BBU 0.
l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1A
and 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1.
l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

237
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-175 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

238
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic patch
cord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBU
interconnection signal cable before using cable ties to secure it. If another type of cable is used
as a BBU interconnection signal cable, directly use cable ties to secure it.
----End
2.11.8 Installing the RF Jumper

The RF jumper transmits signals between the RFU and antenna system.
Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a cable cutter, PVC insulation tape, and an openend wrench or torque wrench.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the RF jumper into the cabinet through the cable outlet in the cabinet according to one of
the manners shown in Figure 2-177. Lay out the installed RF jumper according to the instructions
in Cabling Requirements.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

239
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-177 Routing of the RF jumper
Step 2 Install the RF jumper, as shown in Figure 2-179 and Figure 2-178.
NOTICE
Connect each RF jumper securely to prevent RF signal leakage.
Figure 2-178 Installing RF jumpers for interconnected RFUs
NOTE
Inter-RFU RF signal cables have been installed in the cabinet before delivery. You only need to check whether
the cables are securely connected.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

240
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-179 Installing RF jumpers for independent RFUs
1.
Connect the DIN connector on the RF jumper to the ANT port on the RFU panel.
2.
Use a 32 mm (1.26 in.) open-end wrench or torque wrench to tighten the two DIN
connectors from bottom to top. Ensure that the tightening torque reaches 25 Nm to 35 Nm
(221.27 lbfin. to 309.78 lbfin.).
Figure 2-180 Tightening the DIN connectors
Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumper according to the instructions in Attaching the Color Ring.
Step 4 Connect the DIN straight male connector at the other end of the jumper to the connector on the
feeder.
----End
2.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable

The CPRI electrical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RFU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

241
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Procedure
Step 1 Insert the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables into the CPRI ports on the
corresponding board in the BBU.
NOTE

l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware
Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing CPRI Cables.
Step 2 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cable through the cable hole on the inner left side of
the power cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the corresponding
RFU, as shown in Figure 2-181.
Figure 2-181 Installing the CPRI electrical cable
Step 3 Connect the SFP connector on the CPRI electrical cable to the CPRI0 port on the panel of the
Step 4 Route the cables by referring to Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind the cables.
NOTE
l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cable at the top of the DCDU-12A in the RFC or in the
base of the RFC.
l Lay out the cable according to the manners in Figure 2-181. Ensure that the cable is routed to the RFU
through the cable bridge above the RFUs.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

242
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 5 Attach labels to the installed cables. For details, see Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
2.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable

The CPRI fiber optic cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RRU.
Context
l
as MM.
The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multi-mode optical
For details about the connections of CPRI fiber optic cables, see "CPRI Cable Connections"
in the BTS900A Hardware Description.
NOTICE
The performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes may
be abnormal. Therefore, you must insert an fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module
within 20 minutes.
l
SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base
Station Cables.
Procedure
1.
2.
Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU/WBBP/LBBP. Then insert an
optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU.
NOTE
Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

243
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 2 Install a CPRI fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 2-183.

1.
Stick a temporary label to the CPRI fiber optic cable to be installed.
2.
Remove the dustproof cap from the connector on the fiber optic cable.
3.
Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into
the optical modules in the WBBPLBBPGTMU, WBBP, or LBBPGTMU or WBBP, and
then insert the DLC connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module
in the RF module.
NOTICE
l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the break-out fiber optic
cables on the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.03 m (1.18
in.), respectively.
l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX port on the BBU must be connected to the
TX port on the RF module, and the RX port on the BBU must be connected to the RX
port on the RF module.
Figure 2-183 Installing the CPRI fiber optic cable
Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cable along the left of the cabinet, and then lead it out of the cabinet
from the cable hole on the left of the bottom. For details, see Cabling Requirements.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

244
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 4 Replace the temporary label on the CPRI fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For detailed
----End

Cabinet Installation Checklist

Table 2-42 describes the cabinet installation checklist.
Table 2-42 Cabinet installation checklist
No.
Item
The installation position of the cabinet strictly complies with the engineering
design.
The base is securely installed.
All the bolts, including those for electrical connections, are tightened. The spring
washers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.
The cabinet is neat and clean.
The paint on the surface is satisfactory. The damaged paint is repaired. For details,
see 2.14.3 Repainting.
Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.
Installation Environment Checklist

Table 2-43 describes the installation environment checklist.
Table 2-43 Installation environment checklist
No.
Item
No excessive straps or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.
No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around the cabinet.
Antirust powder on the door of the cabinet is cleared.
Electrical Connection Checklist

Table 2-44 describes the electrical connection checklist.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

245
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Table 2-44 Electrical connection checklist

No.
Item
All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters. There
should not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed.
The PGND cable is securely connected and the AC input power cable and cables
in the cabinet are correctly connected according to the electrical design of the power
system. The screws are tightened. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not shortcircuited.
The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off rather than coiled.
The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are securely soldered
or crimped.
The bare wires and the terminal handles at the wiring terminals are coated with heat
shrink tubing.
The flat washer and the spring washer are well mounted on all OT terminals.
The exterior of the battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.
The shell of the battery is clean without any leakage trace.
The wiring post on the battery stands properly without any damage, and the post is
not covered with any acid substances.
10
The pressure relief valve of the battery is not deformed, and no liquid leaks.
11
The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positive
and negative poles.
12
The voltage of the battery is normal.

l The voltage of a 2 V battery cell ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.
l The total voltage of the batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.
13
The circuit breakers for the batteries are set to OFF.
Cable Installation Checklist

Table 2-45 describes the cable installation checklist.
Table 2-45 Cable installation checklist
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Item
All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are securely
connected. All cable connectors at the bottom of the cabinet are securely installed.

246
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
No.
Item
The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and face
the same direction.
Different types of power cables are bound separately when being routed, for
example, the power cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber optic cables, and E1/T1/
FE cables.
The layout of all cables facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion. For
example, the maintenance transfer cable is bound to the outside of the BBU cable
claw, as shown in Figure 2-184.
Legible labels are attached to both ends of all cables.
The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are smooth
without sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.2 in.) of the
outdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.
The port that no cable is connected to is properly protected.
The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid false connection that will cause
an abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).
Figure 2-184 Checking the maintenance transfer cable
Checklist for the Hardware Upgrade

Table 2-46 describes the checklist for the hardware upgrade.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

247
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Table 2-46 Checklist for the hardware upgrade
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No
.
Cabinet Type
Item
APM30H/
TMC11H
The ground cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 2.6.5 Replacing the Power System.
APM30H/
TMC11H
The vacant customer space in the cabinet has been configured with
the filler module.
APM30H/
TMC11H
The ELU has been replaced, For detailed operations, see 2.7.4
Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are
correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
APM30H
The input power cable for the APM30H has been replaced. For
detailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cable for the
APM30H.
APM30H
The input power cable for the junction box has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
APM30H
The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. For
APM30H
The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has been
installed. For detailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in
the Cabinet.
APM30H
The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,
see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 2.10.1 Installing
the BBU Case.
APM30H
The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,
see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
10
APM30H
The monitoring signal transfer cable and CMUEA-BBU

monitoring signal cable have been installed. For detailed
operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
11
APM30H
The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has been
the Cabinet.
12
TMC11H
13
TMC11H
the Cabinet.
14
TMC11H
the BBU Case.

248
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
No
.
Cabinet Type
Item
15
TMC11H
16
TMC11H
The CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable has been installed.

For detailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in the
Cabinet.
17
TMC11H
the Cabinet.
18
RFC
The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 2.8.3
19
RFC
The monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor,

monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, and ELU signal
cable have been installed. For detailed operations, see 2.8.7
Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
20
RFC
In DC scenarios, the junction box has been installed. For detailed

operations, see 2.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction
Box.
21
RFC
In AC scenarios, the input power cable for the RFC has been
replaced. For detailed operations, see Installing Power Cables
from the APM30H to the RFCs.
22
RFC
The shield layer of the RRU power cable has been grounded. For
detailed operations, see (Optional) Installing the RRU Power
Cable or (Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable.
23
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T

Prerequisites
l
Input power cables for the BTS3900A are correctly connected.
The power supply to the BTS3900A meets the requirements of the power system.
The external power supply to the BTS3900A has been shut off.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

249
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.
All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been set to OFF.
All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T have
been set to OFF.
Switch on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T has been set to OFF.
Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.
Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.
Context
DANGER
Exercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves some high voltage
operations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact with the input voltage using
a damp object may be fatal.
NOTICE
l Power on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it. If you power off a cabinet or
BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU for
maintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

250
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Table 2-47 Circuit breakers in BTS3900A base stations

Base
Station
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A
(Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,

DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A or EPS 01C

l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2
circuit breakers on the power distribution box
in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU0 to
RFU5 circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 (The
circuit breakers control the power input to the
BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control the
power input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan
assembly, and customer transmission
equipment.)
DCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control the
power input to the BBU, fan assembly, and
customer transmission equipment.)
BTS3900A
(Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box
l Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02 or

EPU03A-04
DCDU-11A (SW0 to SW8 circuit breakers
control the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,
FAN 01B, and BBU 0 and BBU 1. The SW9
circuit breaker is reserved.)
DCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers
BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA, and FAN 02B. The
SW9 circuit breaker is reserved.)
DCDU-11C (SW0 to SW5 circuit breakers
control the power input to the transmission
equipment. SW6 to SW9 circuit breakers
control the power input to BBU 0 and BBU 1,
EMUA, and FAN 02B.)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

251
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Base
Station
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A
(Ver.D)
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

EPU05A-04
l BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers on
the power distribution box in an IBBS200D or
IBBS200T
l Switch on the power distribution box in an
IBBS700D or IBBS700T
NOTE
(1) In this section, EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 and EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 are shortened to EPU, EPS 01A
or EPS 01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.
Process
The following figure shows the power-on check process.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

252
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-185 Power-on check process
Procedure
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Power on an AC base station.

253
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
1.
Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and
the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.
2.
Optional: If the base station is configured with a battery cabinet, set the BAT circuit
breaker on the EPU or EPS to ON and set the circuit breaker on the power distribution
box in the battery cabinet to ON. Otherwise, skip this substep.
3.
Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and battery
cabinet.
4.
Set the circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS for the corresponding components to ON,
and check the power supply status of each component.
Table 2-48 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU or EPS
Cabinet
Compone
nt
Normal Power Supply Status
APM30H
PMU
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and

off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.
PSU
l The power indicator is steady green.

l The fault indicator is steady off.
Fan
assembly

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Fan in the
front door
The fan is working properly.
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
Fan or TEC
in the front
door
The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the RUN

indicator on the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA is
blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s
and off for 1s).
IBBS700D
Fan in the
front door
and
CMUEA
The fan is working properly, and the RUN indicator

on the CMUEA is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
IBBS700T
TEC and
CMUF
The TEC is working properly, and the RUN indicator

on the CMUF is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
5.
Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on each DCDU
in the RFC and TMC11H to ON. Skip this substep if there is no circuit breaker on the
DCDU, such as the DCDU-12A, DCDU-12B, and DCDU-12C.
6.
Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.
7.
Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.

254
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Table 2-49 Normal status of components in the cabinet

Cabinet
Compone
nt
APM30H
BBU
l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.

l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).
l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off
for 1s). The indicators indicating the status of the
CPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.
TMC11H
RFC
FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

Fan in the
front door
RFU

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

RRU
l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off

for 1s).

a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, check
whether the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.
NOTE
The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other indicators, see
BBU Hardware Description.
8.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,
handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.

255

(Ver.D_C)
BTS3900A
Table 2-50 Troubleshooting

Failure Type
Handling Measure
Failure in the power

supply to all
components in the
cabinet
Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.

supply to a board in
the BBU
Check as follows:
l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit

breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.
l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.
1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the

slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.
Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the status
of indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove the
board, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards of
the same type, and check the status of the indicators.
l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.
l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

256
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skip
this step and go to step 2 if this component does not use
any fuse terminal block.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse according
to the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, go
to step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to the
component.
l If the input power is normal, replace the component.
l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connected
securely. If the power cable is not securely
connected, turn off the circuit breaker for the
component (if there is no circuit breaker for the
component, remove the connector from the power
unit) and reconnect the power cable. If the power
cable is securely connected, the protector (such as
circuit breaker or fuse) on the component may be
damaged. In this case, replace the damaged
protector. If the protector cannot be replaced,
replace the upper-level power distribution
component.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Power on a DC base station.

1.
2.
Turn on the external power switch to power on the RFC cabinet. Power on the
TMC11H if it is configured as a transmission cabinet.
3.
Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the RFC to ON.
Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as DCDU-12A
and DCDU-12B.
4.
Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the TMC11H
to ON. Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as
DCDU-12C.
5.
6.

257
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)

Cabinet
Compone
nt
TMC11H
BBU

and off for 1s).
for 1s).
RFC
FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

Fan in the
front door
RFU

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

RRU

7.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to all
components in the
cabinet

units.

258
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

the BBU
Check as follows:
replace the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
to step 2.
component.
component.
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

259
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)

and checked.
2.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door

The barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label on the cabinet
door need to be replaced after the upgrade.
Context
The front door of the cabinet has been replaced during restructuring of the APM30H and
TMC11H cabinets. You only need to replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card,
and power distribution label.
Procedure
Step 1 Stick the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to the
APM30H and TMC11H cabinets. Their positions are shown in Figure 2-186.
Figure 2-186 Positions of labels for the cabinet
(1) Barcode label
(2) Qualification card
(3) Power distribution label
(4) Nameplate
Step 2 Replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label in the RFC
and IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinets.
1.
Take out the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label
for the cabinet.
2.
Stick the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to
the same positions as the original labels in the cabinet.
----End
2.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets

After all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable outlets on the cabinet and base.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

260
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Procedure
Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes on both sides of the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC,
IBBS200T, or IBBS200D cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-187 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, IBBS200T, or
IBBS200D cabinet
(1) Fireproof mud
Step 2 Seal the RF cable holes in the RFC, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Route the cables through the corresponding cable holes, and install the cable outlet module
on the bottom of the cabinet.
2.
Use rubber caps to seal the unused cable holes in the cable outlet module.
3.
Tighten the screw on the cable outlet module.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

261
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-188 Sealing the cable holes in the RFC
(1) Cable holes for the

power cables
(2) Cable holes for CPRI (3) Cable hole for the
electrical cables
monitoring signal cable
(4) Cable hole for the

equipotential cable

(6) Screw
Step 3 Use baffle plates to block redundant space in the cable outlets and tighten the two screws on
each baffle plate, as shown in Figure 2-189.
Figure 2-189 Sealing the cable outlets on the base
(1) Baffle plate on the right
(2) Baffle plate at the rear
(3) Baffle plate on the left
Step 4 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in Figure 2-190.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

262
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Figure 2-190 Sealing cable outlets on the base using fireproof mud
(1) Fireproof mud
(2) PVC corrugated pipe
Step 5 Tighten the three screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate.
----End
2.14.3 Repainting
The paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept satisfactory. Therefore, any damaged paint
must be repaired.
Prerequisites
Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to Table 2-53.
Table 2-53 Color codes
Applied to
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, rub the area with sandpaper
slightly to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in Figure 2-191.
Figure 2-191 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

263
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or dust from the
rubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with another clean cloth, as shown in
Figure 2-192.
Figure 2-192 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol
Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color.
Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the paint. Then apply
the paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be observed, as shown in Figure 2-193.
NOTICE
The paint coating should be as thin as possible. No drops are allowed on the paint coating, and
the surface should be smooth.
Figure 2-193 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

264
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_C)
Step 5 Perform subsequent operations after the repaired paint coating is exposed in the air for 30
minutes.
NOTE
The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the surrounding areas, without
obvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no longer be distinguishable. In addition, there
should be no paint peeled off.
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

265
BTS3900A
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to

BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)
About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.B)
to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).
scenarios.
3.3 Unpacking Check
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

266
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
during the upgrade.
and checked.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

267
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)


l
before the upgrade.

upgrade.
Product Name
SingleRAN7.0 series
SingleRAN6.0 series
3.1.3 Documents
l
documents:
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Cables
BBU3900 Hardware Description
RFU Hardware Description
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Installation Guide
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Site Maintenance Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Site Maintenance
Guide
Safety Precautions
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

268
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)


Marker

M6)
Diagonal pliers

M6)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
32 mm (1.26 in.)
combination wrench
Socket wrench
Torque wrench
RJ45 crimping tool
Cable cutter
Rubber mallet
Soldering iron
Wire stripper
Hammer drill (16)
Heat gun
Level
Multimeter
Measuring tape
Vacuum cleaner
ESD wrist strap
ESD gloves
Torque screwdriver

269

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Gloves

l

scenarios.

Only
When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the
BTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and -48 V DC power supply
scenario.

l
A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.
The maximum cabinet configuration of a BTS3900A site is 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2

RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. There must be a clearance of 40 mm (1.57 in.) between
the cabinets installed side by side.
The RFC can only be stacked below the APM30H or TMC11H.
The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or
TMC11H. The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can only be stacked below the TMC11H.
When a site is configured with over six RFUs and only one IBBS200D or IBBS200T, the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T must be configured with at least two groups of 92 Ah storage
batteries to avoid overcurrent of a single battery group during discharging.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

270
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
If an auxiliary cabinet such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H is required during

initial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic
cabinet. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet
is positioned on the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the
battery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain in
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In a
special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets.
When a BTS3900A is configured with two BBUs and both BBUs are connected to RFUs,
the BBUs must be interconnected.
A BTS3900A configured with one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by
default. It can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption
of all BBU boards cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to a new or expansion
scenario.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-mode Base Station

A single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, and the BBU is installed
in the APM30H or TMC11H. When seven to twelve RFUs need to be configured, two RFCs are
required.
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
5U
6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
5U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
16 U
6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H
16 U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
TMC11H
5U
6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
5U
12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
one battery
cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T
271

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
16 U
6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H
Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets
-48 V DC
16 U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
5U
6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
5U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
16 U
6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
TMC11H
16 U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
TMC11H
9U
6 RFUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
12 RFUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
6 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
12 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
20 U
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

272
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-1 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is no
backup power
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 3-1 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1 TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1
APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original
configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H.
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-2 and
Figure 3-3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

273
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

274
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

275
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 3-4 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H is the initial
configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations
are shown in Figure 3-5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

276
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-5 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
NOTE
(A) and (B) in Figure 3-5 are two modes of configuring 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs. (A) indicates that 2
TMC11Hs+2 RFCs is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original
configuration of 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC.

l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
3U
12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
(1)

277
BTS3900A
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Backup
power
provided by
a single
battery
cabinet

(Ver.D_B)
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
14 U
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
TMC11H
3U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T
14 U
l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H
-48 V DC
Backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets
3U
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
14 U
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
TMC11H
7U
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
18 U
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
NOTE
(1) A maximum of 12 RFUs are supported by a triple-mode base station. If there are more than 12 RFUs,
an extra base station is required.
In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment are
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

278
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
required
When a single cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 3-7.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

279
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
by a single battery cabinet
with different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 3-8.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

280
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

281
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

and RRUs
When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the
BTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and 48 V DC power supply
scenario.

l
A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and nine RRUs.
Therefore, more than one BTS3900As must be deployed if more than six RFUs and nine
RRUs are required.
When a BTS3900A is configured with both RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is needed to
be installed in RFC, the maximum configuration of RRUs is six RRUs of 2*60 W and three
RRUs of 2*40 W.
When both the RFU and RRU support the GSM mode, the BBU3900 must be configured
with a GTMUb. In addition, the RFUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the
GTMUb, and the RRUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the UBRI.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

A single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the
APM30H or TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

282

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
5U
6 RFUs+9
RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
one storage
battery
cabinet
5U
16 U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T
16 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H
-48 V DC
Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
two storage
battery
cabinets
5U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
16 U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
TMC11H
9U
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
20 U
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

283
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-10 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is
no backup power
is provided by one battery cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

284
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode

base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier
configurations are shown in Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC
scenario

l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

285

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configurat
ion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
3U
6 RFUs+9
RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
Backup
power
provided by
a single
battery
cabinet
3U
14 U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T
14 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H
-48 V DC
Backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets
3U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+4
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
14 U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+4
TMC11H
7U
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
18 U
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
configurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment and
carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-14.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

286
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
required
When a single battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
3-15 and Figure 3-16.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

287
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

288
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
3-17.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

289
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in
the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown
in Figure 3-18.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

290
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
3.3 Unpacking Check

Context
NOTE
l
NOTICE
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

291
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
If...
Then...

list
Go to Step 2.

packing list


If...
Then...
Go to Step 3.
soaked

If...
Then...
CAUTION
photos.
----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

292
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

AC power.

DC power.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

293
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

294
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Context
From MBTS V100R009C00 onwards, the name of the element management system (EMS) is
changed from M2000 to U2000.
Procedure
NOTE
disabled.
1.
record the result.
been locked.
If...
Then...

Go to Step 1.2.

Go to 2.
NOTE
2.
locking.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

295
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTE
Step 2 Ask the M2000/U2000 administrator to block the RFU.

NOTE
Step 4 Power off the RFC.
If...
Then...
RFC(Ver.B)
Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 in the RFC.
RFC(Ver.C)
Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11A in the RFC.
Step 5 Power off the TMC.

If...
Then...
TMC11H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C in the
TMC.
TMC11H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C in the
TMC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

296
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 6 Switch off all circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200T or IBBS200D.
Step 7 Power off the APM30H.
If...
Then...
APM30H(Ver.B)
Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPS in the APM30H.
APM30H(Ver.C)
Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPU in the APM30H.
Step 8 Turn off the switch on the external power equipment for the BTS3900A.
----End


APM30H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

297
BTS3900A
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

(Ver.D_B)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
FAN 02A
To be
replace
d
The FAN 02A needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D to

SLPU
Reused
ELU
To be
replace
d

PSU (AC/
DC)
To be
replace
d

Door status
sensor
Reused
EPS 01
subrack
To be
replace
d
The EPS 01 subrack needs to be replaced with an

system.
BBU3900
Reused
GATM
To be
remove
d
EMUA
Reused
10
AC heater
Reused
11
SOU
Reused
12
Front door
To be
replace
d

13
Junction
box
Reused
14
PMU
To be
replace
d
The PMU needs to be replaced to enhance the power

15
FAN 02B
To be
replace
d
The FAN 02B needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D to

16
EPU03A
subrack
To be
replace
d
The EPS 03A subrack needs to be replaced with an

system.

298
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
17
Front door
To be
replace
d


Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

299
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
1
Input
power
cable for
a
junction
box

(Ver.D_B)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the L1
and N1
terminals
in the AC
OUTPUT
terminal
box of the
EPS.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
L1 and N1
terminals in the
AC OUTPUT
terminal box of
the EPU.
Power
cable for
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
l One end
connects
to the
LOAD0
port on
the EPS.
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on the fan
assembly
in the
APM30H
.
Reu
sed
l The other end

connects to the
L and N
terminals in the
junction box.
l The other
end
connects
to the L
and N
terminals
in the
junction
box.
P
2
Cha
nge
Typ
e
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l One end
connects to the
LOAD5 port on
the EPU.
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in the
APM30H.
300

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
3
BBU
power
cable
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connects
to the
LOAD1
port on
the EPS.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connects to the
BBU_0 or
BBU_1 port on
the EPU.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
P
4
EMUA
power
cable
l Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
l The other
end is
cord end
terminals.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
l The other
end
connects
to the
-48V port
on the
UPEU in
the BBU.
l One end
connects
to the
LOAD7
port on
the EPS.
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
l Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
l The other
end is
cord end
terminals.

Cha
nge
Typ
e
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU.
l One end
connects to the
LOAD4 port on
the EPU.
l The other end
connects to the
PWR1 port on
the EMUA.
The
y
can
be
used
cont
inuo
usly
and
their
conn
ecto
rs
need
to be
repl
aced
onsit
e.
301
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
5
SOU
power
cable

(Ver.D_B)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
l One end
is OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the M4
ground
screw,
L1, and
N1
terminals
(AC
OUTPUT
) on the
EPS.
l One end
is OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
M4 ground
screw, L1, and
N1 terminals
(AC OUTPUT)
on the EPU.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.
Cha
nge
Typ
e
Reu
sed
l The other end

connects to the
AC INPUT port
on the SOU.
l The other
end
connects
to the AC
INPUT
port on
the SOU.
P
6
Heater
power
cable
l One end
is OT
terminals.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.
l One end
connects
to the AC
output
wiring
terminal
in the AC
junction
box and
the
ground
bar in the
APM30H
cabinet
l One end
is OT
terminals.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
input port
on the
heater.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l One end
connects to the
AC output
wiring terminal
in the AC
junction box
and the ground
bar in the
APM30H
cabinet
Reu
sed
l The other end

connects to the
power input
port on the
heater.
302
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
7
Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door

(Ver.D_B)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
Cha
nge
Typ
e
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.
To
be
repl
aced
l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.
l The other end

connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

303
BTS3900A
No.
S1
Cable
Environmen
t monitoring
signal cable

(Ver.D_B)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are DB50
male
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
COM
port on
the
PMU.
Both ends
are DB50
male
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
COM
port on
the
PMU.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
PMU_D
B50 port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S2
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status
sensor in the
APM30H
l One end
is a 2-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.
l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
Remove
d
l The
other end
connects
to the
PMU_D
B50 port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
l One end
is a 2-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Change
Type

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
304
BTS3900A
No.
S3
Cable
Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable

(Ver.D_B)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port
on the
PMU.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port on
the
PMU.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S4
CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
Change
Type
To be
replaced
l The
other end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
-
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connects
to the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU in
the
BBU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

305
BTS3900A
No.
S5
Cable
ELU signal
cable

(Ver.D_B)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S6
Monitoring
signal cable
for the fan in
the front
door
Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
transfer
box in
the front
door of
the
APM30
H.
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
FAN_E
XT port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Change
Type

l One end
connects
to the
transfer
box in
the front
door of
the
APM30
H.
To be
replaced
l The
other end
connects
to the
FAN_E
XT port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
306
BTS3900A
No.
S7
Cable
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
l One end
is a DB9
male
connecto
r.
l One end
connects
to the
RS-485
port on
the
EMUA.
l One end
is a DB9
male
connecto
r.
l One end
connects
to the
RS-485
port on
the
EMUA.
l The
other is
an RJ45
connecto
r.
S8
Surge
protection
transfer
cable for the
monitoring
signals

(Ver.D_B)
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
PMU.
l One end
connects
to the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.
l The
other is
an RJ45
connecto
r.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
EXT_A
LM0
port on
the
UPEU in
the
BBU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
PMU.
l One end
connects
to the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
EXT_A
LM0
port on
the
UPEU in
the BBU.
307

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
No.
S9
Cable
GPS clock
signal cable
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
l One end
is an
SMA
male
connecto
r.
l One end
connects
to the
GPS port
on the
USCU in
the
BBU.
l One end
is an
SMA
male
connecto
r.
l One end
connects
to the
GPS port
on the
USCU in
the BBU.
l The
other
end is an
N-type
female
connecto
r.
S10
CMUEBBU
monitoring
signal cable
l The
other
end
connects
to a GPS
surge
protector
.
-
l The
other
end is an
N-type
female
connecto
r.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to a GPS
surge
protector
.
l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port on
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
To be
replaced
l The
other end
connects
to the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU in
the BBU.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

308
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTICE
If...
Then...
An
(Ver.B) is
used
A
(Ver.B) is
used
An
(Ver.C) is
used
A
(Ver.C) is
used
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

309
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
front door
2.
in Figure 3-25.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

310
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

NOTE

1.
2.

1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

311
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

312
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
If...
Then...

position

position

indicated position.
cabinet
cabinet
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The fan
assemblies in the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures
for removing the fan assemblies from the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

313
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTICE
Step 2 Optional: Remove the power cable for the fan assembly to power off the fan assembly. Skip
this step if this cable has been disconnected during the replacement of the front door.
If...
Then...
An APM30H
(Ver.B) is used
assembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
A TMC11H
(Ver.B) is used
An APM30H
(Ver.C) is used
assembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
A TMC11H
(Ver.C) is used

1.
2.
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

314
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
DANGER
assembly.
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

315
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
----End

(ELU).
Prerequisites
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

316
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Procedure
NOTICE
1.
2.
3.
Figure 3-34.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

317
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTE
(2) BOM code

Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU

station
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

base station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

equipment
l Ver.B: 02113830

l Ver.B: 02113827
RFC (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
l Ver.C: 02113398
l Ver.C: 02113395
l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397
1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

318
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
l
----End

Prerequisites
Context
l
The procedure for replacing the power system of the APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H
(Ver.C) is the same. The figures in this section uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.
Figure 3-36 shows component changes in the AC/DC power system.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

319

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Figure 3-36 Component changes in the AC/DC power system
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU
(3) EPS 01
(EPW30-48A) subrack
(4) PSU
(PSU4850A)
(5) EPU03A
subrack
(6) PMU 11A
(8) EPU05A
subrack
(7) PSU
(R4850G2)
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Remove cables from the EPS or EPU.
1.
Disconnect the ground cable for the EPS or EPU from the ground bar on the inner left wall
of the cabinet.
2.
Loosen the two captive screws on the metal protective cover on the left side of the EPS or
EPU, and then remove the protective cover.
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the plastic protective covers from the AC input and
output wiring terminal blocks on the left side of the EPS or EPU.
4.
Record the connections of the AC input power cable and AC output power cable, and then
remove the cables.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

320
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
5.
Reinstall the two plastic protective covers, and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M4
screws to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).
6.
Record the connections of the DC power cables on the EPS or EPU panel, and then remove
the DC power cables.
7.
Record the connections of the DC power cables that are connected to the power cables on
the right side of the EPS or EPU, and then remove the DC power cables.
Step 3 Remove the PMU and all PSUs from the EPS or EPU.
NOTICE
The original EPS or EPU contains one PMU and three PSUs and therefore is heavy. You are
advised to remove the PMU and PSUs before removing the EPS or EPU.
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of each
PSU.
2.
Pull the handle slightly to slide each PSU out of the subrack and remove each PSU from
the subrack, as shown in Figure 3-37.
Figure 3-37 Removing the PSUs
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of the
PMU.
4.
Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU out of the subrack and remove the PMU from the
subrack, as shown in Figure 3-38.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

321
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-38 Removing the PMU
Step 4 Remove the plate for the power series 120 connector from the right side of the EPS or EPU, as
Figure 3-39 Removing the plate for the power series 120 connector
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the remaining seven screws from both sides of the EPS or
EPU, and remove the EPS or EPU from the cabinet along the guide rails slowly, as shown in
Figure 3-40.
NOTICE
The EPS or EPU subrack is heavy. Therefore, you need to hold the subrack with one hand and
support the bottom with the other hand to slowly pull the subrack out of the cabinet. This prevents
the subrack from falling and ensures personal safety.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

322
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-40 Removing the EPS or EPU
Step 6 Remove the metal support from the left side of the EPS or EPU.
1.
Loosen the two captive screws on the cover plate of the metal support.
2.
Remove the two screws from the metal support and remove the metal support, as shown in
Figure 3-41.
Figure 3-41 Removing the metal support
Step 7 Place the removed EPS or EPU subrack, PSUs, PMU, and metal support into an ESD box or
bag.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

323
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 8 Optional: Install the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of
the cabinet. Only an APM30H (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an APM30H
(Ver.C) is used, skip this step.
CAUTION
1.
Remove the guide rails on the left side of the position where the EPS or EPU is originally
installed, as shown by a in Figure 3-42. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve the screws.
2.
contacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in Figure 3-42.
3.
Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 8.1 to secure the guide rails and tighten the screws
to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.), as shown by c in Step 8.1.
Figure 3-42 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left
side of the cabinet
1.
padding for about 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in Figure 3-43.
2.
cabinet, as shown by b and c in Figure 3-43.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

324
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 10 Install the windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet, as shown in Figure
3-44.
CAUTION
1.
2.
screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

325
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 11 Install a new EPU.

1.
Place the new EPU on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the power system
into the cabinet.
2.
Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven panel screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.) and one
hex screw to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.) so that the EPU subrack is secured.
3.
Use M6x12 screws to secure the ground cable for the new EPU to the ground bar. The
----End

Prerequisites
l
DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.
Procedure
Step 1 Power off the GATM. The following table lists the terminals that can be used by a GATM power
cable, which may differ from the actually used terminal.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

326
BTS3900A
If...

(Ver.D_B)
Then...
An
APM30H power cable from the LOAD4 port on the EPS.
(Ver.B) is
used
If an
APM30H power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPU.
(Ver.C) is
used
Step 2 Remove the GATM.
1.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the ground cable for the GATM. Then use a wrench
to remove the RF jumper from the GATM.
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, remove the
GATM, and secure the removed screws on their original positions on the mounting bar, as
NOTE
The method of removing the GATM from an APM30H (Ver.B) is the same as the method of removing it
from an APM30H (Ver.C). The following figure uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.
Step 3 Remove the Bias-Tee.

1.
Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable and PGND cable.
2.
3.
Use a wrench to connect the jumper and the feeder to 25 Nm to 35 Nm (221.25 lbfin. to
309.75 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 3-46.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

327
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-46 Connecting the jumper and the feeder
(1) Feeder
(2) Jumper
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30H cabinet
after you restructure the APM30H.
Prerequisites
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the APM30H
EPC4
connector
LOAD2 port
on the EPU
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the APM30H
A 1.1 m (3.61
ft) cable is
newly
delivered.

328
BTS3900A
Cable
Connector
at One End
Input power
cable for the
junction box

(Ver.D_B)
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
OT terminals M4 ground
(M4)
screw as
well as L1,
and N1
terminals
near the AC
OUTPUT
silkscreen on
the EPU in
the
APM30H
OT terminals
L and N
terminals in
the junction
box
To be reused
EMUA
power cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD5 port
on the EPU
Cord end
terminals
PWR1 port
on the
EMUA
To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.
BBU power
cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD0 or
LOAD6 port
on the EPU
3V3
connector
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU
A cable is
newly
delivered.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installation
Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
in the
APM30H
2-pin
connector
GATE port
on the PMU
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
To be reused
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU
RJ45
connector
ELU port in
the CMUEA
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for the fan in
the front
door
Interconnect
ion terminal
Power cable
for the fan in
the front door
of the
APM30H
4-pin
connector
FAN_EXT
port on the
fan assembly
A cable is
newly
delivered.

329

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installation
Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
RJ45
connector
MON1 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
A 1.1 m
(3.61 ft)
cable is
newly
delivered.
Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
PMU
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the fan
assembly of
the APM30H
A 1.1 m
(3.61 ft)
cable is
newly
delivered.
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
DB9 male
connector
RS-485 port
on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
PMU
To be reused
Procedure
l

Remove the related cables listed in Table 3-7 and Table 3-8. If the cables have been
removed during the module replacement, skip this step.
Install power cables in the APM30H.

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
3-47.
a.
b.
on the EPU.
c.
the fan assembly in the APM30H, and use a torque wrench to tighten the screws
on the 3V3 connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54 lbfin.).

a.
Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For detailed operations, see
Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the
EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
b.
c.
Connect the one end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD5
port on the EPU.
d.
on the EMUA.
Install input power cable for the junction box, as shown by P3 in Figure 3-47.
330
BTS3900A
4.

(Ver.D_B)
a.
Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L1 and N1
terminals near the AC OUTPUT silkscreen on the EPU, and tighten the terminals
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
b.
Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L and
N terminals in the junction box, and tighten the terminals to 1.2 Nm (10.62
lbfin.).

a.
NOTE
b.
Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD0 or LOAD1 port on the panel of
the EPU.
c.
LOAD1 port on the EPU.
d.
lbfin.).
5.
6.

1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

331
BTS3900A
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

(Ver.D_B)
a.
top of the ELU.
b.
3-48.
a.
Connect one end of the signal cable to the GATE port on the PMU.
b.
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the door status sensor.
Figure 3-48.
a.
b.

a.
b.

a.
Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUT
port on the CMUEA.
b.
Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_IN
port on the PMU.
Optional: Install the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, as shown by S6 in Figure
3-48.
a.
b.
port on the PMU.

332
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
7.
Optional: Install the surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals.
a.
Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of the
SLPU.
b.
Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in the
BBU.
c.
Connect the other three surge protection transfer cables, as shown in Figure
3-49.
Figure 3-49 Connections of surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals
8.
9.
Label the installed cables according to Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

333
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)


TMC11H Cabinet
during the restructuring of the TMC11H cabinet.
Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Components in the TMC11H

Cabinet
There are two types of TMC11Hs:
l
One type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration A in

Figure 3-50.
The other type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as
shown in illustration B in Figure 3-50.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

334
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Remarks
Fan
assembly
To be
replace
d

SLPU
To be
reused
ELU
To be
replace
d

DCDU-03
C
To be
replace
d

DCDU-12C.

335
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Remarks
BBU3900
To be
reused
Door status
sensor
To be
reused
Environme
nt
monitoring
unit type A
(EMUA)
To be
reused
AC heater
To be
reused
Front door
To be
replace
d

10
Junction
box
To be
reused
11
DCDU-11
B, or
DCDU-11
C
To be
replace
d

DCDU-12C.
Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Cables in the TMC11H

Cabinet
Figure 3-51 shows the power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses
the BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power.
Figure 3-51 Power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

336
BTS3900A
No.
P1
P2
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Power
cable for
the fan
assembly in
the
TMC11H
BBU power
cable

(Ver.D_B)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installatio
n Position
Connecto
r
Installatio
n Position
l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD8
port on
the
DCDU03C.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD9
port on
the
DCDU12C.
l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
TMC11
H.
l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
TMC11
H.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD6
port on
the
DCDU03C.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
-48V
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD6
or
LOAD7
port on
the
DCDU11C.

Change
Type
To be
replaced
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
-48V
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
337

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
No.
P3
P4
Cable
EMUA
power
cable
Equipotenti
al cable for
grounding
of the front
door
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installatio
n Position
Connecto
r
Installatio
n Position
l One end
is toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD7
port on
the
DCDU03C.
l One end
is toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD8
port on
the
DCDU11C.
l The
other
end is
cord
end
terminal
s.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.
l The
other
end is
cord
end
terminal
s.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.
Both ends
are OT
terminals.
l One end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
Both ends
are OT
terminals.
l One end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of
the
cabinet.
Change
Type
They can be
used
continuousl
y and their
connectors
need to be
replaced
onsite.
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of
the
cabinet.
Figure 3-52 shows the signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses the BBU3900 and is
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

338
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-52 Signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet
No.
S1
Cable
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the door
status
sensor
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
l One
end is a
2-pin
connec
tor.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GATE
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
l One
end is a
2-pin
connec
tor.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GATE
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
door
status
sensor.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
To be
reused
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
door
status
sensor.
339
BTS3900A
No.
S2
Cable
CMUABBU
monitorin
g signal
cable

(Ver.D_B)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
IN port
on the
fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
Change
Type
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

340
BTS3900A
No.
S3
Cable
ELU
signal
cable

(Ver.D_B)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
To be
reused
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU.
341
BTS3900A
No.
S4
Cable
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the fan in
the front
door

(Ver.D_B)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors
.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
FAN_
EXT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors
.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
FAN_
EXT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
transfe
r box in
the
front
door of
the
TMC1
1H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
To be
replaced
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
transfe
r box in
the
front
door of
the
TMC1
1H.
342
BTS3900A
No.
S5
Cable
EMUA
monitorin
g signal
cable

(Ver.D_B)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
l One
end is a
DB9
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
OUT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly.
l One
end is a
DB9
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
OUT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly.
l The
other is
an
RJ45
connec
tor.
l The
other is
an
RJ45
connec
tor.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
RS-48
5 port
on the
EMUA
.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
To be
reused
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
RS-48
5 port
on the
EMUA
.
343
BTS3900A
No.
S6
Cable
Surge
protection
transfer
cable for
the
monitorin
g signals

(Ver.D_B)
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
EXT_
ALM0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
S7
GPS clock
signal
cable
l One
end is
an
SMA
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end is
an Ntype
female
connec
tor.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GPS
port on
the
USCU
in the
BBU.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to a
GPS
surge
protect
or.
Change
Type
To be
reused
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
EXT_
ALM0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
l One
end is
an
SMA
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end is
an Ntype
female
connec
tor.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GPS
port on
the
USCU
in the
BBU.
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connec
ts to a
GPS
surge
protect
or.
344

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
No.
S8
Cable
CMUEBBU
monitorin
g signal
cable
TMC11H(Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.C)
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.
l One
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
IN port
on the
fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.
Change
Type
To be
replaced
l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.

Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

345
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTICE
If...
Then...
An
(Ver.B) is
used
A
(Ver.B) is
used
An
(Ver.C) is
used
A
(Ver.C) is
used
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

346
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
front door
2.
in Figure 3-54.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

347
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

NOTE

1.
2.

1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

348
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

349
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
If...
Then...

position

position

indicated position.
cabinet
cabinet
----End

Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

350
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTICE
Step 2 (Optional) Turn off the circuit breaker LOAD8 on the DCDU-03C. Skip this step if the fan
assembly has been powered off during replacement of the front door.
1.
2.
NOTE
DANGER
assembly.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

351
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTE
----End

(ELU).
Prerequisites
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

352
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Procedure
NOTICE
1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Figure 3-63.
353
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

NOTE
(2) BOM code
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU

station
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

base station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

equipment
l Ver.B: 02113830

l Ver.B: 02113827
l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
l Ver.C: 02113398
l Ver.C: 02113395

354
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390
l Ver.B: 02113819
IBBS200D (Ver.B)
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480

l Ver.B: 02113820
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l Ver.C: 02113397
1.
2.
3.
l
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDUs in an TMC11H.
These DCDUs include the DCDU-03B, DCDU-03C, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-11C.
Prerequisites
Context
The following table helps you determine whether a DCDU needs to be replaced with a
DCDU-12B or DCDU-12C.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cabinet
Base Station
Application
Scenarios
DCDU Model
Before
Replacement
DCDU Model
After
Replacement
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
DBS3900
It provides
transmission
space.
DCDU-03C
DCDU-12C

355
BTS3900A
Cabinet
Base Station
BTS3900A
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
DBS3900
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Application
Scenarios
DCDU Model
Before
Replacement
DCDU Model
After
Replacement
It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.
DCDU-03B
DCDU-12B
It provides
transmission
space.
DCDU-03C
DCDU-12C
It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.
DCDU-03C
DCDU-12C
It provides
transmission
space.
DCDU-11C
DCDU-12C
It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.
DCDU-11B
DCDU-12B
It provides
transmission
space.
DCDU-11C
DCDU-12C
It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.
DCDU-11C
DCDU-12C
Procedure
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

356
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 2 Power off the DCDU according to the following table.

If...
Then...
A DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B needs to be

powered off
A DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C in a TMC11H

Turn off the TMC circuit breaker on the
needs to be powered off, and the TMC11H only EPS in the APM30H.
provides transmission space
At a BTS3900A site, a DCDU-03C in a
TMC11H needs to be powered off, and the
with -48 V DC power
Turn off the SPARE2 circuit breaker on the

DCDU-01 in the RFC.
A DCDU-11C in a TMC11H needs to be

powered off, and the TMC11H houses
BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power
At a DBS3900 site, a DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C Switch off the external power supply.
in a TMC11H needs to be powered off, and the
with -48 V DC power
Step 3 Remove the DCDU.
1.
Remove all cable connectors from the DCDU.
2.
3.
4.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

357
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
DCDU
Step 5 Install a new DCDU-12B.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

358

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
1.
Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.
2.
Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC11H cabinet
after restructuring the TMC11H cabinet.
Prerequisites
Context
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the TMC11H
EPC4
connector
LOAD9 port
on the
DCDU-12C
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the TMC11H
The cable is
newly
delivered.
BBU power
cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD6 or
LOAD7 port
on the
DCDU-12C
in the
TMC11H
3V3
connector
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU of
the TMC11H
The cable is
newly
delivered.
EMUA
power cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD8 port
on the
DCDU-12C
Cord end
terminals
PWR1
terminal on
the EMUA
To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

359

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A

Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
Bare wire
GATE port
on the fan
assembly
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
Reused
CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
The cable is
newly
delivered. It
is 1.1 m (3.61
ft) long.
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the fan
assembly
Reused
Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable for the
fan in the
front door
Interconnecti
on terminal
Power cable
for the fan in
the front
door of the
TMC11H
cabinet
4-pin
connector
FAN_EXT
port on the
fan assembly
Newly
delivered
cable
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
DB9 male
connector
RS485 port
on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
fan assembly
Reused
Procedure
l
Install power cables in the TMC11H cabinet.

1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the TMC11H cabinet, as shown by P1
in Figure 3-67.
a.
on the DCDU-12C.
b.
lbfin.).
Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-67. If a BBU is
not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.
a.
b.

360
BTS3900A
c.
3.

(Ver.D_B)
lbfin.).

a.
Replace the OT terminals at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4
b.
on the DCDU-12C.
c.
on the EMUA.
Figure 3-67 Installing power cables in the TMC11H cabinet
4.
5.
Install signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet.

1.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to the GATE
port on the fan assembly, as shown by S1 in Figure 3-68.
2.

Figure 3-68. If a BBU is not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.
3.
a.
b.

a.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
top of the ELU.
361
BTS3900A
b.
4.
5.

(Ver.D_B)
S4 in Figure 3-68.
a.
b.

a.
b.
port on the CMUEA.
Figure 3-68 Installing signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet
6.
7.
----End


Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

362
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
DCDU-01
To be
replace
d
The DCDU-01 needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A to

enhance the power distribution capability.
ELU
To be
replace
d

Door status
sensor
Reused
FAN 01A
To be
replace
d
The FAN 01A needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C to

RFU
To be
replace
d
The original RFUs are replaced by new RFUs with

enhanced capacities.
DCDU-11
A
To be
replace
d
The DCDU-11A needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A

to enhance the power distribution capability.

363

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
FAN 01B
To be
replace
d
The FAN 01B needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C to

DC
Junction
Box
l The DC junction box in an RFC (Ver.B) uses one or

two DC power inputs and provides two DC power
outputs.
l The original DC junction box will be used in the RFC
(Ver.C).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

364
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
0
DCDU-1
1A
power
cable

(Ver.D_B)
RFC (Ver.B)
RFC (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals on the
DCDU-11A.
Cha
nge
Typ
e
Reu
sed
l The other end

connects to the
DC junction
box.
P
1
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Power
cable for
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC
l One end
is a
parallel
terminal.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
l One end
connects
to the
FAN port
on the
DCDU-0
1.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l One end
connects to the
LOAD6 port on
the
DCDU-11A.
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in the
RFC.
365
BTS3900A
N
o.
Cable
P
2
to
P
7
RFU
power
cables

(Ver.D_B)
RFC (Ver.B)
RFC (Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
l One end
is a
parallel
terminal.
l One end
connects
to one of
the RFU0
to RFU5
ports on
the
DCDU-0
1.
l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l One end
connects to one
of the LOAD0
to LOAD5
ports on the
DCDU-11A in
the RFC.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
l The other end

connects to the
PWR port on an
RRU among
RFU 0 to RFU
5.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on an
RRU
among
RFU 0 to
RFU 5.
P
8
Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.
Cha
nge
Typ
e
To
be
repl
aced
Reu
sed
l The other end

connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

366
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
No.
S1
Cable
RFC (Ver.B)
Monitoring
Signal
Cable for
the Door
Status
Sensor
RFC (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are bare
wires.
l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.
Both ends
are bare
wires.
l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
367
BTS3900A
No.
S2
Cable

(Ver.D_B)
RFC (Ver.B)
ELU signal
cable
RFC (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU.
S3
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
RFC
l One end
is a 4-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is a
temperat
ure
sensor.
l One end
connects
to the
TEM
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.
l The
other
end is
bound
nearby
the air
intake
vent at
the
bottom
of the
RFC.
Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU.
l One end
is a 4-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is a
temperat
ure
sensor.
l One end
connects
to the
TEM
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
Reused
l The
other end
is bound
nearby
the air
intake
vent at
the
bottom
of the
RFC.

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The
procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C) is the same as the procedure for
replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

368
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Power off the fan assembly.
If...
Then...
An RFC (Ver.B) Turn off the FAN circuit breaker on the DCDU-01.
is used
An RFC (Ver.C) Turn off the SW6 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11A.
is used
Step 3 Remove the original fan assembly.
1.
Record all cable connections on the panel of the fan assembly.
2.
Remove all the cables from the front panel of the fan assembly.
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears on both sides
of the fan assembly, and pull the box out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as
NOTE
The procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B) is the same as the procedure for replacing
a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C). Figure 3-72 uses an RFC (Ver.C) as an example.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

369
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
4.
Place the removed fan assembly into an ESD box or bag.
the four screws on the mounting ears on both sides to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
----End

(ELU).
Prerequisites
Context
The ELU is on the inner right side of the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-73.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

370
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Procedure
NOTICE
1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Figure 3-75.
371
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

NOTE
(2) BOM code
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU

station
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

base station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

equipment
l Ver.B: 02113830

l Ver.B: 02113827
l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
l Ver.C: 02113398
l Ver.C: 02113395

372
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397
1.
2.
3.
l
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-01 or DCDU-11A
in an RFC.
Prerequisites
Context
As shown by Figure 3-77, a DCDU-01 is located in the top 1 U space of an RFC (Ver.B). The
DCDU-11A in an RFC (Ver.C) is in the same position as the DCDU-01.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

373
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-77 Position of the DCDU-01
Procedure
NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD
gloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 2 Switch off all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU to power off the fan assembly and RFUs.
Step 3 Power off the DCDU.
If...
Then...
An RFC (Ver.B) Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPS.
is installed in an
AC power
supply scenario
An RFC (Ver.B) Switch off the external power supply.
is installed in a
DC power
supply scenario
An RFC (Ver.C) Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPU.
is installed in an
AC power
supply scenario
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

374
BTS3900A
If...

(Ver.D_B)
Then...
An RFC (Ver.C) Switch off the external power supply.

is installed in a
DC power
supply scenario
Step 4 Remove the old DCDU.
1.
Record the positions of all connectors on the DCDU, and remove the connectors.
2.
3.
4.
NOTE
The procedure for removing a DCDU-01 is the same as that for removing a DCDU-11A. Figure 3-78 and Figure
3-79 use a DCDU-11A as an example.
DCDU
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

375
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 6 Install a new DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 3-81.
1.
Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 3-80.
Figure 3-80 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A
(1) Double-sided tape
2.
Place the new DCDU-12A on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the
DCDU-12A into the cabinet.
3.
Tighten the two screws on each side of the DCDU-12A to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

376
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
(1) DCDU-12A
(2) Cable claw
----End
3.8.5 Replacing the RFU

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or a pair
of ESD gloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.
Context
l
V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, and LRFU.
If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking
for TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced. For details about
how to remove the GATM and Bias-Tee, see 3.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and
Bias-Tee.
document holder on the cabinet door, as shown in Figure 3-82.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

377
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTE
Procedure
NOTE

1.
Turn off the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to power off the
RFU.
2.
3.
4.
Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the fiber.
5.
CAUTION
6.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

378
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 3 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC, as shown in
Figure 3-84. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is
used, skip this step.
1.
2.
Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the
3.
Figure 3-84 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC
(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom right
side of the RFC
Step 4 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC, as shown in Figure
3-85. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is used, skip
this step.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

379
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1.
2.
Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom left side of the
3.
Figure 3-85 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC
(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom
left side of the RFC

1.
2.
Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners of the RFU panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.) to
----End
3.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box

The DC junction box in an RFC converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.
Skip this section if an RFC (Ver.C) is used, which has already been configured with a DC junction
box.
Prerequisites
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
In AC scenarios, the RFC power terminals in the EPU are connected to the DCDU-12A,
which then distributes DC power to the RFC, the DC junction box is not configured.
380
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
In DC scenarios, the external power supply is directly connected to the DC junction box,
which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Remove the DC junction box, as shown in Figure 3-86.
1.
Remove the screw from the protective cover for the DC junction box and then remove
protective cover.
2.
Remove the two screws from the DC junction box and then remove the DC junction box.
Figure 3-86 Removing the DC junction box
Step 3 Install the DC junction box in the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-87.
1.
Remove the two M6 screws from the left wall of the RFC.
2.
Align the two holes on the right side of the installation plate with the two holes left in Step
3.1, and secure them with the two removed M6 screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
3.
Place the DC junction box on the installation plate, and secure them with two M4 screws
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

381
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-87 Installing the DC junction box
NOTE
It is recommended that the protective cover be reinstalled after all required cables are connected to the DC
junction box.
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC cabinet
after you restructure the RFC.
Prerequisites
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

382
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the RFC
EPC4
connector
LOAD6 port
on the
DCDU-12A
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the RFC
The cable is
newly
delivered. It
is 1.1 m (3.61
ft) long.
Input power
cable from
the DC
junction box
to the
DCDU-12A
in the RFC
OT terminal
(M6)
DC junction
box in the
RFC
OT terminals DCDU-12A
in the RFC
l A 0.3 m
(0.98 ft)
cable
with a
blue wire
and a
black
wire is
newly
delivered
for an
RFC
(Ver.B).
l The
original
cable is
used in an
RFC
(Ver.C).
The
newly
delivered
cable can
be
disposed
of.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

383

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
RFU power
cables
EPC4
connector
One of
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
ports on the
DCDU-12A
3V3
connector
PWR port on
one of RFU 0
to RFU 5
Six RFU
power cables
are newly
delivered.
Power cables
for RFU 0 to
RFU 2 are
1.5 m (4.92
ft) and power
cables for
RFU 3 to
RFU 5 are
1.1 m (3.61
ft).

Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
Bare wire
GATE port
on the fan
assembly
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
Reused
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the fan
assembly
RJ45
connector
ELU
Reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
RFC
4-pin
connector
TEM port on
the fan
assembly in
the RFC
Temperature
sensor
Air intake
vent at the
bottom of an
RFC
Reused
Procedure
l

1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the RFC, as shown by P1 in Figure
3-88.
384
BTS3900A
2.
3.

(Ver.D_B)
a.
on the DCDU-12A.
b.
lbfin.).
Optional: Install the input power cable for the RFC (from the DC junction box to the
DCDU-12A), as shown by P2 in Figure 3-88. If the cabinet is an RFC (Ver.B) in an
AC power supply scenario, skip this step.
a.
Optional: Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+)
and NEG(-) terminals in the DC junction box on an inner wall of the RFC, and
tighten the terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.). In an RFC (Ver.C), one end of
the power cable has been connected to the DC junction box. Therefore, skip this
step for an RFC (Ver.C).
b.
Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN+ and
NEG- terminals on the DCDU-12A, and tighten the terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).

a.
Connect the end of the power cables with an EPC4 connector to one of the
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12A.
b.
Connect the end of the power cables with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port on
the corresponding RFU, and tighten the screws on the connectors to 0.4 Nm
(3.54 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

385
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
4.
5.

1.

a.
top of the ELU.
b.
on the fan assembly in the RFC.
2.
Connect one end of the door status monitoring signal cable with bare wires to the
GATE port on the fan assembly, as shown by S2 in Figure 3-89.
3.
Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the RFC, as shown
by S3 in Figure 3-89.
a.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the temperature sensor near
the air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.
b.
the TEM port on the fan assembly in the RFC.
4.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
386
BTS3900A
5.

(Ver.D_B)
----End


IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet
This section describes the changes to be made on the components and cables in an IBBS200D
Component Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet

The component changes in the IBBS200D cabinet are the same as those in the IBBS200T cabinet.
This section uses the IBBS200D as an example. Figure 3-90 shows component changes in the
IBBS200D cabinet.
Figure 3-90 Components in the IBBS200D cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
ELU
To be
replace
d

Storage
battery
Reused

387
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Door status
sensor
Reused
Power
distribution
box
To be
replace
d

Junction
terminal for
the input
power
cable of the
heating
film
Reused
Battery
temperatur
e sensor
Reused
Cable Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

388
BTS3900A
N
o.
P
1
P
2
Cable

(Ver.D_B)
IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)

(Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
Power
transfer
cable for
the fan or
TEC in
the front
door
l One end
is a 3V3
connector
.
l One end
connects
to the
CMUA.
l One end
is a 3V3
connector
.
l One end
connects to the
PWR port on
the CMUE.
l The other
end is an
OT
terminal.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
l The other
end is an
OT
terminal.
l The other end

connects to the
power
distribution
box.
RTN(+)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.
NEG(-)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
To
be
repl
aced
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
power
distribution
box.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
3
Cha
nge
Typ
e

l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
power
distribution
box.
389

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
N
o.
P
4
Cable
RTN(+)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries
IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)

(Ver.C)
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.
NEG(-)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
Both ends are

OT
terminals.
l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
power
distribution
box.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
6
To
be
repl
aced
l The other end

connects to the
power
distribution
box.
l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
5
Cha
nge
Typ
e

l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.
l The other end
connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.
To
be
reus
ed
(repl
ace
men
t of
the
term
inals
not
requ
ired)
390
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

No.
S1
Cable
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status
sensor
IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or
IBBS200T (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are bare
wires.
l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RF
cabinet
(RFC).
Both ends
are bare
wires.
l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.
391

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
No.
S2
Cable
ELU signal
cable
IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or
IBBS200T (Ver.C)
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.
Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.
l One end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
RFC.
l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU.
Change
Type
Reused
l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU.

Prerequisites
DANGER
the batteries from burning and to ensure personal safety.
Context
Before replacing the power distribution box, remove all storage batteries from the cabinet.
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

392
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTICE
If...
Then...
An IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T

(Ver.B) is used
1. Remove the tool-less female connector

EPS.
the EPS.
box.
4. Turn off the BAT circuit breaker on the EPS.
IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C) 1. Remove the tool-less female connector

EPU.
the EPU.
box.
4. Turn off the FAN/TEC_SW2 circuit breaker
on the power distribution box.
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

393
BTS3900A
2.

(Ver.D_B)
the storage batteries and the serial connection copper bars between the storage batteries,
and remove the input power cables and copper bars, as shown in Figure 3-94.
3.
4.
hands to remove the storage batteries at the same layer, and place the storage batteries in
a safe position.
NOTE
baffle plate at one layer, you must remove all storage batteries at this layer before removing the
Step 4 Remove the storage battery power cables and power transfer cable for the TEC or fan in the
front door from the power distribution box.
Step 5 Remove the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 3-95.
1.
Remove the two screws from the left cover plate of the power distribution box and remove
the cover plate.
2.
Remove the four screws from the interior of the power distribution box.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

394
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
3.
Take the power distribution box out and use insulation tape to wrap the OT terminals on
the cables connected to the power distribution box.
4.
Place the power distribution box into an ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Install rubber protective caps onto the screws for the earthquake-proof support on the top of the
battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-96.
Figure 3-96 Installing rubber protective caps
(1) Screws for the earthquake-proof support
(2) Rubber protective caps
Step 7 Install cables in the power distribution box.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

395
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1.
Remove the cover plate from the new power distribution box.
2.
Install cables in the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 3-97.

Figure 3-97 Installing cables in the power distribution box
NOTE
The power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the battery cabinet has been connected
to the new power distribution box before delivery.
1.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the four M4x8 screws in the power distribution box
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
3.
Install the cover plate on the left side of the power distribution box and tighten the two
M3x6 screws on the cover plate to 0.55 Nm (4.87 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

396
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
----End

(ELU).
Prerequisites
l
a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
Context
There is an ELU on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet, as shown in
Figure 3-99.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

397
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-99 Position of the ELU in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet
Procedure
NOTICE
1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Figure 3-101.
398
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

NOTE
(2) BOM code
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU

station
l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

base station
l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

equipment
l Ver.B: 02113830

l Ver.B: 02113827
l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195
l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393
l Ver.C: 02113398
l Ver.C: 02113395

399
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Cabinet Type
BOM Code on the ELU
RFC (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480
IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397
1.
2.
3.
l
----End

Prerequisites
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

400
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
Power
transfer
cable for the
TEC or fan in
the front
door
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the CMUEA
OT terminals Power
(M4, 2.5
Distribution
Box
mm2 or
2
0.004 in. )
Delivered
with the
power
distribution
box
RTN(+)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
Distribution
Box
The cable is
newly
delivered.
NEG(-)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
Distribution
Box
The cable is
newly
delivered.
RTN(+)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
Distribution
Box
The cable is
newly
delivered.
NEG(-)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
Distribution
Box
The cable is
newly
delivered.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU port in
the CMUEA
RJ45
connector
ELU
To be reused

401
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Remarks
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
Bare wire
GATE port
on the
CMUEA
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
To be reused
Procedure
l
Install storage batteries and power cables in the battery cabinet.

1.
Install the power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the cabinet, as
shown by P1 in Figure 3-103.
2.
Place power cables for the storage batteries. The NEG(-) cables are black and RTN
(+) cables are red. P2 and P3 in Figure 3-103 show the routing of these power cables.
3.
Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in
Figure 3-104.
NOTE
The battery cell should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reserved
between battery cells.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

402
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
4.
Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 3-105.
a.
Remove terminal covers from the storage batteries.
b.
Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for series
connections.
c.
Install the NEG(-) cables and then RTN(+) cables for the storage batteries, and
tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
403
BTS3900A
6.
l

(Ver.D_B)
Install signal cables in the battery cabinet.

1.
2.

a.
Connect the ELU signal cable to the port on the ELU.
b.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU
port on the CMUEA.
3-106.
a.
b.
CMUEA.
Figure 3-106 Installing signal cables in the battery cabinet
3.
4.
----End


This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in an
APM30H or TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

404
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Prerequisites
Context
l
Figure 3-107 shows the position for installing the BBU case in the APM30H and TMC11H.
Figure 3-107 Position for installing the BBU case
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Remove the filler module from the position where the BBU case is to be installed, as
shown in Figure 3-108. If no filler module is installed in this position, skip this step.
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting ear on each
side of the filler module.
2.
Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.

NOTE
Install removed filler modules in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top to bottom. Redundant
filler modules can be discarded.
Figure 3-108 Removing the filler module
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

405
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 2 Record the ESN on the BBU case and report it to the base station commissioning personnel. For
details, see Obtaining the ESN.
1.
Align the two cable claws with the holes on either side of the BBU case.
2.
Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw with a torque of 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 3-109 Installing cable claws on the BBU

1.
Place the BBU on the guide rails and slowly slide the BBU into the cabinet.
2.
Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ears on either side of the BBU to 2 Nm (17.70
lbfin.).
Figure 3-110 Installing the BBU case
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
406
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTE
2.
3.
EPU in the APM30H.
CAUTION
the BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the EPU. Operations in the reverse sequence
NOTE
Figure 3-111 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30H. When the BBU case is installed in a TMC11H, the
cable connections are the same.
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
407
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTE
2.
3.
CAUTION
the BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequence
NOTE
Figure 3-112 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC11H. When the BBU case is installed in an extension
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

408
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Cables.
----End

Context
NOTE
CAUTION
Operation Rules
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
operations.

409
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
CAUTION
installed.

BBU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

410
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

411
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
3.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the DCDU-12B.
Prerequisites
Context
When RFUs and RRUs are configured in the BTS3900A, a DCDU-12B must be installed in the
RFC to supply power to RRUs.
Figure 3-118 shows the position of the DCDU-12B in the RFC.
Figure 3-118 Position of the DCDU-12B
Table 3-18 lists the specifications of DCDU-12B power cables in AC and DC scenarios.
Table 3-18 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables
Cable
DCDU12B
input
power
cable
(in AC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
RT
N
(+)
Col
or
CrossSectional
Area of
the Cable
One End
The Other End
Connec
tor
Installation
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Bla
ck
25 mm2 or
0.039 in2,
one group
OT
terminal
(M6)
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals in
the INPUT
part of the
DCDU-12B in
the RFC
OT
terminal
(M6)
RFC2
terminal on
the EPU in
the
APM30H

412
BTS3900A
Cable
Col
or
scenari
os)
NE
G
(-)
Blu
e
DCDU12B
input
power
cable
(in DC
scenari
os)
RT
N
(+)
Bla
ck
NE
G
(-)
Blu
e

(Ver.D_B)
CrossSectional
Area of
the Cable
One End
The Other End
Connec
tor
Installation
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
l 35
mm2 or
0.054
in.2
(low
smoke
zero
halogen
), one
group
OT
terminal
(M6)
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals in
the INPUT
part of the
DCDU-12B in
the RFC
Depending
on the
external
equipment
External
power
equipment
l 16
mm2 or
0.025
in2, two
groups
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B.
Step 2 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 3-119.
1.
Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on the DCDU-12B contact the columns.
2.
Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.), as
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

413
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-119 Installing the DCDU-12B
(1) DCDU-12B
(2) Cable claw
Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-120. Skip this
step in DC scenarios.
1.
Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For details, see Assembling the OT
Terminal and the Power Cable.
2.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal RFC2
on the EPU in the APM30H.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

414
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-120 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in AC scenarios
Step 4 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-121.
1.
Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For how to add a connector to the power
cable on the DCDU-12B side, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The
type of the connector at the other end depends on the onsite conditions.
2.
Connect the connector at the other end of the power cable to external power equipment.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

415
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-121 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in DC scenarios
bind the cables.
----End
3.10.4 Installing the Air Baffle

In an APM30H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.B), air baffle must be installed in the vacant customer
space to prevent heat reflux in the empty space. If the vacant space in an APM30H(Ver.C)/
TMC11H(Ver.C) has been occupied by air baffle, skip this section.
Procedure
Step 1 Place the air baffle in the installation position, and secure the air baffle to the right inner wall of
the cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

416
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-122 Installing the filler module
----End

during the upgrade.
3.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.B)

transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between cabinets during
the upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).

Table 3-19 lists the changes of power cables, PGND cables, and equipotential cables.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

417

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Table 3-19 Changes of power cables, PGND cables, and Equipotential cables
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Input
power
cable
for the
APM3
0H (in
AC
scenar
ios)
To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
OT
termin
al
(M6)
AC
INPU
T port
on the
EPS
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment
Exter
nal
power
equip
ment
OT
termin
al
(M6)
AC
INPU
T port
on the
EPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment
Extern
al
power
equip
ment
Input
power
cable
for the
TMC1
1H (in
AC
scenar
ios)
To be
reuse
d, and
the
conne
ctor at
one
end
needs
to be
replac
ed
onsite
.
Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)
TMC
port on
the
EPS
OT
termin
al
(M6, 4
mm2
or
0.006
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-03
C
EPC4
connec
tor
LOAD
7 port
on the
EPU
OT
termin
al (M6,
4 mm2
or
0.006
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-12C

418

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Power
cable
for the
juncti
on box
in the
TMC1
1H
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L3 and
N3
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L and
N
termi
nals
near
the
AC
OUT
PUT
part
on the
juncti
on
box in
the
TMC
11H
OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L3 and
N3
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L and
N
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
TMC1
1H
Input
power
cable
for the
TMC1
1H
(when
the
TMC1
1H
uses
DC
power
suppli
ed by
the
RFC
cabine
t)
To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
Paralle
l
termin
al
SPAR
E2
port on
the
DCD
U-01
OT
termin
al
(M6,
2.5
mm2
or
0.004
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-03
C
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Juncti
on box
in the
RFC
OT
termin
al (M6,
25
mm2
or
0.039
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-12C

419
BTS3900A
Cable
Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in DC
scenar
ios)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)

(Ver.D_B)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment
OT
termin
al
(M6,
16
mm2
or
0.025
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-01
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment
OT
termin
al (M6,
one
group
of
cables
with a
crosssection
al area
of 35
mm2
or
0.054
in2, or
two
groups
of
cables
with a
crosssection
al area
of 16
mm2
or
0.025
in2)
Juncti
on box
in the
RFC

420
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type

(Ver.D_B)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in AC
scenar
ios)
To be
replac
ed
Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(blue)
Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(blue)
on the
EPS
OT
termin
al
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-01
OT
termin
al
(M6)
RFC1
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al
DCD
U-12A
in the
RFC
RRU
power
cable
To be
reuse
d(1)
Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)
One of
LOAD
8 to
LOAD
13
ports
on the
EPS
Depen
ding
on the
RRU
port
EPC5
or
EPC4
connec
tor
One of
LOAD
0 to
LOAD
8 ports
on the
DCD
U-12B
Depen
ding
on the
RRU
port
PWR
port on
the
RRU
Input
power
cable
for the
heater
(in AC
scenar
ios)
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L1 and
N1
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
EPS
C13
connec
tor
Heate
r/
power
input
port
OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L1 and
N1
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
EPS
C13
connec
tor
Heater
/power
input
port

421

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Power
cables
for a
batter
y
cabine
t
To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(grey)
Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(grey)
on the
EPS
OT
termin
al
(M6,
16
mm2
or
0.025
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
on the
BAT
in the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200D
or
IBBS
200T
OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)
BAT
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als on
the
BAT
in the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T
Power
cables
for the
fan in
an
IBBS2
00D
To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)
LOAD
3 port
on the
EPS in
the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al
(M4,
2.5
mm2
or
0.004
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
on the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200D
EPC4
connec
tor
LOAD
8 port
on the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H
EPC4
connec
tor
FAN/
TEC_I
NPUT
port on
the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00D

422
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type

(Ver.D_B)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Power
cable
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS2
00D
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L1 and
N1
termin
als or
L2 and
N2
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box
OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L and
N
termi
nals
on the
juncti
on
box
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS
200D
OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)
L1 and
N1
termin
als or
L2 and
N2
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box
OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)
L and
N
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS2
00D
Power
cable
for the
TEC
in the
IBBS2
00T
To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)
LOAD
3 port
on the
EPS
OT
termin
al
(M4,
2.5
mm2
or
0.004
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
FAN
silksc
reen
on the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200T
EPC4
connec
tor
LOAD
8 port
on the
EPU
EPC4
connec
tor
FAN/
TEC_I
NPUT
port on
the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00T
Equip
otentia
l cable
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabin
et
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabine
t

423
BTS3900A
Cable
PGND
cable
Chan
ge
Type
To be
reuse
d

(Ver.D_B)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
for the
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d
busba
r
outsid
e the
cabin
et
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
for the
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d
busbar
outsid
e the
cabine
t
NOTE
of the new RRU.
Signal Cables
Cable
Monitor
ing
signal
cable
between
cascade
d
CMUE
As
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
To
be
reus
ed
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
OUT
port on
the
upperlevel
CMU
A
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
lowerlevel
CMU
A
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
OUT
port on
the
upperlevel
CMU
EA
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
lowerlevel
CMU
EA

424
BTS3900A
Cable
Monitor
ing
signal
cable
for a
battery
cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
To
be
reus
ed

(Ver.D_B)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
CMU
A in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
485
port on
the
PMU
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
CMU
EA in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
485
port on
the
PMU

425
BTS3900A
Cable
CMUA
-BBU
monitor
ing
signal
cable
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
To
be
reus
ed

(Ver.D_B)
Before the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
RJ45
conne
ctor
l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UA
in
the
RF
C
RJ45
conne
ctor
l M
ON
0
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H
RJ45
conne
ctor
l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UE
A
in
the
RF
C
RJ45
conne
ctor
l M
ON
0
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
RF
C
l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UA
in
the
AP
M3
0H
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
After the Change
l M
ON
1
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H

l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UE
A
in
the
AP
M3
0H
l M
ON
1
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H
426
BTS3900A
Cable
BBU
intercon
nection
cable
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
To
be
reus
ed

(Ver.D_B)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
DLC
conne
ctor
One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU
DLC
conne
ctor
l CI
por
t on
the
U
MP
T
in
the
BB
U
DLC
conne
ctor
One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU
DLC
conne
ctor
l CI
por
t on
the
U
MP
T
in
the
BB
U
l S0
por
t on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
l S0
por
t on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U
BBU
alarm
cable
To
be
reus
ed
RJ45
conne
ctor
EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU
RJ45
conne
ctor
Extern
al
alarm
device
RJ45
conne
ctor
EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU
RJ45
conne
ctor
Extern
al
alarm
device
Cable
between
two
combin
ed base
stations
To
be
reus
ed
DB15
male
conne
ctor
GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU
MD36
or
DB15
male
conne
ctor
DGLU
b on
the
DCTB
DB15
male
conne
ctor
GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU
MD36
or
DB15
male
conne
ctor
DGLU
b on
the
DCTB

427
BTS3900A
Cable
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

(Ver.D_B)
Before the Change
After the Change
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Externa
l dry
contact
monitor
ing
signal
cable
To
be
reus
ed
Bare
wire
SLPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment
Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment
Bare
wire
SLPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment
Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment
Adapter
used for
local
mainten
ance
To
be
reus
ed
USB
3.0
conne
ctor
USB
port on
the
UMPT
in the
BBU
Ethern
et
conne
ctor
Ethern
et
cable
USB
3.0
conne
ctor
USB
port on
the
UMPT
in the
BBU
Ethern
et
conne
ctor
Ethern
et
cable

Table 3-21 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
E1/T1
cable
To be
reused
DB26 male
connector
OUTSIDE port
on the UELP in
the SLPU
Depending on
the external
transmission
equipment
External
transmission
equipment
FE/GE
Etherne
t cables
To be
reused

port in the
OUTSIDE part
on the UFLP in
the SLPU
RJ45 connector
Router that is
connected to
the BSC

428
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
FE/GE
fiber
optic
cable
To be
reused
LC connector
l FE optical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT,
UMPT, or
UTRP in
the BBU
l FC
connector
Router that is
connected to
the BSC
l SC
connector
l LC
connector
l FE optical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
E1/T1
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable
To be
reused
DB25
connector
INSIDE port
on the UELP in
the SLPU
FE/GE
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable
To be
reused
RJ45 connector l FE
electrical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT, or
UMPT in
the BBU
DB26
connector
E1/T1 port on
the GTMU,
WMPT,
UMPT, or
UTRP in the
BBU
RJ45 connector
FE electrical
port in the
INSIDE part on
the UFLP in the
SLPU
LC connector
FE optical port
on the WMPT/
UMPT, LMPT/
UMPT, or
GTMU in the
BBU
l FE
electrical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
optical
ports
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
To be
reused
LC connector
FE optical port
on the GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU

429
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
electric
al ports
To be
reused

port on the
GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU
CPRI
electric
al
cables
To be
reused
SFP20 male
connector
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
GTMU in
the BBU
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
RJ45 connector
FE electrical
port on the
WMPT/UMPT,
LMPT/UMPT,
or GTMU in the
BBU
SFP20 male
connector
l CPRI0 or
CPRI1 port
on one of
MRFU 0 to
MRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
GRFU 0 to
GRFU 5
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5 (or
CPRI0 to
CPRI2)
ports on the
WBBP in
the BBU
l CPRI0 port
on one of
WRFU 0 to
WRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
LRFU 0 to
LRFU 5
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
LBBP in the
BBU
RF Cables
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Change
Type
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
RF jumper
To be reused
DIN straight
male
connector
Antenna
feeder
DIN elbow
male
connector
ANT_TX/
RXA and
ANT_RXB
ports on the
RFU

430
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Cable
Change
Type
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Inter-RFU
RF signal
cable
To be reused
QMA elbow
male
connector
RX_OUTA
port on the
RFU
QMA elbow
male
connector
RX_INB
port on an
RFU

Installing Input Power Cable for the APM30H

The input power cable for the APM30H connects the external power equipment to the input
wiring terminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the cabinets in the BTS3900A.
Prerequisites
l
Context

The cabinets used by the BTS3900A in AC scenarios support the power supplies of 220 V AC
three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire. Table 3-23 lists the input
power cables that are delivered for the APM30H supplied with different type of power.
Cable
Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
L1
wire
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
Brown
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
l Prepared
onsite

l Black cable
with dual
insulation
431

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
L2
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
L3
wire
Gray
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
N
wire
Blue
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
220 V AC
single-phase
power
L wire
Brown
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
N
wire
Blue
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
L1
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
L2
wire
Red
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
N
wire
White
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Remarks
layers and
four core
wires
l Prepared
onsite
l Two wires (L
and N), each
with a single
core and two
insulation
layers
l Prepared
onsite
l Three wires
(L1, L2, and
N), each with
a single core
and two
insulation
layers
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the APM30H.
1.
2.
Add an OT terminal to each end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the APM30H, as shown in Figure 3-123, Figure 3-124, or
Figure 3-125.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

432
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1.
2.
NOTE
3.
Route the power cable into the cabinet along the left side, connect each wire to the
corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).
4.
three-phase)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

433
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
single-phase)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

434
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
dual-live-wire)
bind the cable.
----End

The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H include the input power cable for the
TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed power
from the APM30H into the TMC11H and other equipment. You need to reuse the power cables
from the APM30H to the TMC11H with replacing the connectors at both ends.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

435

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Context
l

Cable
Input power
cable for the
TMC11H
Power cable
for the
junction box
in the
TMC11H
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
OT terminal
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
EPC4 connector
OT terminal
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)
To be reused, and
the connectors at
both ends need to
be replaced.
L wire
Brow
n
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
N wire
Blue
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the
TMC11H.
1.
2.
Add a connector to each end of the input power cable for the TMC11H and the power cable
for the junction box in the TMC11H according to the instructions in Table 1. For details,
see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector
and the Power Cable.
1.
2.
Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal
LOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30H.
3.
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

436
BTS3900A
4.

(Ver.D_B)
Step 3 Install the power cable for the junction box of the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-127.
1.
box of the APM30H.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the AC input terminals L and N in the junction
box of the TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

437
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-127 Installing power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H
bind the cable.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the RFCs

APM30H to the RFCs.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

438

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Context
l

Table 3-25 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs.
Table 3-25 Power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)
Cables are
newly
delivered.
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)
Cables are
newly
delivered.
Input power
cable for the
RFC
(between the
APM30H
and the RFC
right below
the
APM30H)
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Input power
cable for the
RFC
(between the
APM30H
and the RFC
on the lower
right side)
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC right below the
1.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the RFC1 port on the EPU in the
APM30H.
2.
terminals on the DCDU-12A in the RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

439
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower right
side), as shown in Figure 3-129.
1.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the RFC2 port on the EPU in the
APM30H.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

440
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
bind the cable.
----End
Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (One
IBBS200D or IBBS200T Configured)
APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T when one IBBS200D or IBBS200T is configured in
the initial configuration.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
441

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Context

l
Table 3-26 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Table 3-26 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T
Cable
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
Prepared onsite
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
Prepared onsite
OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.
2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
To be reused
Power cables
for the fan in
an
IBBS200D
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Power cable
for a battery
cabinet
RTN
(+)
wire
Red
NEG
(-)
wire
Black
L wire
Brow
n
N
wire
Blue
Power cable
for the
heating film
in the
IBBS200D
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Color

442
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Step 2 Install the power cable for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 3-130.
1.
Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen
2.
Figure 3-130 Installing the power cable for the battery cabinet
Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 3-131.
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

443
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1.
2.
Figure 3-131 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly in the IBBS200D
Step 4 Install the power cable for the heating film in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 3-132.
NOTE
1.
2.
junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

444
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTICE
the IBBS200Ds
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

445
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 5 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 3-134.
NOTE
1.
2.
Figure 3-134 Installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T
bind the cable.
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

446
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
----End
Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
(Two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts Configured)
APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts when two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts are configured
in the initial configuration.
Prerequisites
l
Context

l
Table 3-27 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Table 3-27 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
Prepared onsite
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
The power cable

is reused with
connectors at
both end
replaced.
Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the
IBBS200D
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Cascading
power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the
IBBS200D
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue

447

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
Prepared onsite
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
The power cable

is reused with
connectors at
both end
replaced.
OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)
OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)
Prepared onsite
OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.
2)
OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)
To be reused
Power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Cascading
power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Power cable
for batteries
RTN
(+)
wire
Red
NEG
(-)
wire
Black
Cascading
power cable
for the
batteries
RTN
(+)
wire
Red
NEG
(-)
wire
Black
Power cable
(two wires)
for the
heating film
in the
IBBS200D
L wire
Brow
n
N
wire
Blue
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

448
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

Step 2 Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P1 in Figure 3-135.
1.
Connect the OT terminal (M8) at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen
2.
terminals near the BAT silkscreen in the lower part of the power distribution box in the
Step 3 Install cascading power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-135.
1.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the upper part of the power distribution box in the
2.
wiring terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box
in the upper IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Figure 3-135 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the storage batteries
Step 4 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure 3-136.
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

449
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1.
2.
TEC silkscreen on the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
Step 5 Install the cascading power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure
3-136.
NOTE
1.
2.
Figure 3-136 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the fan in the
IBBS200D
Step 6 Install the power cable for the heating film in the upper IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure
3-137.
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

450
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1.
2.
junction box on the inner left wall of the upper IBBS200D.
Step 7 Install the power cable for the heating film in the lower IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure
3-137.
NOTE
1.
2.
junction box on the inner left wall of the lower IBBS200D.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

451
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTICE
the IBBS200Ds
Step 8 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P1 in Figure 5.
NOTE
1.
2.
Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the FAN/TEC port near the
INPUT silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
Step 9 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-139.
NOTE
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

452
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-139 Installing the power cable and cascading power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T
bind the cable.
NOTE
----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

453
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Prerequisites
l
The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length
requirements of the new RRU.
The colors and structures of the power cables are for reference only, which may differ from
those of the cables onsite.
Context

l
guide.
Table 3-28 lists the specifications of RRU power cables when a DCDU-12B supplies
power.
Cable
RRU
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
RTN
(+)
Black
EPC5 or EPC4
connector
Depending on
the RRU port
NEG
(-)
Blue
l If the
original
RRU power
cable can be
reused, you
need to
replace the
connector on
the
DCDU-12B
side.
l If the
original
RRU power
cable must
be replaced,
you need to
add new
connectors
to both ends
of the new
RRU power
cable onsite.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

454
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Procedure
Step 1 Route the RRU power cable into the cabinet through the cable hole.
box.
1.
2.
3.
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm
(10.62 lbfin.).
4.
Install the PGND cables with the ground clips onto the two self-clinching studs on the right
wall of the RFC. Then tighten the self-clinching studs to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

455
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
CAUTION
bind the cable.
----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

456

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
Installing Input Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios

RFC and TMC11H when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Prerequisites
l
Context

As listed in Table 3-29, power cables for the RFC have two specifications: 35 mm2 (0.05 in.2)
and 16 mm2 (0.02 in.2).
Table 3-29 Input power cables for the RFC
Cable
Input power
cable for the
RFC
RTN
(+)
wire
(35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2, one
group)
NEG
Blue
(-) wire
Input power
cable for the
RFC
RTN
(+)
wire
(16 mm2 or
0.02 in.2, two
groups)
NEG
Blue
(-) wire
Input power
cable for the
TMC11H
(the
TMC11H is
powered by
the RFC)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Color
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
Black
Black
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
OT terminal (M6,
35 mm2 or 0.05 in.
2)
Depending on
the external
equipment
The power
cable is made
onsite.
OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)
The power
cable is made
onsite.
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.02 in.
2)
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
NEG
Blue
(-) wire

457
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Procedure
1.
2.
Add connectors to both ends of the input power cable for the RFC according to Table 1.
Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-142.
1.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the external power supply.
1.
2.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the input power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG
(-) terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

458
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
bind the cable.
----End

Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

459
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Context
l

guide.
Table 3-30 lists the specifications of the RRU power cable when a DCDU-12B supplies
power.
Cable
RRU
power
cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
RTN
(+)
Black
EPC5 or EPC4
connector
Depending on
the RRU port
NEG
(-)
Blue
l If the
original
RRU power
cable can be
reused, you
need to
replace the
connector on
the
DCDU-12B
side.
l If the
original
RRU power
cable must
be replaced,
you need to
add new
connectors
to both ends
of the new
RRU power
cable onsite.
NOTE
If the RRU is to be placed at a longer distance, replace the original RRU power cable with a longer
one.
Procedure
Step 1 Route an RRU power cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

460
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
box.
1.
2.
3.
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
NOTE
When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules:
l When one to three RRU power cables are installed, put all the RRU power cables on one side of the
ground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in Figure 3-144.
l When four or six RRU power cables are installed, put two or three RRU power cables on each side of
the ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in Figure 3-144.
l When five RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread three cables
through one ground clip and two cables through the other group clip, or thread four cables through
one ground clip or one cable through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 3 in Figure
3-144.
l When seven to ten RRU power cables or twelve RRU power cables are installed, use two ground clips
and comply with the preceding rules.
l When eleven RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread five
cables through one ground clip and six cables through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration
4 in Figure 3-144.
Figure 3-144 Installing the ground clips (side elevation view)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

461
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-145 Installing the ground clips
CAUTION
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

462
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
bind the cable.
----End

Installing the E1/T1 Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the E1/T1 cable.
Context
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
E1/T1 cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in the APM30H
that is shown in Figure 3-147.
463
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on the UELP, as shown in Figure
3-147.
NOTE

Cables.
Figure 3-147 Installing the E1/T1 cable
Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable outlet on the bottom left side of the
cabinet.
bind the cable.
----End
Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable.
Context
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

464
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

l
An FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable.
FE/GE Ethernet cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in
the APM30H that is shown in Figure 3-149.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE cable in a proper position within 1 m from the cable outlet
of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-148.
1.
Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE cable, and strip the sheath off the cable
for about 40 mm to expose the shield layer.
2.
Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.
3.
Make the shield layer of the FE/GE cable in full contact with the ground clip, and tighten
the M4 screws on the clip until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 Nm.
Figure 3-148 Installing a grounding clip
Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) port
near the OUTSIDE label on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 3-149.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

465
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTE

Cables.
Figure 3-149 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable
Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet on
bind the cable.
----End
Installing the FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable.
Context
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

466
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
as MM.
The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multi-mode optical
An FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC
connector, or LC connector at the other end.
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not
used simultaneously.
SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they are
not used simultaneously.
The method of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H is the same as the method
of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in a TMC11H. The following describes the procedure
for installing an FE/GE fiber optic cable in an APM30H.
NOTICE
An optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore,
you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes.
Procedure
1.
BBU board.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

467
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 2 Insert the optical module into the corresponding FE/GE optical port, as shown in Figure
3-151.
NOTE

Cables.
Step 3 Stick a temporary label to the FE/GE fiber optic cable to be installed.
Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in Figure
3-151.
Figure 3-151 Installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable
Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet on
bind the cable.
Step 7 Replace the temporary label on the FE/GE fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For
----End

Scenarios
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

468
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

Context
l
Table 3-31 Specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario
of 1 RFC+1 APM30H
Cable
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
Remarks
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 3-152.
1.
the RFC.
2.
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

469
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
APM30H)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

470
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
To be reused
Battery
cabinet
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
RJ45
connector
COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 3-153.
1.
the RFC.
2.
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

471
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
APM30H)
Step 2 Install a battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T and
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

472
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-154 Installing the battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D
or IBBS200T and APM30H)
bind the cable.
----End

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

473
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 3-155.
1.
the RFC.
2.
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

474
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
APM30H)
1.
the TMC11H.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

475
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
the TMC11H and RFC)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

476
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
RJ45
connector
COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 3-157.
1.
the RFC.
2.
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

477
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
APM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T and
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

478
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-158 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet
1.
the TMC11H.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

479
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
the TMC11H and RFC)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

480

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installation
Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
upper
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
and lower
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the upper
IBBS200D
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet
(between the
APM30H
and lower
battery
cabinet)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
RJ45
connector
COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 3-160.
1.
the RFC.
2.
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

481
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
APM30H)
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

482
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-161 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the
upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

483
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-162 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery
cabinet and the APM30H)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

484

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet
(between the
APM30H
and lower
battery
cabinet)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
RJ45
connector
COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
upper
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
and lower
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the upper
IBBS200D
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 3-163.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

485
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1.
the RFC.
2.
APM30H.
APM30H)
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

486
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

487
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-165 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower
battery cabinet and the APM30H)
1.
the TMC11H.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

488
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
the TMC11H and RFC)
bind the cable.
----End

V DC Scenarios

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

489
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Cable
One End
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC11H)
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU of the
TMC11H
Remarks
To be
reused
Procedure
Figure 3-167.
1.
the RFC.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

490
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
TMC11H)
bind the cable.
----End

cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs.
Context
Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the
cabinet. Table 3-38 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets
after the cable change.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

491
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
TMC11H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
TMC11H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
extension
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
RJ45
port on the
connector
CMUEA in
the extension
TMC11H
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 3-168.
1.
the RFC.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

492
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
TMC11H)
1.
of the RFC.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

493
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
bind the cable.
----End

cabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

494
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs
Cable
One End
The Other End
Change
Type
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC11H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU of the
TMC11H
To be
reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
the
extension
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
extension
TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC
To be
reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
two RFCs)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the right
RFC
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the left RFC
To be
reused
Procedure
Figure 3-170.
1.
the RFC.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

495
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
TMC11H)
1.
of the right RFC.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

496
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
in Figure 3-172.
1.
of the left RFC.
2.
of the right RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

497
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
two RFCs)
bind the cable.
----End

This section describes the procedure for installing inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or singlemode base station.
Prerequisites
l
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

498
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
(1) Rate
(2) Wavelength
Context
Cable Connections.
Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
NOTE
NOTICE
minutes.
Cable Connections.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

499
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
CI port on the UMPT
CI port on the UMPT
UMPT+UMPT
NOTICE
A color-coding tape marked Master is attached to one end of an inter-BBU cable that connects
two UMPTs in different BBUs. When installing the cable, connect the end marked Master to
the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 0 and the other end to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 1.
NOTE
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

500
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTE
mode.
1.
2.
1.
1.
2.
NOTE
l When two BBUs are installed in the APM30H, connect the signal cables, as shown in Figure 3-176. When
BBU 0 is installed in the APM30H and BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H, connect the signal cables, as
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

501
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

502
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
----End

Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

503
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
NOTICE
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

504
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1.
2.
(221.27 lbfin. to 309.78 lbfin.).
Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumper according to the instructions in Attaching the Color Ring.
feeder.
----End
3.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable

The CPRI electrical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RFU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

505
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Procedure
NOTE

Description.
Step 2 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cable through the cable hole on the inner left side of
the power cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the corresponding
Figure 3-182 Installing the CPRI electrical cable
Step 3 Connect the SFP connector on the CPRI electrical cable to the CPRI0 port on the panel of the
Step 4 Route the cables by referring to Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind the cables.
NOTE
l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cable at the top of the DCDU-12A in the RFC or in the
base of the RFC.
l Lay out the cable according to the manners in Figure 3-182. Ensure that the cable is routed to the RFU
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

506
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 5 Attach labels to the installed cables. For details, see Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End
3.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable

The CPRI fiber optic cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RRU.
Context
l
as MM.
The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multi-mode optical
For details about the connections of CPRI fiber optic cables, see "CPRI Cable Connections"
in the BTS900A Hardware Description.
NOTICE
be abnormal. Therefore, you must insert an fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module
within 20 minutes.
l
Station Cables.
Procedure
1.
2.
Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU/WBBP/LBBP. Then insert an
optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU.
NOTE
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

507
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 2 Install a CPRI fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 3-184.

1.
Stick a temporary label to the CPRI fiber optic cable to be installed.
2.
Remove the dustproof cap from the connector on the fiber optic cable.
3.
the optical modules in the WBBPLBBPGTMU, WBBP, or LBBPGTMU or WBBP, and
then insert the DLC connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module
in the RF module.
NOTICE
l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the break-out fiber optic
in.), respectively.
Figure 3-184 Installing the CPRI fiber optic cable
Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cable along the left of the cabinet, and then lead it out of the cabinet
from the cable hole on the left of the bottom. For details, see Cabling Requirements.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

508
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Step 4 Replace the temporary label on the CPRI fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For detailed
----End


No.
Item
design.

No.
Item

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

509
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
10
11
and negative poles.
12

13

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Item

510
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
No.
Item
the same direction.
FE cables.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

511
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No
.
Cabinet Type
Item
APM30H/
TMC11H
The ground cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. For
APM30H/
TMC11H
the filler module.
APM30H/
TMC11H
The ELU has been replaced, For detailed operations, see 3.7.4
APM30H
detailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cable for the
APM30H.
APM30H
The input power cable for the junction box has been installed. For
APM30H
APM30H
the Cabinet.
APM30H
the BBU Case.
APM30H
10
APM30H

11
APM30H
the Cabinet.
12
TMC11H
13
TMC11H
the Cabinet.
14
TMC11H
the BBU Case.

512
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
No
.
Cabinet Type
Item
15
TMC11H
16
TMC11H

Cabinet.
17
TMC11H
the Cabinet.
18
RFC
19
RFC

monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, and ELU signal
cable have been installed. For detailed operations, see 3.8.7
Installing Cables in the Cabinet.
20
RFC
In DC scenarios, the junction box has been installed. For detailed

operations, see 3.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction
Box.
21
RFC
In AC scenarios, the input power cable for the RFC has been
replaced. For detailed operations, see Installing Power Cables
from the APM30H to the RFCs.
22
RFC
detailed operations, see (Optional) Installing the RRU Power
Cable or (Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable.
23
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T

Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

513
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
been set to OFF.
Context
DANGER
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

514
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

Base
Station
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A
(Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,

DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box

equipment.)
BTS3900A
(Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box

EPU03A-04
EMUA, and FAN 02B.)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

515
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Base
Station
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A
(Ver.D)
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

EPU05A-04
IBBS200T
NOTE
Process
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

516
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Procedure
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

517
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
1.
2.
3.
cabinet.
4.
Cabinet
Compone
nt
APM30H
PMU

PSU

Fan
assembly

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Fan in the
front door
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
Fan or TEC
in the front
door

and off for 1s).
IBBS700D
Fan in the
front door
and
CMUEA

IBBS700T
TEC and
CMUF

5.
6.
7.

518
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

Cabinet
Compone
nt
APM30H
BBU

and off for 1s).
TMC11H
RFC
FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

Fan in the
front door
RFU

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

RRU

for 1s).

NOTE
8.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

519

(Ver.D_B)
BTS3900A

Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to all
components in the
cabinet

the BBU
Check as follows:

units.

replace the board.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

520
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
to step 2.
component.
component.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

1.
2.
3.
and DCDU-12B.
4.
DCDU-12C.
5.
6.

521
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

Cabinet
Compone
nt
TMC11H
BBU

and off for 1s).
for 1s).
RFC
FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

Fan in the
front door
RFU

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

RRU

7.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to all
components in the
cabinet

units.

522
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

the BBU
Check as follows:
replace the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
to step 2.
component.
component.
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

523
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

and checked.

Context
Procedure
(1) Barcode label
(4) Nameplate
1.
for the cabinet.
2.
----End
3.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets

After all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable outlets on the cabinet and base.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

524
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Procedure
Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes on both sides of the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC,
IBBS200T, or IBBS200D cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-188 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, IBBS200T, or
IBBS200D cabinet
(1) Fireproof mud
1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

525
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)

power cables
electrical cables

equipotential cable

(6) Screw
Step 3 Use baffle plates to block redundant space in the cable outlets and tighten the two screws on
each baffle plate, as shown in Figure 3-190.
Figure 3-190 Sealing the cable outlets on the base
(1) Baffle plate on the right
(2) Baffle plate at the rear
(3) Baffle plate on the left
Step 4 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in Figure 3-191.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

526
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-191 Sealing cable outlets on the base using fireproof mud
(1) Fireproof mud
(2) PVC corrugated pipe
Step 5 Tighten the three screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate.
----End
3.14.3 Repainting
must be repaired.
Prerequisites
Applied to
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

527
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
Figure 3-193.
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

528
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_B)
minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

529
BTS3900A
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2)
About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A
4.1 Introduction to Upgrade
This section describes configuration of enhanced cabinets after being upgraded and reuse
procedures.
4.3 Unpacking Check
4.7 Restructuring the IBBS200T
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200T
to be restructured.
4.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

530
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure proper
grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets
to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.
during the upgrade.
and checked.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

531
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

procedures.
4.1.1 Restrcutured Cabinets Interior

To meet requirements in different outdoor environments, Huawei provides various cabinets for
the separated macro base station such as BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) and distributed base station
such as DBS3900 (Ver.D_A2). The cabinets include the APM30H (Ver.D_A2), TMC11H
(Ver.D_A2), RFC (Ver.D_A), and IBBS200T (Ver.D_A2), which provide different functions.
The RFC is used only for the BTS3900A.
APM30H interior
The following figure shows the APM30H interior.
Figure 4-1 APM30H interior
The following table describes the components in the APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

532
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Table 4-1 Components in the APM30H

N
o.
Compo
nent
Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nda
tor
y
Max
imu
m
Qua
ntit
y in
a
Sin
gle
Cab
inet
Description
Heat
exchang
er core
Ma
ndat
ory
The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air
circulation, and exchanges internal and external air. In this
way, it lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and
protects the cabinet from dust.
Fan
assembl
y
Ma
ndat
ory
A fan assembly is configured with fans and a central

monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA), dissipating heat from the
cabinet.
SLPU
Ma
ndat
ory
l To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal lightning

protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and installed in the
top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the
universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or
universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP).
l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is
optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It
is configured with two universal signal lightning
protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
ELU
Ma
ndat
ory
The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type

automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Door
status
sensor
Ma
ndat
ory
It reports the door status, whether open or closed.
EPU
Ma
ndat
ory
The Embedded Power subrack Unit (EPU) converts AC

power into DC power and feeds power to the devices inside
the cabinet. The EPU consists of the EPU subrack, PMU, and
PSUs.
BBU390
0
Ma
ndat
ory
The BBU3900 processes the baseband signals and enables

the base station and the base station controller to interact.
GATM
Opt
iona
l
The GSM Antenna and TMA Control module (GATM)

reports the RET control signal alarms.

533
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
N
o.
Compo
nent
Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nda
tor
y
Max
imu
m
Qua
ntit
y in
a
Sin
gle
Cab
inet
Description
EMUA
Opt
iona
l
An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) monitors

the environment in a cabinet and processes alarms.
10
AC
heater
Opt
iona
l
The AC heater ensures that components in the cabinet work

within the acceptable temperature range when the
surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U
space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater and
an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U space
above the SOU.
11
SOU
Opt
iona
l
The SOU can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of

the cabinet, transferring AC power supply to the customer
equipment.
TMC11H Interior
There are two types of TMC11H:
l
One type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown
in illustration A in the following figure.
The other type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration
B in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

534
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-2 TMC11H interior
The following table describes the components in the TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

535
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Table 4-2 Components in the TMC11H

N
o.
Compo
nent
Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nda
tor
y
Max
imu
m
Qua
ntity
in a
Sing
le
Cabi
net
Description
Heat
exchange
r core
Ma
ndat
ory
The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air
circulation, and exchanges internal and external air. In this
way, it lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and
protects the cabinet from dust.
Fan
assembly
Ma
ndat
ory
A fan assembly is configured with fans and a central

monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA), dissipating heat from
the cabinet.
SLPU
Ma
ndat
ory
l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is

mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the
cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP.
l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU
is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU.
It is configured with two USLP2s.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
ELU
Ma
ndat
ory
The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type

automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Door
status
sensor
Ma
ndat
ory
It reports the door status, whether open or closed.
DCDU
Ma
ndat
ory
The direct current distribution unit (DCDU) is 1 U high and

it provides ten DC power outputs for components in the
TMC. The DCDU-12B is used for the DC-powered
distributed base stations. The DCDU-12C is used for the
DC-powered macro base stations and transmission cabinets.
BBU390
0
Ma
ndat
ory
The BBU3900 processes the baseband signals and enables

the base station and the base station controller to interact.
EMUA
Opt
iona
l

the environment in a cabinet and processes alarms. The
EMUA must be configured when more than 16 Boolean
alarm inputs are required. It is installed in the 1 U space
below the BBU.

536

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
N
o.
Compo
nent
Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nda
tor
y
Max
imu
m
Qua
ntity
in a
Sing
le
Cabi
net
Description
AC
heater
Opt
iona
l

surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1
U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
RFC Interior
The Radio Frequency Cabinet (RFC) is used by the BTS3900A and provides installation space
for RFUs.
The following figure shows the RFC interior.
Figure 4-3 RFC interior
The following table describes the components in the RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

537
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Table 4-3 Components in the RFC

No.
Module/
Board
Optional
or
Mandato
ry
Maximum Description
Quantity
in a Single
Cabinet
CMUEA
assembly
Mandator
y
The Central Monitoring Unit type EA

(CMUEA) assembly consists of the support
and CMUEA.
DCDU-13
A
Mandator
y
The DCDU-13A is a direct current

distribution unit. It provides four 30 A and
-48 V DC power outputs.
ELU
assembly
Mandator
y
The ELU assembly consists of a support

and an electronic label unit (ELU). The
ELU automatically reports the cabinet type.
Fan
assembly
Mandator
y
A fan assembly dissipates heat from the

cabinet. It contains two standalone fans.
RFUs
Mandator
y
Radio frequency units (RFUs) are used in

macro base stations. They perform
modulation and demodulation of baseband
signals and RF signals, data processing,
power amplifying, and VSWR test.
IBBS200T Interior
The following figure shows the IBBS200T interior.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

538
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-4 IBBS200T interior
The following table describes the components in the IBBS200T.

Table 4-4 Components in the IBBS200T
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional
or
Mandato
ry
Maximum Description
Quantity
in a Single
Cabinet
TEC
Mandator
y
The TEC cooler ensures the normal

operation of the IBBS200T in hightemperature areas and dissipates heat for
the storage batteries.
Transfer
terminal
for the
signal
cable
Mandator
y
It provides ports for alarms reported by the

door status sensor, TEC, temperature
sensor for storage batteries, and smoke
sensor.
Power
distributio
n box
Mandator
y
The power distribution box is installed on

the lower inner right wall of the cabinet. It
transfers and distributes power to the fan or
TEC and storage batteries.
Storage
battery
Mandator
y
The storage batteries provide long-duration

backup power for base stations.

539
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional
or
Mandato
ry
Maximum Description
Quantity
in a Single
Cabinet
Transfer
terminal
for the
input
power
cable for
the TEC
Mandator
y
It provides power input ports for the TEC.
4.1.2 Restructuring Process

This section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade from BTS3900A

The following figure shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied
with AC power.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

540
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

DC power.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

541
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)


l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
before the upgrade.
542
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

upgrade.
Product Name
SingleRAN7.0 series
SingleRAN6.0 series
4.2.3 Document Preparations

l
documents:
BTS3900A (Ver.A) Hardware Description
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide
BTS3900A&DBS3900 Post-Upgrade Hardware Description
BTS3900A (Ver.A) Installation Guide
BTS3900A (Ver.A) Site Maintenance Guide
Safety Precautions


Marker

M6)
Diagonal pliers

M6)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

543

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
32 mm (1.26 in.)
combination wrench
Socket wrench
Torque wrench
RJ45 crimping tool
Cable cutter
Rubber mallet
Soldering iron
Wire stripper
Hammer drill (16)
Heat gun
Level
Multimeter
Measuring tape
Vacuum cleaner
ESD wrist strap
ESD gloves
Torque screwdriver
Gloves

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

544
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
4.3 Unpacking Check

Context
NOTE
l
NOTICE
Procedure
If...
Then...

list
Go to Step 2.

packing list


If...
Then...
Go to Step 3.
soaked
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

545
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
If...
Then...

If...
Then...
CAUTION
photos.
----End


APM30H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

546
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Front door
To be
replace
d

PMU
To be
replace
d
Fan
assembly
To be
replace
d

PSU (AC/
DC)
To be
replace
d

Door status
sensor
To be
reused
Power
subrack
(AC/DC)
To be
replace
d
The power subrack (AC/DC) needs to be replaced with

an EPU 05 to meet the power requirement of a large
configuration.
PDU
To be
replace
d

547
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
BBU3900
To be
reused
GATM
To be
remove
d
10
EMUA
To be
reused
The environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA)

monitors the environment in a cabinet and processes
alarms. The EMUA must be configured when more than
16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. It is installed in the
1 U space below the BBU.
AC heater
To be
reused
SLPU
Added
An SLPU can be added according to customer

requirements.
ELU
Added

to be added to facilitate troubleshooting.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

548

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
No.
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installatio
n Position
Chang
e Type
P0
PGND
cable for
the front
door
OT
terminal
Ground
point on
the inner
wall of the
APM30H
OT
terminal
Front door
of the
APM30H
To be
replace
d
P1
GATM
power
cable
To be
remove
d
P2
GATM
power
cable
To be
remove
d
P3
EMUA
power
cable
OT
terminal
LOAD3
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30H
Cord end
terminal
PWR1
terminal on
the EMUA
To be
reused
P4
HEUA
power
cable
OT
terminal
LOAD4
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30H
3V3
connector
PWR1 port
on the
HEUA
To be
replace
d
P5
BBU
power
cable
OT
terminal
LOAD5
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30H
3V3
connector
-48V port
on the BBU
To be
replace
d
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

549
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Change
Type
S0
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
IBBS200T
OT terminal
Junction
terminal for
the
monitoring
signal cable
in the
IBBS200T
RJ45
connector
HPMI in the
APM30H
To be
reused
S1
HPMIPMU
monitoring
signal cable
To be
removed
S2
PMUHEUA
monitoring
signal cable
To be
removed

550

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
No.
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Change
Type
S3
HEUAGATM1
monitoring
signal cable
To be
removed
S4
GATM0BBU
monitoring
signal cable
To be
removed
S5
FMUAGATM0
monitoring
signal cable
To be
removed
S6
GATM1BBU
monitoring
signal cable
To be
removed
S7
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
DB9 male
connector
RS485 port
on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
RS232/
RS422 port
on the PMU
To be
reused
S8
GPS clock
signal cable
Type N
female
connector
GPS surge
protector
SMA male
connector
GPS port on
the USCU in
the BBU
To be
reused
S9
GPS jumper
N50 straight
male
connector
GPS surge
protector
N50 straight
male
connector
GPS
antenna
To be
reused

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

551
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTICE
Step 2 Set the SW4 circuit breaker on the PDU to OFF. This circuit breaker controls the power supply
to the fan assembly.
NOTE
l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the DBS3900, the SW2 circuit breaker controls the power supply
to the fans.
l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the BTS3900A, the SW4 circuit breaker controls the power supply
to the fans.
Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door from the fan transfer
board, and then cut the cable ties on these cables.
Figure 4-10 Removing the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door
Step 4 Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown in
Figure 4-11.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

552
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-11 Removing the equipotential cable for the cabinet door
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove three hinges on the cabinet door and then remove the
cabinet door, as shown in Figure 4-12.

NOTE
l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.
l Two persons are required for installing the front door.
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
One person lifts the new front door to align the hinges with the holes in the cabinet, and
the other person uses a torque screwdriver to tighten the three hinges to the cabinet to 1.4
Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
553
BTS3900A
2.

(Ver.D_A2)
Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on the inner wall.
Step 7 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and that the barcode
number starts with 212102.
l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Figure 4-13 shows the position
of the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of the cabinet.
l If there is no such a barcode label on the inner wall of the cabinet, record the number on the
barcode label that is stuck on the front door, and stick a label carrying the same number to
the corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Figure 4-13 shows the position
of the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.
(1) Position of the barcode label on the inner wall of the (2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of the
cabinet
cabinet
----End

Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

554
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTICE
NOTE
to the fans.
to the fans.

1.
Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables. Attach temporary
labels at one end of all cables before removing them for recording cable connections.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fan
assembly, and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shown
in the following figure.
NOTE
When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan assembly.
3.
Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
the four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears of the fan assembly to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

555
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
----End
4.4.4 Installing an ELU

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the electronic label unit
(ELU).
Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Use two M4x8 screws to secure the ELU on the ELU base to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Step 3 Remove the adhesive paper off the bottom of the ELU base, and stick the ELU base on the
position shown in the following figure.
NOTE
Press the ELU for about 1 minute to ensure that it is securely stuck on the inner wall of the cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

556
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-16 Installing the ELU base
Step 4 Install the ELU case.

----End

Prerequisites
Context
l
The following figure shows the power systems before and after the upgrade. A shows the
exterior of the power subrack without the cover before the upgrade. B shows the exterior
of the power subrack after the upgrade.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

557

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Figure 4-17 Power systems before and after the upgrade
(1) PMU
(2) PSU
(3) PDU
(4) Power subrack
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Instruct the element management system (EMS) administrator to block all the carriers of this
base station.
Step 3 Power off the base station.
1.
Set the Bat circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.
2.
Shut off the external power for the APM30H.
Step 4 Remove all cables from the power system.

1.
Remove all monitoring signal cables from the PMU.
2.
Remove power cables for storage batteries from the BAT(+) and BAT(-) terminals on the
wiring unit of the power subrack.
3.
Remove all cables from the PDU panel. The cables include the PGND cable, AC input
power cables, AC and DC output power cables, and AC and DC surge protection signal
cables.
Step 5 Remove the power system.

1.
Use a flat-head screwdriver to loosen the screws on the ejector lever of the PMU or PSU
panel.
2.
Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU or PSU out of the subrack and remove the PMU
or PSU from the subrack, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

558
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-18 Removing the PMU or PSU
3.
Remove the screws on both sides of the power subrack (AC/DC), and gently pull the power
subrack (AC/DC) out of the cabinet.
4.
Remove the screws on both sides of the PDU, and gently pull the PDU out of the cabinet.
5.
Place the removed AC or DC power subrack, PMU, PSUs, and PDU into the ESD box or
bag.
Step 6 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left side of the
cabinet
CAUTION
If the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC
(35.6oF to 37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperature
alarms.
1.
Remove the guide rails in the positions shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-19 Removing the guide rails
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

559
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
2.
Remove the guide rail on the left side of the position where the power subrack is originally
installed, as shown by a in the following figure. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve the
screws.
3.
contacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in the following figure.
4.
Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 6.2 to secure the guide rail attached with windproof
cotton padding, and tighten the screws to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.), as shown by c in the
following figure.
Figure 4-20 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner
left side of the cabinet
1.
padding for about 3 cm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in the following figure.
2.
cabinet. These operations are shown by b and c in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

560
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Step 8 Install the mounting part attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the
cabinet
CAUTION
If the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC
(35.6oF to 37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperature
alarms.
1.
2.
Attach the windproof cotton padding to the inner right wall of the cabinet, use three M6
screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.), as shown in the following
figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

561
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-22 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right side of the cabinet
Step 9 Install the new power system.

1.
Add six floating nuts to the mounting bars for securing the power system. The following
figure shows the positions.
Figure 4-23 Installing floating nuts
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

562
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
2.
Place the new power system in the installation position and gently push it into the cabinet
along the guide rails. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven M6x12 panel screws to
2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.).
3.
Use M6x12 screws to secure the PGND cable for the new power system to the ground bar.
The recommended torque is 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
----End

Context
l
The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured along with DRFUs. When DRFUs are removed,
the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.
Remove the GATM.
Procedure
1.
Turn off the SW0 or SW1 circuit breaker on the PDU to power off the GATM.
2.
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the PGND cable for the GATM. Then use a
wrench to remove the RF jumper from the GATM.
4.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, and remove
the GATM. Reinstall the removed screws on their original positions on the mounting
bar, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

563
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

1.
Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable, and PGND cable from the
Bias-Tee.
2.
----End
4.4.7 (Optional) Installing the Filler Module

In an APM30H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.B), filler modules must be installed in the vacant
customer space to prevent heat reflux in the empty space. If the vacant space in an APM30H
(Ver.C)/TMC11H(Ver.C) has been occupied by filler modules, skip this section.
Prerequisites
Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the filler module in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to the secure the
filler module to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 4-25.
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30H after
restructuring the APM30H.
Prerequisites
Context
The following table describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

564
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Table 4-6 Power cables in the restructured cabinet

Cable
One End
The Other End
Descriptio
n
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Power cable
for the
transfer
terminal
Bare wire
Transfer
terminal
OT terminal
AC INPUT
terminal on
the EPU
To be reused
Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the APM30H
EPC4
connector
LOAD2 port
on the EPU
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the APM30H
A 1.1 m (3.61
ft) cable is
newly
delivered.
EMUA
power cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD5 port
on the EPU
Cord end
terminal
PWR1
terminal on
the EMUA
To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.
BBU power
cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD0 or
LOAD1 port
on the EPU
3V3
connector
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU
A 0.58 m
(1.90 ft)
cable is
newly
delivered.
The following table describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
One End
The Other End
Descriptio
n
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
in the
APM30H
2-pin
connector
GATE port
on the PMU
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
To be reused
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the fan
assembly
Added

565

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Cable
One End
The Other End
Descriptio
n
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable for the
fan in the
front door
Interconnect
ion terminal
Power cable
for the fan in
the front door
of the
APM30H
4-pin
connector
FAN_EXT
port on the
fan assembly
Added
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the fan
assembly
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
Added
PMUCMUEA
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
PMU
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
fan assembly
in the
APM30H
Added
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
DB9 male
connector
RS485 port
on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
PMU
To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.
Procedure
l

Remove related cables in the cabinet according to the cable changes in 4.4.1 Information
You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H. Skip this step if you have
removed these cables when replacing related modules.
Installing power cables in the APM30H

1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Install the power transfer cable for the APM30H, as shown by P1 in Figure 4-26.
a.
Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the AC OUTPUT port
on the left side of EPU.
b.
Connect the cable at the other end of the power cable to the transfer terminal.
4-26.
a.
b.
Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable for the fan assembly
to the LOAD2 port on the EPU.
566
BTS3900A
c.
3.
4.

(Ver.D_A2)
Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR port
on the fan assembly in the APM30H, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the
screws on the 3V3 connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).

a.
b.
Add a connector to each end of the power cable and you can use the EPC4
connector removed in 3.1. For detailed operations, see Assembling the Cord End
Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the
Power Cable.
c.
Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD5 port
on the EPU.
d.
Connect the cord end terminal at the other end of the power cable to the PWR1
port on the EMUA.

a.
b.
Add the removed EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable. For
detailed operations, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE
c.
Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port
on the UPEU in the BBU, and connect the EPC4 connector at the other end to
the LOAD0 port on the panel of the EPU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

567
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
5.
ties to bind them.
6.

1.
2.
3.
4-27.
a.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to the
GATE port on the fan assembly.
b.

a.
Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU.
b.
Connect the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU port on the fan
assembly.
Install the monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front door, as shown by
S3 in Figure 4-27.
a.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front
door to the power cable for the fan in the front door.
b.
Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal transfer
cable to the FAN_EXT port on the fan assembly.
NOTICE
Bind the interconnected monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front door
to the cable bridge on the front door to prevent the cabinet door from extruding the
interconnection terminal.
4.
5.
6.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

a.
Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_OUT
b.
Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1
port on the UPEU in the BBU.

a.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signal
cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA.
b.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoring
signal cable to the COM_IN port on the PMU.
Optional: Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S6 in Figure

4-27.
a.
Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the EMUA monitoring signal
cable to the RS485 port on the EMUA.
b.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the EMUA monitoring signal
cable to the COM_OUT port on the PMU.
568
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
7.
ties to bind them.
8.
----End


TMC11H
This section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the
TMC11H.
Component Changes in the TMC11H

There are three types of TMC11Hs:
l
When a TMC11H serves as a transmission cabinet, it only provides space for the
transmission equipment and a DCDU-03A is installed in it. Illustration A in the following
figure shows this type of TMC11H.
When a TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the DBS3900, the TMC11H is supplied
with -48 V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-03B are installed in it. Illustration B
in the following figure shows this type of TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

569
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
When a TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, the TMC11H is supplied
with -48 V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-06A are installed in it. Illustration C
in the following figure shows this type of TMC11H.
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Front door
To be
replace
d

Fan
assembly
To be
replace
d

DCDU
To be
replace
d
l When the TMC11H serves as a transmission cabinet,

the DCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12C.
l When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of
the DBS3900, the DCDU needs to be replaced with a
DCDU-12B.
l When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of
the BTS3900A, the DCDU needs to be replaced with
a DCDU-12C.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

570

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Door status
sensor
To be
reused
BBU3900
To be
reused
GATM
To be
remove
d
EMUA
To be
reused
ELU
Added

to be added to facilitate troubleshooting.
Cable Changes in the TMC11H

Cable connections in TMC11Hs vary according to the configurations of TMC11Hs. The
following figure shows the cable changes in the TMC11H serving as the power cabinet of the
BTS3900A.
Figure 4-29 Equipotential cables and power cables in the TMC11H
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

571
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
P0
PGND
cable for
the front
door
OT
terminal
Ground
point on
the inner
wall of the
TMC11H
OT
terminal
Front door
of the
TMC11H
To be
replaced
P1
Power
cable for
the fan in
the
TMC11H
OT
terminal
l FAN
termin
al on
the
DCDU
-06A
3V3
connector
PWR port
on the fan
assembly
in the
TMC11H
To be
replaced
l LOAD
8
termin
al on
the
DCDU
-03A
l LOAD
8
termin
al on
the
DCDU
-03B
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

572
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
P2
BBU
power
cable
OT
terminal
l BBU
termin
al on
the
DCDU
-06A
3V3
connector
-48V port
on the
UPEU in
the BBU
To be
replaced
Cord end
terminal
PWR1
terminal
on the
EMUA
To be
reused
l LOAD
6
termin
al on
the
DCDU
-03A
l LOAD
6
termin
al on
the
DCDU
-03B
P3
EMUA
power
cable
OT
terminal
l SPAR
E3
termin
al on
the
DCDU
-06A
l LOAD
7
termin
al on
the
DCDU
-03A
l LOAD
7
termin
al on
the
DCDU
-03B
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

573
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
P4
GATM
power
cable
To be
removed
Figure 4-30 shows the signal cable changes in the TMC11H that houses the BBU3900 and is
Figure 4-30 Signal cable changes in the TMC11H
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
S1
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the door
status
sensor
2-pin
connector
GATE
port on the
HPMI
Bare wire
Door
status
sensor
To be
reused

574
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
S2
l DCDU
-06A
monito
ring
signal
cable
To be
removed
l DCDU
-03A
monito
ring
signal
cable
l DCDU
-03B
monito
ring
signal
cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
S3
EMUA
monitorin
g signal
cable
DB9 male
connector
RS485
port on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
COM_OU
T port on
the HEUA
To be
reused
S4
GATMBBU
monitorin
g signal
cable
To be
removed
S5
FMUAGATM
monitorin
g signal
cable
To be
removed
S6
HEUABBU
monitorin
g signal
cable
To be
removed
S7
GPS clock
signal
cable
SMA male
connector
GPS port
on the
USCU in
the BBU
Type N
female
connector
GPS surge
protector
To be
reused

575
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
S8
GPS
jumper
N50
straight
male
connector
GPS surge
protector
N50
straight
male
connector
GPS
antenna
To be
reused

Prerequisites
Context
The TMC11H and APM30Hs have the same front door. This section describes the procedure
for replacing the cabinet door, using the APM30H as an example.
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Set the circuit breaker corresponding to the fans on the DCDU to OFF to power off the fans.
l When the TMC11 or TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-06A, the SW3 circuit breaker
controls the power supply to the fans.
l When the TMC11 or TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-03A or DCDU-03B, the SW0
circuit breaker controls the power supply to the fans.
Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door from the fan transfer
board, and then cut the cable ties on these cables.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

576
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-31 Removing the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door
Figure 4-32.
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove three hinges on the cabinet door and then remove the
cabinet door, as shown in Figure 4-33.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

577
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

NOTE
l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.
l Two persons are required for installing the front door.
1.
One person lifts the new front door to align the hinges with the holes in the cabinet, and
the other person uses a torque screwdriver to tighten the three hinges to the cabinet to 1.4
Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
2.
l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Figure 4-34 shows the position
of the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of the cabinet.
the corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Figure 4-34 shows the position
of the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

578
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
cabinet
cabinet
----End

Prerequisites
Context
The fan assembly used in a TMC11H is the same as that used in an APM30H. This section
describes the procedure for removing the front door in an APM30H as an example.
Procedure
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

579
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
1.
Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables. Attach temporary
labels at one end of all cables before removing them for recording cable connections.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fan
assembly, and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shown
NOTE
When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan assembly.
3.
Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
the four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears of the fan assembly to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

580
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
----End
4.5.4 Installing an ELU

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the electronic label unit
(ELU).
Prerequisites
Context
This section describes the procedure for installing the ELU in an APM30H as an example. The
position of and procedure for installing an ELU in a TMC11H is the same as those in an
APM30H.
Procedure
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

581
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Step 2 Use two M4x8 screws to secure the ELU on the ELU base to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Step 3 Remove the adhesive paper off the bottom of the ELU base, and stick the ELU base on the
position shown in the following figure.
NOTE
Press the ELU for about 1 minute to ensure that it is securely stuck on the inner wall of the cabinet.
Figure 4-37 Installing the ELU base
Step 4 Install the ELU case.

----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-03A, DCDU-03B,
or DCDU-06A.
Prerequisites
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

582
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Context
TMC11Hs can be configured with different models of DCDUs, which include the DCDU-03A,
DCDU-03B, and DCDU-06A. The DCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12B or
DCDU-12C during the upgrade.
l
When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, replace the DCDU with
a DCDU-12C.
When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900, replace the DCDU with
a DCDU-12B.
When the TMC11H serves as a transmission cabinet of the BTS3900A or DBS3900, replace
the DCDU with a DCDU-12C.
This section describes the procedure for replacing the DCDU-03B with a DCDU-12B. Other
models of DCDUs are removed and installed in the same way.
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Shut off the external power supply to the power off the DCDU-03B.
NOTE
l If a DCDU-03A is configured, you can turn the SW6 circuit breaker on the PDU in the APM30H to OFF to
power off the DCDU-03A.
l If a DCDU-06A configured, shut off the external power supply to power off the DCDU-06A.
Step 3 Remove the DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 4-38.

1.
Remove all connectors from the DCDU-03B panel.
2.
block from the DCDU-03B.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

583
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
3.
Remove the input power cables and equipotential cable for the DCDU-03B from the
terminals.
4.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-03B,
and gently pull the DCDU-03B out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Figure 4-38 Removing the DCDU-03B
Step 4 Place the DCDU-03B and protective cover into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install the DCDU-12C.
1.
Hold the DCDU-12C with both hands and slide the DCDU-12C into the cabinet until the
mounting ears on the DCDU-12C contact the columns.
2.
Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12C to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.).
----End

Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

584

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC11H after
you restructure the TMC11H.
Prerequisites
Context
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the TMC11H
EPC4
connector
LOAD9 port
on the
DCDU-12C
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the TMC11H
The cable is
newly
delivered.
BBU power
cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD6 or
LOAD7 port
on the
DCDU-12C
in the
TMC11H
3V3
connector
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU of
the TMC11H
The cable is
newly
delivered.
EMUA
power cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD8 port
on the
DCDU-12C
Cord end
terminal
PWR1
terminal on
the EMUA
To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

585

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A

Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
Bare wire
GATE port
on the fan
assembly
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
To be reused
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
RJ45
connector
MON1 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
To be reused
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the fan
assembly
The cable is
newly
delivered.
Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable for the
fan in the
front door
Interconnecti
on terminal
Power cable
for the fan in
the front
door of the
TMC11H
4-pin
connector
FAN_EXT
port on the
fan assembly
The cable is
newly
delivered.
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
DB9 male
connector
RS485 port
on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
fan assembly
To be reused
Procedure
l
Install power cables in the TMC11H.

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the TMC11H, as shown by P1 in Figure
4-40.
a.
on the DCDU-12C.
b.
Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 4-40. If no BBU
is installed in this cabinet, skip this step.
a.
b.
Connect the EPC4connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 or
c.
Connect the 3V3 power connector at the other end of the power cable to the -48V

586
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
a.
Replace the OT terminal at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4
b.
on the DCDU-12C.
c.
port on the EMUA.
Figure 4-40 Installing power cables in the TMC11H
4.
ties to bind them.
5.
Install signal cables in the TMC11H.

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
4-41.
a.
Cut off the 2-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable, and strip
the jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.
b.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on the fan
assembly.

Figure 4-41. If no BBU is installed in this cabinet, skip this step.
a.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the
b.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable to

587
BTS3900A
4.
5.

(Ver.D_A2)
a.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the port on the top
of the ELU.
b.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the ELU port
Install the monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front door, as shown by
S4 in Figure 4-41.
a.
b.
Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the signal cable to the FAN_EXT

a.
Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the signal cable to the RS485 port
on the EMUA.
b.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the COM_OUT
port on the CMUEA.
Figure 4-41 Installing signal cables in the TMC11H
6.
ties to bind them.
7.
----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

588
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)


Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
FMUA
To be
replace
d
The FMUA needs to be replaced with a CMUEA

assembly.
DCDU-02
To be
replace
d
The DCDU-02 needs to be replaced with a DCDU-13A

to enhance the power distribution capacity.
Filler panel
To be
replace
d
The filler panel needs to be replaced with an ELU

assembly. The ELU reports the cabinet type
automatically. It needs to be added to facilitate
troubleshooting.

589

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Door status
sensor
To be
reused
Fan
To be
reused
Temperatu
re sensor
To be
reused

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

590

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
P1 to P6
RFU
power
cables
Parallel
terminal
RFU0
terminal
on the
DCDU-02
To be
replaced
P7
FMUA
power
cable
Parallel
terminal
FMUA
terminal
on the
DCDU-02
3V3
connector
PWR port
on the
FMUA
To be
replaced

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

591
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
S1
DCDUFMUA
monitorin
g signal
cable
Cord end
terminal
TEM_HU
M
ARREST
ER
RJ45
connector
SPD ALM
port on the
DCDU-02
To be
replaced
S2 and S3
FMUAFAN
monitorin
g signal
cable
4-pin
connector
FAN port
on the
FMUA
FAN unit
To be
replaced
S4
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the door
status
sensor
2-pin
connector
GATE
port on the
CMUA
Bare wire
Door
status
sensor
To be
reused
S5
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the
temperatur
e sensor in
the RFC
4-pin
connector
TEM port
on the fan
assembly
in the RFC
Temperatu
re sensor
Air intake
vent at the
bottom of
the RFC
To be
replaced

Prerequisites
l
a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
The FMUA is removed, and the fan assembly stops working.
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

592
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTICE
Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fan assembly,
and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shown in the following
figure.
Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten
the four screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown in the following
figure. The recommended torque is 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 4-45 Replacing the fan assembly in the RFC
----End
4.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the FMUA assembly and
filler panel.
Prerequisites
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

593
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Turn the FMUA circuit breaker on the left of the DCDU-02 panel to OFF.
Step 3 Record the cable connections on the FMUA panel, and remove all cables.
Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the FMUA, and gently
pull the FMUA out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, and
remove the filler panel.
Step 6 Place the removed FMUA assembly and filler panel into ESD boxes or bags.
Step 7 Place the CMUEA assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use
a torque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 4-46 Installing the CMUEA assembly
Step 8 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, and gently
pull the filler panel out of the cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

594
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Step 9 Place the ELU assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use a
torque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 4-47 Installing the ELU assembly
----End
4.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-02 with a
DCDU-13A.
Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

595
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Step 2 Instruct the M2000/U2000 administrator to block all the carriers of this base station.
Step 3 Turn all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU-02 to OFF to power off the fan assembly and
RFUs.
Step 4 Power off the DCDU-02.
l In AC scenarios, turn the SW8 and SW9 circuit breakers on the PDU in the APM30H to
OFF.
l In DC scenarios, shut off the external power supply.
Step 5 Remove the two DCDU-02 units on the left and right, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Record the position of connectors on the DCDU-02, and remove the connectors.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminals
on the DCDU-02.
3.
Remove the input power cables and PGND cable from the DCDU-02.
4.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-02, and
gently pull the DCDU-02 out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Figure 4-48 Removing the DCDU-02 units
Step 6 Place the removed DCDU-02 units and protective covers in ESD boxes or bags.
Step 7 Place the DCDU-13A in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use a torque
screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the following
figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

596
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
----End
4.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFU

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or ESD
gloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.
Context
l
V2, MRFU V2a, and WRFU.
V2, MRFU V2a WRFU, and LRFU.
V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU.
If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) or WRFUa is not faulty, disable its maximum output
power locking for TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be removed. For details about how to remove the
GATM and Bias-Tee, see 4.4.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.
document holder on the cabinet door, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

597
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTE
Procedure
NOTE
disabled.
1.
record the result.
been locked.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

598
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
If...
Then...

Go to Step 1.2.

Go to 2.
NOTE
2.
locking.
NOTE
Step 2 Ask the administrator of element management system (EMS) to block the RFU.
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

599
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTE

1.
Set the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to OFF to power off
the RFU.
2.
3.
4.
Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the cable.
5.
CAUTION
6.


1.
2.
Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners on the RFU panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.) to
3.
Reconnect power cable and RF jumper to the RFU panel.
4.
Use a wrench to tighten the connector on the jumper and feeder to 25 Nm to 35 Nm (221.25
lbfin. to 309.75 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

600
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-52 Tightening the connector on the jumper and feeder
(1) Feeder
(2) Jumper
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC after you
restructure the RFC.
Prerequisites
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
CMUEA
power cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD3 port
on the left
DCDU-13A
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the RFC
The cable is
newly
delivered.

601
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Power cable
between
DCDU-13A
s
OT terminal
(M6)
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals on
the left
DCDU-13A
in the RFC
OT terminal
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals on
the right
DCDU-13A
in the RFC
The cable is
newly
delivered.
RFU power
cable
EPC4
connector
One of the
LOAD0 to
LOAD2
ports on both
DCDU-13A
s
3V3
connector
PWR port on
one of RFU 0
to RFU 5
The cable is
newly
delivered.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
Bare wire
GATE port
on the fan
assembly
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
To be reused
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the CMUEA
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the ELU
assembly
The cable is
newly
delivered.
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
RFC
4-pin
connector
TEM port on
the CMUEA
Temperature
sensor
Air intake
vent at the
bottom of the
RFC
The cable is
newly
delivered.
Surge
protection
alarm cable
for the
DCDU
Bare wire
IN0 and IN1

ports on the
CMUEA
Bare wire
DC ALARM
port on the
DCDU-13A
The cable is
newly
delivered.

602

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Monitoring
signal cable
for the left
fan
Cable
delivered
with the fan
Bare wire
EFAN1 and
EFAN2 ports
on the
CMUEA
assembly
The cable is
delivered
with the new
fan
assembly.
Monitoring
signal cable
for the right
fan
Cable
delivered
with the fan
4-pin
connector
Transfer
terminal for
the CMUEA
assembly
The cable is
delivered
with the new
fan
assembly.
Procedure
l

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Install the CMUEA power cable, as shown by P1 in Figure 4-53.

a.
on the left DCDU-13A.
b.
on the CMUEA.
Optional: Install the power cable between DCDU-13As, as shown by P2 in Figure

4-53. Skip this step in DC scenarios.
a.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG
(-) terminals on the left DCDU-13A in the RFC.
b.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and
NEG(-) terminals on the right DCDU-13A in the RFC.

a.
For RFU 0 to RFU 2, connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable
to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the left DCDU-13A.
b.
to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the right DCDU-13A.
c.
on the RFU.

603
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
4.
ties to bind them.
5.

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

a.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the ELU port on
the ELU assembly.
b.
on the CMUEA.
4-54.
a.
a length of 8 mm (0.31 in.) jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.
b.
CMUEA.
Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown by S3 in
Figure 4-54.
a.
temperature sensor near the air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.
b.
the TEM port on the CMUEA.
604
BTS3900A
4.
5.
6.

(Ver.D_A2)
Install the surge protection alarm cable for the left DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 in
Figure 4-54.
a.
Connect one end of the cable to the DC ALARM port on the DCDU-13A.
b.
Connect the other end of the cable to the IN1 port on the CMUEA.
Install the surge protection alarm cable for the right DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 in
Figure 4-54.
a.
b.
Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan, as shown by S5 in Figure 4-54.
a.
Connect the cables that come out of the left fan assembly to the EFAN1 and
EFAN2 ports on the CMUEA.
b.
Connect the cables that come out of the right fan assembly to the 4-pin terminals
that come out of the CMUEA. Those 4-pin terminals have been connected to the
IFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the rear of the CMUEA.
7.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
ties to bind them.
605
BTS3900A
8.

(Ver.D_A2)
----End
4.7 Restructuring the IBBS200T

This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200T
to be restructured.

IBBS200T
during the restructuring of the IBBS200T.
Component Changes in the IBBS200T

Figure 4-55 shows component changes in the IBBS200T.
Figure 4-55 Components in the IBBS200T
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Storage
battery
To be
reused

606

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Door status
sensor
To be
reused
Power
distribution
box
To be
replace
d

Transfer
terminal for
the input
power
cable for
the TEC
To be
reused
Transfer
terminal for
the signal
cable
To be
reused
Cable Changes in the IBBS200T

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

607
BTS3900A
No.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable

(Ver.D_A2)
One End
The Other End
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
P0
PGND
cable for
the front
door
OT
terminal
Ground
point on
the front
door
OT
terminal
Ground
point on
the rack
To be
reused
P1
RTN(+)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries
OT
terminal
Positive
pole for
the lower
storage
battery
group
OT
terminal
Positive
wiring
terminal
on the
power
distributio
n box
To be
replaced
P2
RTN(+)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries
OT
terminal
Positive
pole for
the upper
storage
battery
group
OT
terminal
Positive
wiring
terminal
on the
power
distributio
n box
To be
replaced
P3
NEG(-)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries
OT
terminal
Negative
pole for
the upper
storage
battery
group
OT
terminal
Negative
wiring
terminal
on the
power
distributio
n box
To be
replaced
P4
NEG(-)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries
OT
terminal
Negative
pole for
the lower
storage
battery
group
OT
terminal
Negative
wiring
terminal
on the
power
distributio
n box
To be
replaced
P5
Power
transfer
cable for
the TEC in
the front
door
Transfer
terminal
for the
input
power
cable for
the TEC
TEC
To be
replaced

608
BTS3900A
No.
P6
Cable
TEC
power
cable

(Ver.D_A2)
One End
The Other End
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Cord end
terminal
Power
distributio
n box
Cord end
terminal
Wiring
terminal
on the
front door
Change
Type
To be
reused

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

609
BTS3900A
No.
Cable

(Ver.D_A2)
One End
The Other End
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
S1
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the door
status
sensor
Bare wire
Transfer
terminal
for the
signal
cable
Bare wire
Door
status
sensor
To be
reused
S2
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the
temperatur
e sensor in
the battery
cabinet
Transfer
terminal
for the
signal
cable
Cord end
terminal
Temperatu
re sensor
To be
reused

Prerequisites
DANGER
the batteries from burning and ensure personal safety.
Procedure
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

610
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

1.
Set the SW2 circuit breaker on the PDU panel in the APM30H to OFF. This circuit breaker
controls the power supply to the TEC.
2.
Set the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers on the power distribution box to OFF.
3.
Set the BAT circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.

1.
2.
the storage batteries and the copper bars between the storage batteries, and remove the input
power cables and copper bars, as shown in Figure 4-59.
3.
4.
hands to remove the storage batteries at the same layer, and place the storage batteries at a
proper place.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

611
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTE
baffle plate at a layer, you must remove all storage batteries at the layer before removing the
Step 4 Remove the TEC power transfer cable from the TEC.
Step 5 Remove the power distribution box, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Remove the two screws from the left cover of the power distribution box and remove the
cover plate.
2.
Remove the four screws, spring washers, and flat washers from the power distribution box.
3.
Remove the power distribution box with the cables connected to it and then place them into
the ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Connect cables to the new power distribution box.

1.
Remove the cover from the new power distribution box.
2.
Connect cables to the power distribution box, and bind the cables inside the distribution
box, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

612
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-61 Connecting cables to the power distribution box
1.
2.
Adjust the position of the power distribution box until the holes at four corners of the power
distribution box align with the bolts in the cabinet.
3.
Use a socket wrench to secure the four nuts delivered with the power distribution box to
the bolts until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
4.
Install the cover on the left side of the power distribution box and tighten the two M3x6
screws on the cover to 0.55 Nm (4.87 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

613
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
----End

Prerequisites
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

614

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Context
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Power
transfer
cable for the
TEC
OT terminal
Transfer
terminal for
the input
power cable
for the TEC
OT terminal
Power
distribution
box
The cable is
newly
delivered.
RTN(+)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
distribution
box
The cable is
newly
delivered.
NEG(-)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
distribution
box
The cable is
newly
delivered.
RTN(+)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
distribution
box
The cable is
newly
delivered.
NEG(-)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries
OT terminal
Storage
battery
OT terminal
Power
distribution
box
The cable is
newly
delivered.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the power transfer cable for the TEC as well as power cables between the power
distribution box and the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Connect the power transfer cable for the TEC to the power transfer terminal on the front
door, as shown by P1 in the following figure.
2.
Connect negative power cables and then positive power cables for the storage batteries.
The black cable is the power cable for the negative pole, and the red cable is the power
cable for the positive pole, as shown by P2 and P3 in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

615
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-63 Installing power cables in the battery cabinet
Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom up and from left to right, as shown in the following
figure.
NOTE
The storage batteries should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reserved between
the storage batteries.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

616
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Step 3 Install power cables for the storage batteries.

1.
Remove the terminal covers from the batteries.
2.
Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for series connections, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-65 Installing the power cables for the storage batteries
bind them.
Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Prerequisites
The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a cable cutter, and a multi-purpose
crimping tool.
Context
The principles for grounding a BTS3900A are as follows:
l
The upper and lower cabinets must be connected through an equipotential cable.
The lower cabinets are connected to the RFC through an equipotential cable.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

617
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
The RFC is connected to the ground busbar through a PGND cable.
The principles for grounding a DBS3900 are as follows:

l
The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to other
lower cabinets through equipotential cables.
The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to an
external ground bar through a PGND cable.
The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable.
Table 4-13 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable
Cable
Cross-Sectional Area of
the Core Wire and Size of
the OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable
OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or

0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
Equipotential
cable

0.025 in.2)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the PGND cable and equipotential cable.
1.
2.
Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the
OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 4-67.

1.
Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar on the inner wall of the RFC, and
then use spring washers and screws to secure the OT terminals of the PGND cable.
NOTE
When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 4-66 Installing an OT terminal correctly
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the external ground copper bar, as shown in
618
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-67 Installing a PGND cable
(1) Ground bar in the cabinet
(2) PGND cable
(3) Onsite ground bar
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

619
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

4.9.1 Installing a BBU Case

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in an
APM30H or TMC11H.
Prerequisites
Context
l
Figure 4-68 shows the positions for installing BBU cases in an APM30H and a TMC11H.
Figure 4-68 Positions for installing BBU cases
Procedure
Step 1 Record the electronic serial number (ESN) on the BBU case and report it to the base station
commissioning personnel. For details, see Obtaining the ESN.
1.
Align the two cable claws with the holes on both sides of the BBU case.
2.
Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

620
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-69 Installing cable claws on the BBU case

1.
Place the BBU on the guide rails and gently push the BBU case into the cabinet.
2.
Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ear on each side of the BBU case to 2 Nm
(17.70 lbfin.).
Figure 4-70 Installing a BBU case
1.
CAUTION
Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connected
to the BBU first and then to the EPU. The operation in the reverse sequence may cause
personal injury or component damage.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

621
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTE
2.
3.
EPU in the APM30H.
NOTE
Figure 4-71 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30H. When the BBU is installed in a TMC11H, the cable
connections are the same.
1.
CAUTION
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

622
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTE
2.
3.
CAUTION
Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connected to the
BBU first and then to the DCDU. The operation in the reverse sequence may cause personal
injury or component damage.
NOTE
Figure 4-72 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC11H. When the BBU is installed in an extension
Cables.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

623
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
----End

Context
NOTE
CAUTION
Operation Rules
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
operations.

624
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
CAUTION
installed.

BBU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

625
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

626
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
4.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the outdoor distribution
module 06D-2 (shortened to ODM) and outdoor fiber distribution 06 (shortened to OFD) on the
top or side of a cabinet.
Prerequisites
l
The following tools are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a Phillips
screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose
pliers.
An ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed on one side of a single cabinet, or two
ODM or OFD mounting frames can be installed on one side of stacked cabinets or both
sides of a single cabinet. The ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed depending on
site space and the number of ODMs or OFDs to be installed.
An ODM/OFD mounting frame or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are preferentially

installed on the right side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets. If an ODM/OFD mounting
frame or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are installed on the left side of a single cabinet
or stacked cabinets, only one ODM or OFD can be installed one ODM/OFD mounting
frame.
Context
Figure 4-78 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with six or less RRUs configured)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

627
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-79 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with 7 to 12 RRUs configured)
Procedure
l
Installing a mounting frame or two mounting frames on one side of a single cabinet
or mounting frames or both sides of a single cabinet
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following
figure.

628
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-80 Installing a mounting kit on the top
2.
Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use a
torque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 Nm (398.25 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use two
M6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 Nm
(344.25 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.

629
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-82 Securing an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to one side of the cabinet
4.
Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/
OFD06 mounting frame to 5 Nm (344.25 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-83 Tightening an attachment plate on an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame
(1)
5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the back of the cabinet base
to 5 Nm (344.25 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
630
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

(2)
6.
Optional: If two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames need to be installed on both

sides of a single cabinet, the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on
the other side of the cabinet according to Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5.
Installing mounting frames on one side of stacked cabinets

1.
figure.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
following figure.
631
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

632
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
4.
Use two M6x14 screws to secure the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on
the installed ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame.
5.
Figure 4-88 Tightening the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame and its
attachment plate (1)
6.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

633
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-89 Tightening the second attachment plate
Installing the ODM06D or OFD06

1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D or OFD06 to 1.2
Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.

634
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-90 Installing mounting ears
2.
Place the ODM06D or OFD06 on the bulges of pre-securing parts on the ODM06D/
OFD06 mounting frame, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the right side of the cabinet, the
ODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on one side or in the middle of the mounting frame.
l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the left side of the cabinet, the ODM06D
or OFD06 can be installed only in the middle of the mounting frame.
Figure 4-91 Pre-securing the ODM06D or OFD06
(1) Pre-securing part
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

635
BTS3900A
3.

(Ver.D_A2)
Use four M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D or OFD06 onto the ODM06D/OFD06
mounting frame to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.). This is a recommended tightening torque.
Figure 4-92 Securing the ODM06D or OFD06
----End
4.9.4 Installing the SLPU

During the upgrade, if there is no vacant slot for installing a UELP or UFLP in the BBU case,
an SLPU needs to be configured.
Prerequisites
and ESD gloves are available.
Context
The following figure shows the recommended position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 or
APM30H.
l
When the SLPU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that SLPU be installed in
the top 1 U space in the APM30H.
When the SLPU is installed in the APM30, it is recommended that SLPU be installed in
the 1 U space below the BBU in the APM30.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

636
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-93 Position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 or APM30H
(1) Recommended position for installing the SLPU in (2) Recommended position for installing the SLPU in
an APM30
an APM30H
Procedure
Step 1 Install cable claws on both sides of the SLPU case, and move the mounting ear on each side one
hole backwards. Use four M4 screws to secure the mounting ears to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as
Figure 4-94 Installing a cable claw
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

637
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Step 2 Slide the SLPU into the cabinet, and then use a screwdriver to tighten the two M6 screws on the
mounting ears of the SLPU to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 4-95.
Figure 4-95 Installing the SLPU
Step 3 Install the surge protection transfer cable, as shown in Figure 4-96.
NOTE
The following figure shows the connection of an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable and an E1/T1 cable in
GSM mode. For the transmission cable connections in other modes, see "Transmission Cable Connections" in
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description or DBS3900 Hardware Description.
Figure 4-96 Installing a surge protection transfer cable
(1) T1: E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
(1) T2: E1/T1 cable
Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to
bind them.
----End

during the upgrade.
4.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two Cabinets

transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between two cabinets
during the upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

638

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A

The following table lists the changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable.
Table 4-14 Changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Input
power
cable
for the
APM3
0H (in
AC
scenar
ios)
To be
replac
ed
(new
cable
s need
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
OT
termin
al
(M6)
AC
INPU
T port
on the
EPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment
Extern
al
power
equip
ment
Input
power
cable
for the
TMC1
1H (in
AC
scenar
ios)
To be
reuse
d.
The
conne
ctor at
one
end
needs
to be
replac
ed.
EPC4
connec
tor
LOA
D7
port
on the
EPU
OT
termin
al (M6,
4 mm2
or
0.006
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T
silkscr
een on
the
DCD
U-12C

639

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Cable
Input
power
cable
for the
TMC1
1H (in
DC
scenar
ios)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
To be
replac
ed
(new
cable
s need
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Extern
al
power
equip
ment
OT
termin
al (M6,
25
mm2
or
0.039
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T
silkscr
een on
the
DCD
U-12C

640

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Cable
Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in DC
scenar
ios)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
To be
replac
ed
(new
cable
s need
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
Depen
ding
on the
power
equip
ment
Power
equip
ment
OT
termin
al (M6,
a
group
of
cables
with a
crosssection
al area
of 35
mm2
[0.054
in2] or
two
groups
of
cables
with a
crosssection
al area
of 16
mm2
[0.025
in2])
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T
silkscr
een on
the
DCD
U-13
A in
the
RFC

641
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

(Ver.D_A2)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in AC
scenar
ios)
To be
replac
ed
OT
termin
al
(M6)
RFC1
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T
silkscr
een on
the
DCD
U-13
A in
the
RFC
RRU
power
cable
Adde
d
EPC5
or
EPC4
connec
tor
A port
on the
ODM
Depen
ding
on the
RRU
model
PWR
port
on the
RRU

642
BTS3900A
Cable
Main
power
cable

(Ver.D_A2)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Adde
d
Depen
ding
on the
power
equip
ment
l AC
sce
nar
ios
:
RF
C2
por
t
on
the
EP
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H
Cord
end
termin
al
Cord
end
termin
al bar
on the
ODM
l DC
sce
nar
ios
:
ext
ern
al
po
we
r
eq
uip
me
nt
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

643

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Power
cable
for the
heater
in the
TMC1
1H
To be
reuse
d
Bare
wire
8-pin
transfe
r
termin
al on
the
inner
left
wall of
the
APM3
0H
Bare
wire
8-pin
transf
er
termi
nal on
the
inner
left
wall
of the
TMC
11H
Power
cables
for the
batter
y
cabine
t
To be
replac
ed
(new
cable
s need
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or
0.054
in.2)
BAT
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H
OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or
0.054
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
BAT
silkscr
een on
the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00T

644

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Cable
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Power
cables
for the
TEC
in the
IBBS2
00T
To be
replac
ed
(new
cable
s need
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
EPC4
connec
tor
LOA
D8
port
on the
EPU
EPC4
connec
tor
FAN/
TEC_I
NPUT
port
on the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00T
Equip
otentia
l cable
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabin
et
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabine
t
PGND
cable
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d
busba
r
outsid
e the
cabin
et
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d
busbar
outsid
e the
cabine
t
NOTE
of the new RRU.
Signal Cables
The following table lists the signal cable changes.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

645
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

Cable
Monitor
ing
signal
cable
for the
battery
cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
To
be
reus
ed
Bare
wire
Signal
transfe
r
termin
al bar
on the
front
door of
the
IBBS2
00T
Bare
wire
HPMI
in the
APM3
0H
Bare
wire
Signal
transfe
r
termin
al bar
on the
front
door of
the
IBBS2
00T
Bare
wire
COM_
485
port on
the
PMU

646
BTS3900A
Cable
HEUABBU
monitor
ing
signal
cable

(Ver.D_A2)
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
To
be
reus
ed
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN port
on the
HEUA
in the
APM3
0H
RJ45
conne
ctor
MON
1 port
on the
UPEU
in the
BBU
in the
APM3
0H
RJ45
conne
ctor
l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UE
A
in
the
RF
C
RJ45
connec
tor
l M
ON
0
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H
l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UE
A
in
the
AP
M3
0H
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l M
ON
1
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H
647
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

(Ver.D_A2)
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Monitor
ing
signal
cable
for the
transmi
ssion
cabinet
To
be
reus
ed
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN port
on the
HEUA
in the
TMC1
1H
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM
_OUT
port
on the
FMU
A in
the
RFC
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN port
on the
fan
assem
bly in
the
TMC1
1H
RJ45
connec
tor
COM_
OUT
port on
the
CMU
EA
assem
bly in
the
RFC
FMUABBU
monitor
ing
signal
cable
To
be
reus
ed
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN port
on the
FMU
A in
the
RFC
RJ45
conne
ctor
MON
0 port
on the
UPEU
in the
BBU
in the
APM3
0H
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN port
on the
CMU
EA
assem
bly in
the
RFC
RJ45
connec
tor
MON0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU
in the
APM3
0H

648
BTS3900A
Cable
BBU
intercon
nection
cable

(Ver.D_A2)
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
To
be
reus
ed
DLC
conne
ctor
One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU
DLC
conne
ctor
l CI
por
t
on
the
U
M
PT
in
the
BB
U
DLC
conne
ctor
One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU
DLC
connec
tor
l CI
por
t on
the
U
MP
T
in
the
BB
U
l S0
por
t on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U
l S0
por
t
on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
BBU
alarm
cable
To
be
reus
ed
RJ45
conne
ctor
EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU
RJ45
conne
ctor
Extern
al
alarm
device
RJ45
conne
ctor
EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU
RJ45
connec
tor
Extern
al
alarm
device
Cable
betwee
n two
combin
ed base
stations
To
be
reus
ed
DB15
male
conne
ctor
GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU
MD36
or
DB15
male
conne
ctor
DGL
Ub
port
on the
DCTB
DB15
male
conne
ctor
GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU
MD36
or
DB15
male
connec
tor
DGLU
b port
on the
DCTB

649
BTS3900A
Cable
Externa
l dry
contact
monitor
ing
signal
cable

(Ver.D_A2)
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
To
be
reus
ed
Bare
wire
SLPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment
Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment
Bare
wire
SLPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment
Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment

Table 4-16 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI electrical cables
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
E1/T1
cable
To be
reused
DB26 male
connector
OUTSIDE port
on the UELP
Depending on
the external
equipment
External
transmission
equipment
FE/GE
Etherne
t cable
To be
reused

port near the
OUTSIDE
silkscreen on
the UFLP
RJ45 connector
Router that is
connected to
the BSC
FE/GE
fiber
optic
cable
To be
reused
LC connector
l FC
connector
Router that is
connected to
the BSC
l FE optical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT,
UMPT, or
UTRP in
the BBU
l SC
connector
l LC
connector
l FE optical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

650
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
E1/T1
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable
To be
reused
DB25
connector
INSIDE port
on the UELP
DB26
connector
E1/T1 port on
the GTMU,
WMPT/UMPT,
or UTRP in the
BBU
FE/GE
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable
To be
reused
RJ45 connector l FE
electrical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT, or
UMPT in
the BBU
RJ45 connector
FE electrical
port in the
INSIDE part on
the UFLP in the
SLPU
LC connector
FE optical port
on the WMPT/
UMPT, LMPT/
UMPT, or
GTMU in the
BBU
RJ45 connector
FE electrical
port on the
WMPT/UMPT,
LMPT/UMPT,
or GTMU in the
BBU
l FE
electrical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
optical
ports
To be
reused
LC connector
FE optical port
on the GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU
Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
electric
al ports
To be
reused

port on the
GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU

651

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
CPRI
electric
al cable
To be
reused
SFP20 male
connector
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
GTMU in
the BBU
SFP20 male
connector
l CPRI0 or
CPRI1 port
on one of
MRFU 0 to
MRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
GRFU 0 to
GRFU 5
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5 (or
CPRI0 to
CPRI2)
ports on the
WBBP in
the BBU
l CPRI0 port
on one of
WRFU 0 to
WRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
LRFU 0 to
LRFU 5
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
LBBP in the
BBU
RF Cables
Cable
Change
Type
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
RF jumper
To be reused
DIN straight
male
connector
Antenna
feeder
DIN elbow
male
connector
ANT_TX/
RXA and
ANT_RXB
ports on the
RFU
Inter-RFU
RF signal
cable
To be reused
QMA elbow
male
connector
RX_OUTA
port on the
RFU
QMA elbow
male
connector
RX_INB
port on the
RFU

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

652
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H

Input power cables for the APM30H connect the external power equipment to the input wiring
terminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the APM30H.
Prerequisites
l
The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are
purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
Context
The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.

An AC-powered BTS3900A supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110
V AC dual-live-wire power supplies. To support different types of power supply, the APM30H
needs to use different input power cables, as shown in Table 4-18.
Cable
Input power
cables for the
APM30H
supplied with
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
L1
wire
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
Brown
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
l They need to
be prepared
onsite.
L2
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
L3
wire
Gray
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
N
wire
Blue
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment

l Black cable
with dual
insulation
layers and
four core
wires
653

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
Brown
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
l They need to
be prepared
onsite.
Input power
cables for the
APM30H
supplied with
220 V AC
single-phase
power
L wire
N
wire
Blue
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Input power
cables for the
APM30H
supplied with
L1
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
L2
wire
Red
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
N
wire
White
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
l Two wires (L
and N), each
with a single
core and two
insulation
layers
l They need to
be prepared
onsite.
l Three wires
(L1, L2, and
N), each with
a single core
and two
insulation
layers
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the APM30H.
1.
Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.
2.
Add OT terminals to both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assembling
Step 2 Install the input power cables for the APM30H, as shown in Figure 4-97, Figure 4-98, or Figure
4-99.
1.
2.
NOTE
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Route the power cables into the cabinet along the left side of the cabinet interior, connect
each wire to the corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
654
BTS3900A
4.

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-97 Installing input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC threephase)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

655
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-98 Installing input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC singlephase)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

656
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-99 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (110 V AC duallive-wire)
bind them.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
hole on the cabinet.
----End

Power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H feed power from the APM30H to all
components in the TMC11H. You need to replace the connectors at both ends of the power
cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H to reuse the power cables.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

657

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Context
l

Cable
Input power
cables for
the
TMC11H
Wire
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
OT terminal
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
They can be
reused and their
connectors need
to be replaced
onsite.
OT terminal
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC11H.
1.
2.
Add connectors to each end of the input power cables for the TMC11H according to the
specifications in Table 4-19. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power
Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install input power cables for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 4-100.
1.
2.
Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cables to the
DC output port LOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30H.
3.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
4.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

658
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-100 Installing input power cables for the TMC11H
bind them.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to RFCs

APM30H to RFCs.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

659

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Context
l

Table 4-20 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to RFCs.
Table 4-20 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to RFCs
Cable
DCDU-13A
power cables
Power cables
between
cascaded
DCDU-13As
Wire
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)
Cables are
newly
delivered.
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)
Cables are
newly
delivered.
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Install input power cables for the RFC (between the APM30H and the DCDU-13A on the inner
left wall of the RFC), as shown in Figure 4-101.
1.
in the APM30H.
NOTE
If two RFCs are configured, connect the input power cables for the second RFC to the RFC2 terminals on
the EPU.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
terminals on the DCDU-13A on the inner left wall of the RFC.

660
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Step 2 Install power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As (between the left and right DCDU-13As),
1.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the left DCDU-13A.
2.
terminals on the right DCDU-13A.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

661
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-102 Installing power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As
bind them.
----End
Install Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200T

APM30H to the IBBS200T.
Prerequisites
l
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

662

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A

Table 4-21 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the BBS200T.
Table 4-21 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200T
Cable
Wire
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
EPC4 connector
EPC4 connector
They can be
reused and their
connectors need
to be replaced
onsite.
OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.054 in.2)
OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.054 in.2)
They are
delivered and
their connectors
need to be added
onsite.
Power cables
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Power cables
for the
battery
cabinet
RTN
(+)
wire
Red
NEG
(-)
wire
Black
Procedure
Step 1 Add connectors to the power cables to be installed according to the specifications in Table
4-21.
1.
2.
Step 2 Install power cables for the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 4-103.
1.
Connect the OT terminals (M8) at one end of the power cables to the DC output terminals
near the BAT silkscreen on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2.
IBBS200T.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

663
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-103 Installing power cables for the battery cabinet
Step 3 Install power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 4-104.
1.
Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cables to the DC output port LOAD8
2.
Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the INPUT port near
the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

664
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-104 Installing power cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T
bind them.
NOTE
For easy maintenance of the power distribution box in the IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cables that
are routed in front of the power distribution box and do not bind these cables when routing them along the right
side of the IBBS200T interior.
----End
(Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables

When an AC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables and
main power cables need to be installed onsite. RRU power cables feed power from the outdoor
distribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the EPU in the
APM30H to the ODM.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

665
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Prerequisites
l
This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The RRU power cables are
connected to the same positions and routed in the same way in a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).
The original RRU power cables can be reused only if they meet the power supply and length
requirements of the new RRUs.
Context

l
guide.
The following table lists the specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables.
Table 4-22 Specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables
Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Cord end
terminal
OT terminal
(M6)
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Cord end
terminal
Depending on
the RRU port
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Main
power
cables
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
RRU
power
cables
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Add cord end terminals to RRU power cables on the ODM side according to the instructions in
Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Use a T20 Torx screwdriver to loosen the six screws on the ODM06D-3 cover. Then open the
cover, as shown in Figure 4-105.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

666
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-105 Opening the ODM06D-3 cover
Step 3 Prepare cables according to the cabling label on the protective cover.
Step 4 Install the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection box,
RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable in sequence, as shown in Figure 4-106.
1.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cable clips.

NOTE
The screws on the cable clips can be adjusted to adapt to cables with different cross-sectional areas.
2.
Partially loosen the PG connectors to route the cables through the PG connectors.
3.
Route the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection
box, RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable through the PG connectors in
sequence.
4.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminals onto the terminal block.
5.
Use clips to secure the cables and tighten the screws on the clips to ensure that the clips
contact with the shield layers of the cables.
6.
Secure the PG connectors of the cables.
NOTICE
Tighten the PG connectors to waterproof the device.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

667

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Figure 4-106 Installing the cables
(1) Surge protection alarm cable
(2) RRU power cables
(3) Main power cables
(4) PGND cable for the surge protection box
Step 5 Close the ODM06D-3 cover and use a T20 Torx screwdriver to secure the six screws on the
cover, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-107 Closing the ODM06D-3 cover
Step 6 Connect main power cables to the EPU in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

668
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
1.
Add OT terminals to the main power cables according to the instructions in Assembling
2.
in the APM30H.
Figure 4-108 Installing the main power cables
bind the cable.
----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

669

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC

RFC when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Prerequisites
l
Context

Table 4-23 lists the specifications of input power cables for the RFC.
Table 4-23 Specifications of input power cables for the RFC
Cable
Wire
Color
Input power
cables for the
RFC
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
(16 mm2 or
0.025 in.2,
two groups)
NEG
Blue
(-) wire
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2)
Depending on
the external
power
equipment
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Procedure
1.
2.
Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the RFC according to Table 1.
Step 2 Install input power cables for the RFC, as shown in Figure 4-109.
1.
2.
Connect the connector at the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

670
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
bind them.
----End
Installing Input Power Cables for the TMC11H

TMC11H when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
671
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

Table 4-24 lists the specifications of input power cables for the TMC11H.
Table 4-24 Input power cables for the TMC11H
Cable
Wire
Color
Input power
cables for the
TMC11H
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
(16 mm2 or
0.025 in.2,
one group)
NEG
Blue
(-) wire
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2)
Depending on
the external
power
equipment
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC11H.
1.
2.
Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the TMC11H according to Table
4-24. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install input power cables for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 4-110.
1.
terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

672
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-110 Installing input power cables for the TMC11H
bind them.
----End

When a DC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables and
distribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the external power
equipment to the ODM.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

673
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Context
l

RRU. For details about how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related
RRU installation guide.
Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Cord end
terminal
Depending on
the external
power
equipment
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Cord end
terminal
Depending on
the RRU port
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Main
power
cables
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
RRU
power
cables
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

674
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
1.

NOTE
2.
3.
sequence.
4.
5.
6.
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

675

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
Step 6 Connect the connectors at one end of RRU power cables to RRUs.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

676
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Step 7 Connect main power cables to the external power equipment.

1.
Add connectors to each end of the power cables according to the instructions in Assembling
the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.
2.
Connect the cord end terminals at one end of power cables to the input ports on the ODM.
3.
Connect the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.
bind the cable.
----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

677
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Installing E1/T1 Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing E1/T1 cables.
Context
l

When a TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of
E1/T1 cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30H that is shown in Figure
4-115.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cables to the OUTSIDE ports on the UELP, as shown in Figure
4-115.
NOTE

Cables.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

678
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-115 Installing E1/T1 cables
Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cables out of the cable hole on the bottom left side of the
cabinet.
bind them.
----End
Installing FE/GE Ethernet Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE Ethernet cables.
Context
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

679
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
FE/GE Ethernet cables are shielded straight-through cables.
When a TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of
FE/GE Ethernet cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30H that is shown
in Figure 4-117.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE Ethernet cables in a proper position within 1 m (3.28 ft) from
the cable hole of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-116.
1.
Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE Ethernet cables, and strip a length of about
40 mm (1.57 in.) jacket from the cables to expose the shield layers
2.
Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through the
clip.
3.
Attach the ground clip to the shield layers of the FE/GE Ethernet cables and tighten the M4
screws on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm (0.27 lbfin.).
Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) port
near the OUTSIDE silkscreen on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 4-117.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

680
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTE

Cables.
Figure 4-117 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables
Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole on
bind them.
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

681
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables.
Context
l

The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is
labeled as MM.
The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multimode optical
FE/GE fiber optic cables have an LC connector at one end and an FC, SC, or LC connector
at the other end.
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on an LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, the two ports
cannot be used simultaneously.
SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, the two
ports cannot be used simultaneously.
This section uses the procedure for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H as
an example. The procedures for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H and a
TMC11H are the same.
NOTICE
become abnormal. Therefore, you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module
within 20 minutes.
Procedure
1.
BBU board.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

682
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Step 2 Insert the optical modules into the corresponding FE/GE optical ports, as shown in Figure
4-119.
NOTE

Cables.
Step 3 Stick temporary labels to the FE/GE fiber optic cables to be installed.
Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables into the optical module, as shown in Figure
4-119.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

683
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-119 Installing FE/GE fiber optic cables
Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole on
bind them.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the FE/GE fiber optic cables with engineering labels. For
----End

Scenarios
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

684
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

Context
l
In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed
in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring
of the cabinets. Table 4-26 lists the specifications of a monitoring signal cable between
two cabinets, which is installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
Table 4-26 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H
Cable
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
in the
APM30H
Remarks
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 4-120.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

685
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-120 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T

between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T.
Context
l
In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured. The second BBU does not perform
the monitoring function. For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring
Principles.
of the cabinets. Table 4-27 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between two
cabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

686

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
in the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
battery
cabinet
(between the
IBBS200T
and
APM30H)
Bare wire
Signal cable
transfer
terminal on
the front
door of the
IBBS200T
Bare wire
l Door
status
sensor in
the
APM30H
To be reused
l SMOKE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30H
l IN2 port
on the fan
assembly
in the
APM30H
l APM30H
/
PMU/"T
EM_BA
T"
Procedure
Figure 4-121.
1.
2.
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

687
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
APM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the IBBS200T and APM30H),
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the signal junction terminal on the door of the IBBS200T.
2.
The cable has four pairs of wires at the other end, which are connected as follows:
l Connect the white and blue twisted pair cable to the IN2 port on the fan assembly in the
APM30H.
l Connect the white and brown twisted pair cable to the SMOKE port on the fan assembly
in the APM30H.
l Connect the white and orange twisted pair cable to the TEM_BAT port on the PMU in
the APM30H.
l Connect the white and green twisted pair cable to the door status sensor in the APM30H.
Monitoring signal cables between the door status sensor and the GATE port on the PMU
inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the cabinets.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

688
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-122 Installing a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the
IBBS200T and APM30H)
bind the cable.
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cables
between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

689
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
in the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the
TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 4-123.
1.
2.
APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

690
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
APM30H)
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly in
the TMC11H.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the
RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

691
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
the TMC11H and RFC)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T+1 TMC11H

between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

692

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
in the
APM30H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the
TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet
Bare wire
Signal cable
transfer
terminal on
the front
door of the
IBBS200T
Bare wire
l Door
status
sensor in
the
APM30
H
To be reused
l SMOKE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H
l IN2 port
on the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H
l TEM_B
AT port
on the
PMU in
the
APM30
H
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

693
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Procedure
Figure 4-125.
1.
2.
APM30H.
APM30H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the IBBS200T and APM30H),
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the signal junction terminal on the door of the IBBS200T.
2.
The cable has four pairs of wires at the other end, which are connected as follows:
l Connect the white and blue twisted pair cable to the IN2 port on the fan assembly in the
APM30H.
l Connect the white and brown twisted pair cable to the SMOKE port on the fan assembly
in the APM30H.
l Connect the white and orange twisted pair cable to the TEM_BAT port on the PMU in
the APM30H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

694
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
l Connect the white and green twisted pair cable to the door status sensor in the APM30H.
Monitoring signal cables between the door status sensor and the GATE port on the PMU
inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the cabinets.
Figure 4-126 Installing a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly in
the TMC11H.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

695
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
the TMC11H and RFC)
bind the cable.
----End

V DC Scenarios

between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
696
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Table 4-30 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario
of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Cable
One End
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC11H)
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU in the
TMC11H
Remarks
To be
reused
Procedure
Figure 4-128.
1.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

697
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
TMC11H)
bind the cable.
----End

between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs.
Context
Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the
cabinets. Table 4-31 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets,
which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

698
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
TMC11H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
in the
TMC11H
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
RFC and
extension
TMC11H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the
extension
TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Figure 4-129.
1.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

699
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
TMC11H)
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the RFC and extension
TMC11H), as shown in Figure 4-130.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.
2.
in the extension TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

700
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
the RFC and extension TMC11H)
bind the cable.
----End

between two cabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.
Context
l
Principles.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

701
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs
Cable
One End
The Other End
Change
Type
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC11H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU in the
TMC11H
To be
reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
the RFC and
extension
TMC11H)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan
assembly in
the
extension
TMC11H
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
To be
reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
two RFCs)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the right
RFC
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the left RFC
To be
reused
Procedure
Figure 4-131.
1.
2.
TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

702
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
TMC11H)
TMC11H), as shown in Figure 4-132.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the right
RFC.
2.
in the extension TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

703
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
the RFC and extension TMC11H)
in Figure 4-133.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the left
RFC.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the
right RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

704
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
two RFCs)
bind the cable.
----End

This section describes how to install inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or single-mode base
station.
Prerequisites
l
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

705
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
(1) Rate
(2) Wavelength
Context
Cable Connections.
Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
NOTE
NOTICE
minutes.
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

706
BTS3900A
1.
2.
3.

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTE
mode.
1.
2.
1.
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

707
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTE
l When both BBUs are installed in an APM30H, install inter-BBU signal cables, as shown in Figure 4-137.
When BBU 0 and BBU 1 are installed in an APM30H and a TMC11H, respectively, install inter-BBU signal
cables, as shown in Figure 4-138.
Figure 4-137 Installing inter-BBU signal cables (1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

708
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
----End

Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

709
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTICE
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

710
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
1.
2.
(221.27 lbfin. to 309.78 lbfin.).
Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumpers according to the instructions in Attaching the Color
Ring.
feeder.
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

711
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
4.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables

CPRI electrical cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RFUs.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove dustproof bags from the connectors at both ends of the CPRI electrical cables.
NOTE

Description.
Step 3 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cables through the cable holes on the left side of the
power cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the corresponding
RFUs, as shown in Figure 4-143.
Figure 4-143 Installing CPRI electrical cables
Step 4 Connect the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables to the CPRI0 ports on the
panels of the RFUs, as shown in Figure 4-143.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

712
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
bind them.
NOTE
l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cables at the top of the DCDU-13A in the RFC or in
the base of the RFC.
l Lay out the cables according to the manners in Figure 4-143. Ensure that the cables are routed to the RFUs
----End
4.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables

CPRI fiber optic cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RRUs.
Context
l
This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The CPRI fiber optic cables are
labeled as MM.
NOTICE
within 20 minutes.
l
Station Cables.
Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing
CPRI Cables.
Procedure
1.
2.
Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP. Then insert
an optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the
RF module.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

713
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTE
3.
Step 2 Install CPRI fiber optic cables, as shown in Figure 4-145 and Figure 4-146.
1.
Stick temporary labels to the CPRI fiber optic cables to be installed.
2.
Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors on the fiber optic cables.
3.
the optical modules in the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP, and then insert the DLC connectors
labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module in the RF module.
NOTICE
l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout fiber optic
in.), respectively.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

714
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-146 Installing CPRI fiber optic cables
Step 3 Route CPRI fiber optic cables out of the cabinet from the cable hole on the left bottom. For
details about how to route the cables, see Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Replace the temporary labels on the CPRI fiber optic cables with engineering labels. For detailed
----End


Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

715
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

No.
Item
design.

No.
Item

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Item

716
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
10
11
and negative poles.
12

13

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Item
the same direction.
FE cables.

717
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No.
Item

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No
.
Cabinet
Item
APM30H or
TMC11H
the filler module.
APM30H or
TMC11H
The ELU has been installed. For detailed operations, see 4.4.4
Installing an ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are
APM30H or
TMC11H
APM30H or
TMC11H

718
BTS3900A
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

(Ver.D_A2)
No
.
Cabinet
Item
APM30H or
TMC11H
the Cabinet.
APM30H or
TMC11H
see 4.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 4.9.1 Installing a
BBU Case.
APM30H or
TMC11H
the Cabinet.
APM30H
detailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cables for the
APM30H.
APM30H
The power transfer cable for the APM30H has been installed. For
10
APM30H
The PGND cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. For
11
APM30H

12
TMC11H

Cabinet.
13
RFC
The ELU assembly has been installed. For detailed operations, see
4.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel. Ensure
that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An
incorrect or faulty ELU may cause problems in heat dissipation
or monitoring.
14
RFC

monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, ELU signal
cable, and monitoring signal cable for the fan have been installed.
Cabinet.
15
RFC
The input power cable for the RFC has been replaced. For detailed
operations, see Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to
RFCs or Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC.
16
detailed operations, see (Optional) Installing RRU Power
Cables or (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables.

719
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
No
.
Cabinet
Item
17
IBBS200T
The power cable for the storage batteries has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 4.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries and
Cables in the Battery Cabinet.

Prerequisites
l
been set to OFF.
Context
DANGER
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

720
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

Base
Station
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A
(Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,

DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box

equipment.)
BTS3900A
(Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box

EPU03A-04
EMUA, and FAN 02B.)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

721
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Base
Station
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A
(Ver.D)
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

EPU05A-04
IBBS200T
NOTE
Process
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

722
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Procedure
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

723
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
1.
2.
3.
cabinet.
4.
Cabinet
Compone
nt
APM30H
PMU

PSU

Fan
assembly

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Fan in the
front door
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
Fan or TEC
in the front
door

and off for 1s).
IBBS700D
Fan in the
front door
and
CMUEA

IBBS700T
TEC and
CMUF

5.
6.
7.

724
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

Cabinet
Compone
nt
APM30H
BBU

and off for 1s).
TMC11H
RFC
FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

Fan in the
front door
RFU

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

RRU

for 1s).

NOTE
8.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

725

(Ver.D_A2)
BTS3900A

Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to all
components in the
cabinet

the BBU
Check as follows:

units.

replace the board.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

726
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
to step 2.
component.
component.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

1.
2.
3.
and DCDU-12B.
4.
DCDU-12C.
5.
6.

727
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

Cabinet
Compone
nt
TMC11H
BBU

and off for 1s).
for 1s).
RFC
FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

Fan in the
front door
RFU

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

RRU

7.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to all
components in the
cabinet

units.

728
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

the BBU
Check as follows:
replace the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
to step 2.
component.
component.
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

729
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

and checked.

Context
Procedure
(1) Barcode label
(4) Nameplate
1.
for the cabinet.
2.
----End
4.13.2 Sealing Cable Holes

After all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable holes on the base.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

730
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Procedure
Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet, as
Figure 4-150 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet
(1) Fireproof mud
1.
2.
3.

power cables
electrical cables

equipotential cable

(6) Screw
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

731
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Step 3 Push the baffle plates on both sides of the base forwards until the baffle plates contact with the
cables, and then tighten the screws on the baffle plates, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-152 Closing baffle plates of the cable holes on both sides of the base
Step 4 Push the baffle plate on the rear of the base forwards until the baffle plate contact with the cables,
and then tighten the screw on the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-153 Closing the baffle plate of the cable hole on the rear of the base
Step 5 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

732
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
Figure 4-154 Sealing cable holes on the base
(1) Fireproof mud
Step 6 Tighten the two screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate, as shown
----End
4.13.3 Repainting
must be repaired.
Prerequisites
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

733
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)

Applied to
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Figure 4-157.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

734
BTS3900A

(Ver.D_A2)
NOTICE
minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

735
BTS3900A
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable

Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A (with
breathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).
procedures.
5.3 Unpacking Check
5.4 Restructuring the APM30
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30
to be restructured.
5.5 Restructuring the TMC
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC to
be restructured.
5.7 Restructuring the BBC
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the BBC to
be restructured.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

736
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
during the upgrade.
and checked.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

737
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

procedures.
5.1.1 Restructured Cabinets Interior

To meet requirements in different outdoor environments, Huawei provides various cabinets for
the separated macro base station such as BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1) and distributed base station
such as DBS3900 (Ver.D_A1). The cabinets include the APM30 (Ver.D_A1), TMC
(Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A), and BBC (Ver.D_A1), which provide different functions.
APM30 Interior
The following figure shows the APM30 interior.
Figure 5-1 APM30 interior
The following table describes the components in the APM30.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

738
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Table 5-1 Components in the APM30
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
N
o.
Compone
nt
Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nd
ato
ry
Ma
xim
um
Qu
anti
ty
in a
Sin
gle
Cab
inet
Description
Temperatur
e sensor
Ma
nda
tor
y
It is located on the front door of the cabinet and reports the

ambient temperature outside the cabinet.
Magnet of a
door status
sensor
Ma
nda
tor
y
The door status sensor reports the door status, whether

open or closed.
Breathable
film
Ma
nda
tor
y
It is located on the front door of the cabinet and used for

heat exchanging and dissipation.
Filler panel
Ma
nda
tor
y
It replaces the APM Power Monitor unit Interface Board

(APMI) and is used as an air damper.
Fan
assembly
on the top of
the cabinet
interior
Ma
nda
tor
y
The fan assembly on the top of the cabinet interior consists

of the support, fan interface board, and fan. The support is
newly developed. The fan interface board and fan are
reused.
CMUEA
assembly
Ma
nda
tor
y
The Central Monitoring Unit type EA (CMUEA) assembly

consists of the support, CMUEA, and electronic label unit
(ELU).
EPU
Ma
nda
tor
y
The EPU converts AC power to DC power and feeds the

DC power into the devices in the cabinet. The EPU consists
of the EPU subrack, PMU, and PSUs.
BBU
Ma
nda
tor
y
The BBU is installed in the 2 U space below the EPU,

processing baseband signals.

739
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
N
o.
Compone
nt
Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nd
ato
ry
Ma
xim
um
Qu
anti
ty
in a
Sin
gle
Cab
inet
Description
SLPU
Ma
nda
tor
y
l To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal

lightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and
installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is
configured with the universal E1/T1 lightning
protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning
protection unit (UFLP).
is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the
BBU. It is configured with two universal signal
lightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.
10
GATM
Opt
ion
al

reports the RET control alarm signals.
11
EMUA
Opt
ion
al

below the BBU.
12
AC heater
Opt
ion
al

U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater
and an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1
U space above the SOU.
13
SOU
Opt
ion
al
The SOU can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of

the cabinet, transferring AC power supply to the customer
equipment.
TMC Interior
There are two types of TMC:
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
One type of TMC houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration A in the
following figure.

740
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
The other type of TMC houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as
shown in illustration B in the following figure.
Figure 5-2 TMC interior
The following table describes the components in the TMC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

741
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Table 5-2 Components in the TMC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
N
o.
Compone
nt
Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nd
ato
ry
Ma
xim
um
Qu
anti
ty
in a
Sin
gle
Cab
inet
Description
Temperatur
e sensor
Ma
nda
tor
y
It is located on the front door of the cabinet and reports the

ambient temperature outside the cabinet.
Magnet of a
door status
sensor
Ma
nda
tor
y
The door status sensor reports the door status, whether

open or closed.
Breathable
film
Ma
nda
tor
y
It is located on the front door of the cabinet and used for

heat exchanging and dissipation.
Filler panel
Ma
nda
tor
y
It is used as an air damper when replacing the APM Power

Monitor unit Interface Board (APMI).
Fan
assembly
on the top of
the cabinet
interior
Ma
nda
tor
y
The fan assembly on the top of the cabinet interior consists

of the support, fan interface board, and fan. The support is
newly developed. The fan interface board and fan are
reused.
CMUEA
assembly
Ma
nda
tor
y
The Central Monitoring Unit type EA (CMUEA) assembly

consists of the support, CMUEA, and electronic label unit
(ELU).
DCDU
Ma
nda
tor
y
The direct current distribution unit (DCDU), such as the

DCDU-12B and DCDU-12C, is 1 U high and provides ten
DC power outputs for components in the TMC.
BBU
Ma
nda
tor
y
It is a baseband processing unit.

742
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
N
o.
Compone
nt
Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nd
ato
ry
Ma
xim
um
Qu
anti
ty
in a
Sin
gle
Cab
inet
Description
SLPU
Ma
nda
tor
y
l To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal

lightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and
installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is
configured with the universal E1/T1 lightning
protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning
protection unit (UFLP).
is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the
BBU. It is configured with two universal signal
lightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.
10
GATM
Opt
ion
al

reports the RET control signal alarms.
11
EMUA
Opt
ion
al

below the BBU.
12
AC heater
Opt
ion
al

U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater
and an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1
U space above the SOU.
RFC Interior
The Radio Frequency Cabinet (RFC) is used by the BTS3900A and provides installation space
for RFUs.
The following figure shows the RFC interior.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

743
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-3 RFC interior
The following table describes the components in the RFC.

Table 5-3 Components in the RFC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional
or
Mandato
ry
Maximum Description
Quantity
in a Single
Cabinet
CMUEA
assembly
Mandator
y
The Central Monitoring Unit type EA

(CMUEA) assembly consists of the support
and CMUEA.
DCDU-13
A
Mandator
y
The DCDU-13A is a direct current

distribution unit. It provides four 30 A and
-48 V DC power outputs.
ELU
assembly
Mandator
y
The ELU assembly consists of a support

and an electronic label unit (ELU). The
ELU automatically reports the cabinet type.
Fan
assembly
Mandator
y
A fan assembly dissipates heat from the

cabinet. It contains two standalone fans.
RFUs
Mandator
y
Radio frequency units (RFUs) are used in

macro base stations. They perform
modulation and demodulation of baseband
signals and RF signals, data processing,
power amplifying, and VSWR test.

744
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BBC Interior
The following figure shows the BBC interior.
Figure 5-4 BBC interior
The following table describes the components in the BBC.

Table 5-4 Components in the BBC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Module/
Board
Optiona
l or
Mandat
ory
Maximu
m
Quantity
in a
Single
Cabinet
Description
Junction
terminal for
the input
power cable
of the heating
film
Mandator
y
The junction terminal provides the input

power port for the heating film
Storage
battery
Mandator
y
The storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station.

745

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
No.
Module/
Board
Optiona
l or
Mandat
ory
Maximu
m
Quantity
in a
Single
Cabinet
Description
Negative
power input
terminal for
the storage
battery group
Mandator
y
It feeds power into the battery cabinet.
Positive
power input
terminal for
the storage
battery group
(positive
wiring
terminal for
storage
batteries)
Mandator
y
It feeds power into the battery cabinet.
Circuit
breaker for the
storage
batteries
Mandator
y
It controls whether to connect the

external power supply to the storage
batteries.
Negative
wiring
terminal for
storage
batteries
Mandator
y
5.1.2 Restructuring Process

This section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade from BTS3900A
(with breathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).

with AC power.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

746
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

with DC power.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

747
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)


l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
before the upgrade.
748
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

upgrade.
Product Name
SingleRAN7.0 series
SingleRAN6.0 series
5.2.3 Document Preparations

l
documents:
BTS3900A GSM Hardware Description (with Breathable Film)
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description
BTS3900A&DBS3900 Post-Upgrade Hardware Description
BTS3900A GSM Site Maintenance Guide (with Breathable Film)
Safety Precautions


Marker

M6)
Diagonal pliers

M6)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

749

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
32 mm (1.26 in.)
combination wrench
Socket wrench
Torque wrench
RJ45 crimping tool
Cable cutter
Rubber mallet
Soldering iron
Wire stripper
Hammer drill (16)
Heat gun
Level
Multimeter
Measuring tape
Vacuum cleaner
ESD wrist strap
ESD gloves
Torque screwdriver
Gloves

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

750
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
5.3 Unpacking Check

Context
NOTE
l
NOTICE
Procedure
If...
Then...

list
Go to Step 2.

packing list


If...
Then...
Go to Step 3.
soaked
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

751
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
If...
Then...

If...
Then...
CAUTION
photos.
----End
5.4 Restructuring the APM30

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30
to be restructured.

APM30
during the restructuring of the APM30.
Component Changes in the APM30

The following figure shows component changes in the APM30.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

752
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-7 Components in the APM30
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Front door
To be
replace
d

APMI
To be
remove
d
PMU
To be
replace
d
Fan
assembly
To be
replace
d

PSU (AC/
DC)
To be
replace
d

AFMU
To be
replace
d
The AFMU needs to be replaced with a CMUEA

assembly, which contains an ELU. The ELU reports the
cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Door status
sensor
To be
reused

753
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Power
subrack
(AC/DC)
To be
replace
d
The power subrack (AC/DC) needs to be replaced with

an EPU 05 to meet the power requirement of a large
configuration.
PDU
To be
replace
d
10
BBU3900
To be
reused
11
GATM
To be
remove
d
12
EMUA
To be
reused
The environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA)

monitors the environment in a cabinet and processes
alarms. The EMUA must be configured when more than
16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. It is installed in the
1 U space below the BBU.
13
Filler panel
To be
replace
d
SLPU
Added
An SLPU can be added according to customer

requirements.
Cable Changes in the APM30

Figure 5-8 lists the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the APM30.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

754
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-8 Equipotential cable and power cables in the APM30
No.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installatio
n Position
Chang
e Type
P0
PGND
cable for
the front
door
OT
terminal
Ground
point on
the inner
wall of the
APM30
OT
terminal
Front door
of the
APM30
To be
remove
d
P1
GATM
power
cable
OT
terminal
LOAD0
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30
OT
terminal
-48V
terminal on
the GATM
To be
remove
d
P2
GATM
power
cable
OT
terminal
LOAD1
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30
OT
terminal
-48V
terminal on
the GATM
To be
remove
d

755
BTS3900A
No.
Cable

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
One End
The Other End
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installatio
n Position
Chang
e Type
P3
EMUA
power
cable
OT
terminal
LOAD3
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30
Cord end
terminal
PWR1
terminal on
the EMUA
To be
reused
P4
AFMU
power
cable
OT
terminal
LOAD4
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30
3V3
connector
PWR port
on the
HEUA
To be
remove
d
P5
BBU
power
cable
OT
terminal
LOAD5
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30
3V3
connector
-48V port
on the BBU
To be
replace
d
P6
Power
cable with
the transfer
terminal
Bare wire
Transfer
terminal
OT
terminal
AC
OUTPUT
terminal on
the EPU
To be
reused
P7
Power
cable for
an AC
heater
Bare wire
AC
OUTPUT
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30
Bare wire
AC heater
To be
reused
The following figure shows the signal cable changes in the APM30.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

756
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-9 Signal cable changes in the APM30
No.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Change
Type
S0
Environmen
t monitoring
signal cable
for the
power
cabinet
DB50 male
connector
J1 port on
DB50 male
the APMI in connector
the APM30
COM port
on the PMU
in the
APM30
To be
removed
S1
APMIPMU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
RS232/
RS422 port
on the PMU
RJ45
connector
RS422 port
on the APMI
in the
APM30
To be
removed
S2
APMIGATM1
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM IN
port on the
HEUA
RJ45
connector
COM OUT
port on the
GATM in
the fan
assembly of
the APM30
To be
removed

757

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
No.
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Change
Type
S3
GATM1BBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM IN
port on the
GATM1
RJ45
connector
MON1 port To be
on the
removed
UPEU in the
BBU
S4
GATM0BBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM IN
port on the
GATM0
RJ45
connector
MON0 port To be
on the
removed
UPEU in the
BBU
S5
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status
sensor
2-pin
connector
TX+, TX-,
Bare wire
RX+, and
RX- on the
APMI in the
APM30
Door status
sensor
To be
reused
S6
AFMU
monitoring
signal cable
DB15
connector
J3 port on
DB15
the APMI in connector
the APM30
ALM port
on the
AFMU in
the APM30
To be
removed
S7
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
DB9 male
connector
RS485 port
on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
RS232/
RS422 port
on the PMU
To be
reused
S8
GPS clock
signal cable
Type N
female
connector
GPS surge
protector
SMA male
connector
GPS port on
the USCU in
the BBU
To be
reused
S9
GPS jumper
N50 straight
male
connector
GPS surge
protector
N50 straight
male
connector
GPS
antenna
To be
reused

Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

758
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTICE
Figure 5-10.
Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor.
1.
Set the circuit breaker on the PDU panel controlling the AFMU to OFF.
l When the APM30 is applied to a distributed base station, SW2 is the circuit breaker for
controlling the AFMU.
l When the APM30 is applied to a separated base station, SW4 is the circuit breaker for
2.
Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 5-11 Removing the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

759
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove two hinges on the cabinet door and then remove the cabinet
door, as shown in the following figure.

NOTE
One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.
1.
Install the new front door, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two hinges to 1.4
Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
2.
l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Illustration 1 in the following
figure shows the position of the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of the
cabinet.
the corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Illustration 2 in the following
figure shows the position of the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

760
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
cabinet
cabinet
----End

Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

761
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTE
to the fans.
to the fans.
Step 3 Remove the screws on the filler panel in the 1 U space below the fan assembly, and remove the
filler panel, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-14 Removing the filler panel

1.
Label the cable between the fan assembly and the fan transfer board, and remove the cable.
This cable needs to be reused. Attach temporary labels at one end of all cables before
removing them for recording cable connections.
2.
Loosen the two captive screws on the tray holding the fan assembly, and use the handle on
the tray to pull the tray out of the cabinet.
CAUTION
When removing the fan assembly, do not touch any rotating fan to avoid injury of your
hands.
Step 6 Installing a new fan assembly, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten the two screws on the
fan assembly to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).
2.
Reinstall the new filler panel delivered with the new fan assembly on the 1 U space below
the fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the filler panel.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

762
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
----End
5.4.4 Removing the APMI

This section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the APMI and installing the
filler panel.
Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Remove all cables from the APMI panel.
Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the APMI, and remove the APMI.
Step 4 Place the removed APMI in an ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Insert the filler panel in position, and secure the two captive screws on the filler panel to 0.6 Nm
(5.31 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

763
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
The following figure shows how to replace the APMI with a filler panel.
Figure 5-16 Replacing the APMI
----End
5.4.5 Replacing the AFMU

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the AFMU with a CMUEA
assembly.
Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Remove all cables from the AFMU panel.
Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on both sides of the AFMU, and remove the
AFMU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

764
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 4 Place the removed AFMU into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Take out the ELU and install it in the CMUEA assembly, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-17 Installing the ELU
Step 6 Pre-install cables on the CMUEA assembly.

1.
Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU, as shown by a in
2.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly of the APM30 to the
IFAN1 and IFAN2 ports at the rear of the CMUEA assembly, as shown by b in the following
figure.
Figure 5-18 Pre-installing cables on the CMUEA assembly
Step 7 Align the CMUEA assembly with the positioning column at the rear part of the installation
position, and gently push the CMUEA assembly into position. Then, tighten the two captive
screws on the CMUEA assembly to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).
The following figure shows how to replace the AFMU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

765
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-19 Replacing the AFMU
----End

Prerequisites
Context
l
The following figure shows the power systems before and after the upgrade. A shows the
exterior of the power subrack without the cover before the upgrade. B shows the exterior
of the power subrack after the upgrade.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

766

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
Figure 5-20 Power systems before and after the upgrade
(1) PMU
(2) PSU
(3) PDU
(4) Power subrack
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Instruct the element management system (EMS) administrator to block all the carriers of this
base station.
Step 3 Power off the base station.
1.
Set the Bat circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.
2.
Shut off the external power for the APM30H.
Step 4 Remove all cables from the power system.

1.
Remove all monitoring signal cables from the PMU.
2.
Remove power cables for storage batteries from the BAT(+) and BAT(-) terminals on the
wiring unit of the power subrack.
3.
Remove all cables from the PDU panel. The cables include the PGND cable, AC input
power cables, AC and DC output power cables, and AC and DC surge protection signal
cables.
Step 5 Remove the power system.

1.
Use a flat-head screwdriver to loosen the screws on the ejector lever of the PMU or PSU
panel.
2.
Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU or PSU out of the subrack and remove the PMU
or PSU from the subrack, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

767
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-21 Removing the PMU or PSU
3.
Remove the screws on both sides of the power subrack (AC/DC), and gently pull the power
subrack (AC/DC) out of the cabinet.
4.
Remove the screws on both sides of the PDU, and gently pull the PDU out of the cabinet.
5.
Place the removed AC or DC power subrack, PMU, PSUs, and PDU into the ESD box or
bag.
Step 6 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left side of the
cabinet
NOTE
If the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC (35.6oF to
37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperature alarms.
1.
Remove the guide rails in the positions shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-22 Removing the guide rails
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Remove the guide rail on the left side of the position where the power subrack is originally
installed, as shown by a in the following figure. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve the
screws.
768
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
3.
contacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in the following figure.
4.
Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 6.2 to secure the guide rails attached with
windproof cotton padding, and tighten the screws to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.), as shown by c
Figure 5-23 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner
left side of the cabinet
5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Remove the first and second M6 screws on the upper left side of the cabinet, and then use
them to secure the windproof cotton padding in the original place, and tighten the screws

769
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-24 Installing windproof cotton padding on the upper left side of the cabinet
Step 7 Install the windproof cotton padding on the inner back side of the cabinet.
1.
2.
Place the windproof cotton padding on the surface of the rail and push it towards the back
of the cabinet, and completely strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof
cotton padding on back of the cabinet. These operation is shown by b in the following
figure.
Figure 5-25 Installing windproof cotton padding at the back side of the cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

770
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1.
2.
cabinet. These operations are shown by b and c in the following figure.
Step 9 Install the mounting part attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the
cabinet.
NOTE
If the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC (35.6oF to
37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperature alarms.
1.
2.
screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.), as shown in the following
figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

771
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 10 Install the new power system.

1.
Add six floating nuts to the mounting bars for securing the power system. The following
figure shows the positions.
Figure 5-28 Installing floating nuts
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Place the new power system in the installation position and gently push it into the cabinet
along the guide rails. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven M6x12 panel screws to
2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.).

772
BTS3900A
3.

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Use M6x12 screws to secure the PGND cable for the new power system to the ground bar.
The recommended torque is 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
----End

Context
l
the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.
Remove the GATM.
Procedure
1.
Remove the connector on the power cable for the GATM from the LOAD0 terminal
on the PDU to power off the GATM.
2.
3.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the PGND cable for the GATM. Then use a
wrench to remove the RF jumper from the GATM.
4.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, and remove
the GATM. Reinstall the removed screws on their original positions on the mounting
bar, as shown in the following figure.
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

773
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1.
Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable, and PGND cable from the
Bias-Tee.
2.
----End
5.4.8 Installing the Filler Module and Filler Panel

In the APM30 and TMC, the filler module must be installed in the vacant customer space,
preventing the heat reflux in the empty space.
Prerequisites
Procedure
l
Install the filler module.

1.
Install the filler module in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to the
secure the filler module to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Install the filler panel.

1.
Install the filler panel in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to the
secure the filler panel to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-31 Installing the filler panel
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30 after
restructuring the APM30.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

774
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Prerequisites
Context
Cable
One End
The Other End
Descriptio
n
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEA
power cable
EPC6
connector
PWR port on
the CMUEA
3V3
connector
LOAD2 port
on the EPU
A cable is
newly
delivered.
EMUA
power cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD5 port
on the EPU
Cord end
terminal
PWR1
terminal on
the EMUA
To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.
BBU power
cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD0 or
LOAD1 port
on the EPU
3V3
connector
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU
A cable is
newly
delivered.
The following table describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.
Cable
Monitoring
signal cable
for the fan
assembly
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
4-pin
connector
IFAN1 and
IFAN2 ports
on the
transfer
board for the
fan assembly
4-pin
connector
CMUEA

Descriptio
n
To be reused
775
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
One End
The Other End
Descriptio
n
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable for the
fan in the
front door
4-pin
connector
Transfer
terminal on
the front door
of the
APM30
4-pin
connector
FAN_EXT0
and
FAN_EXT1
ports on the
CMUEA
The cable is
newly
delivered.
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
in the
APM30
2-pin
connector
GATE port
on the PMU
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
To be reused
CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
RJ45
connector
MON1 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
The cable is
newly
delivered.
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the CMUEA
The cable is
newly
delivered.
PMUCMUEA
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
PMU
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA
The cable is
newly
delivered.
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
DB9 male
connector
RS485 port
on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
PMU
To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor near
the front
door
5-pin
connector
Temperature
sensor near
the left inner
wall and the
front door
4-pin
connector
TEM port on
the CMUEA
To be reused

776

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
Cable
One End
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor near
the air
exhaust vent
The Other End
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
5-pin
connector
Temperature
sensor near
the air
exhaust vent
that is at the
top right side
of the cabinet
4-pin
connector
TEMP2 port
on the
CMUEA
Descriptio
n
To be reused
Procedure
l

You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30. Skip this step if you have removed
these cables when replacing related modules.
Install power cables in the APM30.

1.
2.
3.
Install the power cable for the 8-pin transfer terminal, as shown by P0 in Figure
5-32.
a.
Connect one end of the cable to the AC OUTPUT port on the EPU.
b.
No operation is required for the other end of the cable because it has already been
connected to the 8-pin transfer terminal.

a.
b.
to the LOAD2 port on the EPU.
c.
on the CMUEA, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws on the 3V3
connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).

a.
b.
Add the removed EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable. For
detailed operations, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE
c.
4.
Optional: Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P3 in Figure 5-32.

a.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port
on the UPEU in the BBU, and connect the EPC4 connector at the other end to
the LOAD0 port on the panel of the EPU.
777
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
b.
Add a connector to each end of the power cable and you can use the EPC4
connector removed in 4.1. For detailed operations, see Assembling the Cord End
Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the
Power Cable.
c.
on the EPU.
d.
port on the EMUA.
Figure 5-32 Installing power cables in the APM30
5.
ties to bind them.
6.
Install signal cables in the APM30.

1.
2.
5-33.
a.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to the
GATE port on the PMU.
b.

a.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU.
778
BTS3900A
b.
3.

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Connect the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU port on the fan
assembly.
Figure 5-32.
NOTICE
Bind the interconnected monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front door
to the cable bridge on the front door to prevent the cabinet door from extruding the
interconnection terminal.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
a.
Connect one end of the cable to the transfer terminal on the monitoring signal
cable that comes out of the front door.
b.
Connect the other end of the cable to the FAN_EXT0 and FAN_EXT1 ports on
the CMUEA.
S4 in Figure 5-32.
a.
Connect one end of the cable to the IFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the CMUEA.
b.
Connect the other end of the cable to the transfer board in the fan assembly.

a.
Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN
port on the CMUEA.
b.
Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1

a.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signal
cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA.
b.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoring
signal cable to the COM_IN port on the PMU.

5-33.
a.
Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the EMUA monitoring signal
cable to the RS485 port on the EMUA.
b.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the EMUA monitoring signal
cable to the COM_OUT port on the PMU.
Figure 5-33.
a.
Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5pin straight socket of the temperature sensor on the left side of the cabinet.
b.
the TEM port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly.
Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent,
as shown by S9 in Figure 5-33.
779
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
a.
Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5pin straight socket of the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent that is on
the right side of the fan assembly.
b.
the TEMP2 port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly.
Figure 5-33 Installing signal cables in the APM30
10. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind them.
11. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End
5.5 Restructuring the TMC

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC to
be restructured.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

780
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
5.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC

This section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the TMC.
Component Changes in the TMC

There are three types of TMCs:
l
When a TMC serves as a transmission cabinet, it only provides space for the transmission
equipment and a DCDU-03A is installed in it. Illustration A in the following figure shows
this type of TMC.
When a TMC serves as the power cabinet of the DBS3900, the TMC is supplied with -48
V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-03B are installed in it. Illustration B in the
following figure shows this type of TMC.
When a TMC serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, the TMC is supplied with -48
V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-06A are installed in it. Illustration C in the
following figure shows this type of TMC.
Figure 5-34 Components in the TMC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

781

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Front door
To be
replace
d

dissipation capacity.
Fan
assembly
To be
replace
d

DCDU
To be
replace
d
l When the TMC serves as a transmission cabinet, the

DCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12C.
l When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of the
DBS3900, the DCDU needs to be replaced with a
DCDU-12B.
l When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of the
BTS3900A, the DCDU needs to be replaced with a
DCDU-12C.
Door status
sensor
To be
reused
BBU3900
To be
reused
GATM
To be
remove
d
EMUA
To be
reused
AC heater
To be
reused
Cable Changes in the TMC

Cable connections in TMCs vary according to the configurations of TMCs. The following figure
shows the cable changes in the TMC serving as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

782
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-35 Equipotential cable and power cables in the TMC
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
P0
Equipoten
tial cable
for
grounding
of the
front door
OT
terminal
Ground
point on
the front
door
OT
terminal
Ground
point in the
inner
lower left
side of the
cabinet
To be
removed
P1
AFMU
power
cable
To be
removed
P2
BBU
power
cable
OT
terminal
l BBU
termina
l on the
DCDU
-06A
3V3
connector
-48V port
on the
UPEU in
the BBU
To be
replaced
l LOAD
6
termina
l on the
DCDU
-03A
l LOAD
6
termina
l on the
DCDU
-03B
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

783
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
P3
EMUA
power
cable
OT
terminal
l SPAR
E3
termina
l on the
DCDU
-06A
Cord end
terminal
PWR1
terminal
on the
EMUA
To be
reused
OT
terminal
-48V port
on the
GATM
To be
replaced
l LOAD
7
termina
l on the
DCDU
-03A
l LOAD
7
termina
l on the
DCDU
-03B
P4
GATM
power
cable
OT
terminal
Load0 port
on the
PDU in the
TMC
Figure 5-36 shows the signal cable changes in the TMC that houses the BBU3900 and is supplied
with -48 V DC power.
Figure 5-36 Signal cable changes in the TMC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

784

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
S1
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the fan in
the front
door
4-pin
connector
Transfer
box on the
inner left
wall near
the front
door of the
TMC
4-pin
connector
FAN_EX
T port on
the
CMUA
To be
replaced
S2
AFMU
monitorin
g signal
cable
To be
removed
S3
EMUA
monitorin
g signal
cable
DB9 male
connector
RS-485
port on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
COM_OU
T port on
the
CMUA
To be
reused
S4
GPS clock
signal
cable
SMA male
connector
GPS port
on the
USCU in
the BBU
Type N
female
connector
GPS surge
protector
To be
reused
S5
GPS
jumper
N50
straight
male
connector
GPS surge
protector
N50
straight
male
connector
GPS
antenna
To be
reused
S6
GATMBBU
monitorin
g signal
cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
GATM in
the TMC
RJ45
connector
COM_OU
T port on
the BBU
in the
TMC
To be
removed

Prerequisites
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

785
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Context
The TMC and APM30s have the same front door. This section describes the procedure for
replacing the cabinet door, using the APM30 as an example.
Procedure
NOTICE
Figure 5-37.
Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor.
1.
Set the circuit breaker on the PDU panel controlling the AFMU to OFF.
l When the APM30 is applied to a distributed base station, SW2 is the circuit breaker for
l When the APM30 is applied to a separated base station, SW4 is the circuit breaker for
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown in the following
figure.

786
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-38 Removing the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor
Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove two hinges on the cabinet door and then remove the cabinet
door, as shown in the following figure.

NOTE
One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.
1.
Install the new front door, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two hinges to 1.4
Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

787
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Illustration 1 in the following
figure shows the position of the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of the
cabinet.
the corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Illustration 2 in the following
figure shows the position of the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.
cabinet
cabinet
----End

Prerequisites
Context
This section describes the procedure for replacing the fan assembly in an APM30 as an example.
The fan assembly used in a TMC is the same as that used in an APM30.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

788
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 3 Remove the screws on the filler panel in the 1 U space below the fan assembly, and remove the
filler panel, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-41 Removing the filler panel

1.
Label the cable between the fan assembly and the fan transfer board, and remove the cable.
This cable needs to be reused. Attach temporary labels at one end of all cables before
removing them for recording cable connections.
2.
Loosen the two captive screws on the tray holding the fan assembly, and use the handle on
the tray to pull the tray out of the cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

789
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
CAUTION
When removing the fan assembly, do not touch any rotating fan to avoid injury of your
hands.
Step 6 Installing a new fan assembly, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten the two screws on the
fan assembly to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).
2.
Reinstall the new filler panel delivered with the new fan assembly on the 1 U space below
the fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the filler panel.
----End
5.5.4 Removing the APMI

This section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the APMI and installing the
filler panel.
Prerequisites
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

790
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Context
This section describes the procedure for removing the APMI in an APM30 as an example. The
APMI used in a TMC is the same as that used in an APM30.
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Remove all cables from the APMI panel.
Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the APMI, and remove the APMI.
Step 4 Place the removed APMI in an ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Gently push the filler panel in position, and secure the two screws on the filler panel to 2 Nm
(17.70 lbfin.).
The following figure shows how to replace the APMI with a filler panel.
Figure 5-43 Replacing the APMI
----End
5.5.5 Replacing the AFMU

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the AFMU with a CMUEA
assembly.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

791
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Prerequisites
Context
This section describes the procedure for replacing the AFMU in an APM30 as an example. The
AFMU used in a TMC is the same as that used in an APM30.
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Remove all cables from the AFMU panel.
Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on both sides of the AFMU, and remove the
AFMU.
Step 4 Place the removed AFMU into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Take out the ELU and install it in the CMUEA assembly, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-44 Installing the ELU
Step 6 Pre-install cables on the CMUEA assembly.

1.
Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU, as shown by a in
2.
Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly of the APM30 to the
IFAN1 and IFAN2 ports at the rear of the CMUEA assembly, as shown by b in the following
figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

792
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-45 Pre-installing cables on the CMUEA assembly
Step 7 Align the CMUEA assembly with the positioning column at the rear part of the installation
position, and gently push the CMUEA assembly into position. Then, tighten the two captive
screws on the CMUEA assembly to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).
The following figure shows how to replace the AFMU.
Figure 5-46 Replacing the AFMU
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

793
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-03A, DCDU-03B,
or DCDU-06A.
Prerequisites
Context
TMCs can be configured with different models of DCDUs, which include the DCDU-03A,
DCDU-03B, and DCDU-06A. The DCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12B or
DCDU-12C during the upgrade.
l
When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, replace the DCDU with a
DCDU-12C.
When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of the DBS3900, replace the DCDU with a
DCDU-12B.
When the TMC serves as a transmission cabinet of the BTS3900A or DBS3900, replace
the DCDU with a DCDU-12C.
This section describes the procedure for replacing the DCDU-03B with a DCDU-12B. Other
models of DCDUs are removed and installed in the same way.
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Shut off the external power supply to the power off the DCDU-03B.
NOTE
l If a DCDU-03A is configured, you can turn the SW6 circuit breaker on the PDU in the APM30 to OFF to
power off the DCDU-03A.
l If a DCDU-06A configured, shut off the external power supply to power off the DCDU-06A.
Step 3 Remove the DCDU-03B, as shown in the following figure.

1.
Remove all connectors from the DCDU-03B panel.
2.
block from the DCDU-03B, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

794
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
3.
Remove the input power cables and equipotential cable for the DCDU-03B from the
terminals.
4.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-03B,
and gently pull the DCDU-03B out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Figure 5-47 Removing the DCDU-03B
Step 4 Place the DCDU-03B and protective cover into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install the DCDU-12C.
1.
Hold the DCDU-12C with both hands and slide the DCDU-12C into the cabinet until the
mounting ears on the DCDU-12C contact the columns.
2.
Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12C to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

795
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
----End
5.5.7 Installing the Filler Module and Filler Panel

In the APM30 and TMC, the filler module must be installed in the vacant customer space,
preventing the heat reflux in the empty space.
Prerequisites
Procedure
l
Install the filler module.

1.
Install the filler module in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to the
secure the filler module to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Install the filler panel.

1.
Install the filler panel in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to the
secure the filler panel to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-49 Installing the filler panel
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC after
restructuring the TMC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

796
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Prerequisites
Context
Cable
One End
The Other End
Descriptio
n
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEA
power cable
EPC4
connector
PWR port on
the CMUEA
3V3
connector
LOAD9 port
on the
DCDU-12C
A cable is
newly
delivered.
BBU power
cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD6 or
LOAD7 port
on the
DCDU-12C
in the TMC
3V3
connector
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU of
the TMC
The cable is
newly
delivered.
EMUA
power cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD8 port
on the
DCDU-12C
Cord end
terminal
PWR1
terminal on
the EMUA
To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.

Cable
Monitoring
signal cable
for the fan
assembly
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
4-pin
connector
IFAN1 and
IFAN2 ports
on the
transfer
board for the
fan assembly
4-pin
connector
4-pin
connector
that comes
out of the
CMUEA

Descriptio
n
To be reused
797

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
One End
The Other End
Descriptio
n
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable for the
fan in the
front door
4-pin
connector
Transfer
terminal on
the front
door of the
TMC
4-pin
connector
EFAN1 and
EFAN2 ports
on the
CMUEA
The cable is
newly
delivered.
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
Bare wire
GATE port
on the fan
assembly
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
To be reused
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the CMUEA
The cable is
newly
delivered.
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the fan
assembly
The cable is
newly
delivered.
EMUA
monitoring
signal cable
DB9 male
connector
RS485 port
on the
EMUA
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
fan assembly
To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor near
the front
door
5-pin
connector
Temperature
sensor near
the left inner
wall and the
front door
4-pin
connector
TEMP1 port
on the
CMUEA
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor near
the air
exhaust vent
5-pin
connector
Temperature
sensor near
the air
exhaust vent
that is at the
top right side
of the cabinet
4-pin
connector
TEMP2 port
on the
CMUEA
To be reused

798
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Procedure
l

You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC. Skip this step if you have removed
these cables when replacing related modules.
Install power cables in the TMC.

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

a.
to the LOAD9 port on the DCDU-12C.
b.
on the CMUEA, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws on the 3V3
connector to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).
Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 5-50. If no BBU
is installed in this cabinet, skip this step.
a.
b.
Connect the EPC4connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 or
c.
Connect the 3V3 power connector at the other end of the power cable to the -48V
Optional: Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P3 in Figure 5-50.

a.
Replace the OT terminal at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4
b.
on the DCDU-12C.
c.
port on the EMUA.

799
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-50 Installing power cables in the TMC
4.
ties to bind them.
5.
Install signal cables in the TMC.

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
5-51.
a.
the jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.
b.
CMUEA.

Figure 5-51. If no BBU is installed in this cabinet, skip this step.
a.
b.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable to
Figure 5-50.
a.
Connect one end of the cable to the transfer terminal on the monitoring signal
cable that comes out of the front door.
b.
Connect the other end of the cable to the EFAN1 and EFAN2 ports on the
CMUEA.
800
BTS3900A
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly in the TMC, as shown by S4
in Figure 5-50.
a.
Connect the other end of the cable to the IFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the transfer
board in the fan assembly.
b.
Connect the other end of the cable to the 4-pin terminal that comes out of the
CMUEA.

a.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the port on the top
of the ELU.
b.

5-51.
a.
Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the signal cable to the RS485 port
on the EMUA.
b.
Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the COM_OUT
port on the CMUEA.
Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent,
as shown by S7 in Figure 5-51.
a.
Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5pin straight socket of the temperature sensor on the left side of the cabinet.
b.
Figure 5-51.
a.
Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5pin straight socket of the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent that is on
the right side of the fan assembly.
b.

801
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-51 Installing signal cables in the TMC
9.
ties to bind them.
10. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End



Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

802

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
FMUA
To be
replace
d
The FMUA needs to be replaced with a CMUEA

assembly.
DCDU-02
To be
replace
d
The DCDU-02 needs to be replaced with a DCDU-13A

to enhance the power distribution capacity.
Filler panel
To be
replace
d
The filler panel needs to be replaced with an ELU

assembly. The ELU reports the cabinet type
automatically. It needs to be added to facilitate
troubleshooting.
Door status
sensor
To be
reused
Fan
To be
reused
Temperatu
re sensor
To be
reused

803
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
P1 to P6
RFU
power
cables
Parallel
terminal
RFU0
terminal
on the
DCDU-02
To be
replaced
P7
FMUA
power
cable
Parallel
terminal
FMUA
terminal
on the
DCDU-02
3V3
connector
PWR port
on the
FMUA
To be
replaced
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

804
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
S1
DCDUFMUA
monitorin
g signal
cable
Cord end
terminal
TEM_HU
M
ARREST
ER
RJ45
connector
SPD ALM
port on the
DCDU-02
To be
replaced
S2 and S3
FMUAFAN
monitorin
g signal
cable
4-pin
connector
FAN port
on the
FMUA
FAN unit
To be
replaced
S4
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the door
status
sensor
2-pin
connector
GATE
port on the
CMUA
Bare wire
Door
status
sensor
To be
reused

805
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
No.
Cable
Connecto
r at One
End
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r at the
Other
End
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
S5
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the
temperatur
e sensor in
the RFC
4-pin
connector
TEM port
on the fan
assembly
in the RFC
Temperatu
re sensor
Air intake
vent at the
bottom of
the RFC
To be
replaced

Prerequisites
l
a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.
The FMUA is removed, and the fan assembly stops working.
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fan assembly,
and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shown in the following
figure.
Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten
the four screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown in the following
figure. The recommended torque is 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

806
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-55 Replacing the fan assembly in the RFC
----End
5.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the FMUA assembly and
filler panel.
Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Turn the FMUA circuit breaker on the left of the DCDU-02 panel to OFF.
Step 3 Record the cable connections on the FMUA panel, and remove all cables.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

807
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the FMUA, and gently
pull the FMUA out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, and
remove the filler panel.
Step 6 Place the removed FMUA assembly and filler panel into ESD boxes or bags.
Step 7 Place the CMUEA assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use
a torque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 5-56 Installing the CMUEA assembly
Step 8 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, and gently
pull the filler panel out of the cabinet.
Step 9 Place the ELU assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use a
torque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the
following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

808
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-57 Installing the ELU assembly
----End
5.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-02 with a
DCDU-13A.
Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Instruct the M2000/U2000 administrator to block all the carriers of this base station.
Step 3 Turn all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU-02 to OFF to power off the fan assembly and
RFUs.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

809
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 4 Power off the DCDU-02.

l In AC scenarios, turn the SW8 and SW9 circuit breakers on the PDU in the APM30H to
OFF.
l In DC scenarios, shut off the external power supply.
Step 5 Remove the two DCDU-02 units on the left and right, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Record the position of connectors on the DCDU-02, and remove the connectors.
2.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminals
on the DCDU-02.
3.
Remove the input power cables and PGND cable from the DCDU-02.
4.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-02, and
gently pull the DCDU-02 out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
Figure 5-58 Removing the DCDU-02 units
Step 6 Place the removed DCDU-02 units and protective covers in ESD boxes or bags.
Step 7 Place the DCDU-13A in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use a torque
screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the following
figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

810
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
----End
5.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFU

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or ESD
gloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.
Context
l
V2, MRFU V2a, and WRFU.
V2, MRFU V2a WRFU, and LRFU.
V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU.
If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) or WRFUa is not faulty, disable its maximum output
power locking for TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be removed. For details about how to remove the
GATM and Bias-Tee, see 4.4.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.
document holder on the cabinet door, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

811
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTE
Procedure
NOTE
disabled.
1.
record the result.
been locked.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

812
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
If...
Then...

Go to Step 1.2.

Go to 2.
NOTE
2.
locking.
NOTE
Step 2 Ask the administrator of element management system (EMS) to block the RFU.
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

813
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTE

1.
Set the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to OFF to power off
the RFU.
2.
3.
4.
Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the cable.
5.
CAUTION
6.


1.
2.
Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners on the RFU panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.) to
3.
Reconnect power cable and RF jumper to the RFU panel.
4.
Use a wrench to tighten the connector on the jumper and feeder to 25 Nm to 35 Nm (221.25
lbfin. to 309.75 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

814
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-62 Tightening the connector on the jumper and feeder
(1) Feeder
(2) Jumper
----End

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC after you
restructure the RFC.
Prerequisites
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
CMUEA
power cable
EPC4
connector
LOAD3 port
on the left
DCDU-13A
3V3
connector
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the RFC
The cable is
newly
delivered.

815
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Power cable
between
DCDU-13A
s
OT terminal
(M6)
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals on
the left
DCDU-13A
in the RFC
OT terminal
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals on
the right
DCDU-13A
in the RFC
The cable is
newly
delivered.
RFU power
cable
EPC4
connector
One of the
LOAD0 to
LOAD2
ports on both
DCDU-13A
s
3V3
connector
PWR port on
one of RFU 0
to RFU 5
The cable is
newly
delivered.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
Bare wire
GATE port
on the fan
assembly
Bare wire
Door status
sensor
To be reused
ELU signal
cable
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the CMUEA
RJ45
connector
ELU port on
the ELU
assembly
The cable is
newly
delivered.
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
RFC
4-pin
connector
TEM port on
the CMUEA
Temperature
sensor
Air intake
vent at the
bottom of the
RFC
The cable is
newly
delivered.
Surge
protection
alarm cable
for the
DCDU
Bare wire
IN0 and IN1

ports on the
CMUEA
Bare wire
DC ALARM
port on the
DCDU-13A
The cable is
newly
delivered.

816

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Monitoring
signal cable
for the left
fan
Cable
delivered
with the fan
Bare wire
EFAN1 and
EFAN2 ports
on the
CMUEA
assembly
The cable is
delivered
with the new
fan
assembly.
Monitoring
signal cable
for the right
fan
Cable
delivered
with the fan
4-pin
connector
Transfer
terminal for
the CMUEA
assembly
The cable is
delivered
with the new
fan
assembly.
Procedure
l

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

a.
on the left DCDU-13A.
b.
on the CMUEA.
Optional: Install the power cable between DCDU-13As, as shown by P2 in Figure

5-63. Skip this step in DC scenarios.
a.
Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG
(-) terminals on the left DCDU-13A in the RFC.
b.
Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and
NEG(-) terminals on the right DCDU-13A in the RFC.

a.
to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the left DCDU-13A.
b.
to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the right DCDU-13A.
c.
on the RFU.

817
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
4.
ties to bind them.
5.

1.
2.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

a.
Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the ELU port on
the ELU assembly.
b.
on the CMUEA.
5-64.
a.
a length of 8 mm (0.31 in.) jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.
b.
CMUEA.
Figure 5-64.
a.
temperature sensor near the air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.
b.
the TEM port on the CMUEA.
818
BTS3900A
4.
5.
6.

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Install the surge protection alarm cable for the left DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 in
Figure 5-64.
a.
b.
Install the surge protection alarm cable for the right DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 in
Figure 5-64.
a.
b.
Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan, as shown by S5 in Figure 5-64.
a.
Connect the cables that come out of the left fan assembly to the EFAN1 and
EFAN2 ports on the CMUEA.
b.
Connect the cables that come out of the right fan assembly to the 4-pin terminals
that come out of the CMUEA. Those 4-pin terminals have been connected to the
IFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the rear of the CMUEA.
7.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
ties to bind them.
819
BTS3900A
8.

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
----End
5.7 Restructuring the BBC

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the BBC to
be restructured.
5.7.1 Information You Need to Known Before Reconstructing the

BBC
during the restructuring of the BBC.
Component Changes in the BBC

The following figure shows component changes in the BBC.
Figure 5-65 Components in the BBC
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

820
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
No.
Compone
nt
Chang
e Type
Description
Input
wiring
terminal for
the input
power
cable for
the heating
film
To be
reused
Storage
battery
To be
reused
3, 4, and
6
Wiring
terminals
for power
cables for
storage
batteries
To be
replace
d
The wiring terminals on the storage batteries need to be

replaced for installing cables with a cross-sectional area
of 35 mm 2 (0.54 in.2).
Circuit
breaker for
the storage
battery
group
To be
replace
d
The circuit breaker for the storage battery group needs to

be replaced for inputting larger power.
Cable Changes in the BBC

The following figure shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the BBC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

821
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
No.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
P0
PGND
cable for
the front
door
OT
terminal
(M6)
Ground
point on
the front
door
OT
terminal
(M6)
Ground
point on
the rack
To be
reused
P1
RTN(+)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries
OT
terminal
(M8)
Wiring
terminal
for storage
batteries
OT
terminal
(M6)
Positive
wiring bar
To be
replaced
P2
NEG(-)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries
OT
terminal
(M8)
Wiring
terminal
for storage
batteries
OT
terminal
(M6)
Negative
wiring bar
To be
replaced

822
BTS3900A
No.
Cable

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
One End
The Other End
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
P3
RTN(+)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries
OT
terminal
(M8)
Wiring
terminal
for storage
batteries
OT
terminal
(M6)
Positive
wiring bar
To be
replaced
P4
NEG(-)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries
OT
terminal
(M8)
Wiring
terminal
for storage
batteries
OT
terminal
(M6)
Negative
wiring bar
To be
replaced
P5
Power
cable for
the heating
film
Heating
film
OT
terminal
(M6)
Transfer
terminal
To be
reused
P6 and P7
Power
cable
between
the wiring
terminal
and circuit
breaker on
the storage
batteries
OT
terminal
(M6)
Wiring
terminal
for storage
batteries
OT
terminal
(M8)
Circuit
breaker
To be
replaced
The following figure shows signal cable changes in the cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

823
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
No.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Connecto
r
Installati
on
Position
Change
Type
S0
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the door
status
sensor
Bare wire
Transfer
terminal
for the
signal
cable
Cord end
terminal
Door
status
sensor
To be
reused
S1
Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the
temperatur
e sensor in
the battery
cabinet
2-pin
connector
BAT_TE
M1 port on
the APMI
OT
terminal
Cable
bridge on
the left
side of the
upper
storage
battery
compartm
ent
To be
reused

824
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
5.7.2 Replacing the Wiring Terminals and Circuit Breakers

This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the wiring terminals and
circuit breakers.
Prerequisites
DANGER
Procedure
NOTICE
1.
Optional: Set the AC OUT circuit breaker on the PDU panel in the APM30H to OFF to
power off the heating film in the battery cabinet. Skip this step if the battery cabinet is not
configured with a heating film.
2.
Set the circuit breaker for the storage battery group on the inner right wall of the battery
cabinet to OFF.
3.
Set the BAT circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.

1.
the storage batteries and the copper bars between the storage batteries, and remove the input
power cables and copper bars.
2.
Use a screwdriver to loosen the screws on the baffle plate and then remove the baffle plate.
3.
Pull the storage batteries until one-third of the length is out, remove the screws on the poles
of the storage batteries, and then remove the input power cables for the storage battery
group and the copper bars between the storage batteries.
4.
Use both hands to remove the storage batteries at this layer and put them at a proper place.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

825
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTE
baffle plate at a layer, you must remove all storage batteries at the layer before removing the
Step 4 Remove all the power cables from the wiring terminals and circuit breakers.
Step 5 Remove the wiring terminals and circuit breakers, as shown in Figure 5-68.
1.
Open the cover for the wiring terminals, remove the screw and then the wiring terminals.
2.
Remove the two screws on the circuit breakers and then the circuit breakers. Reserve the
two M4 screws, spring washers, and flat washers for future use.
Figure 5-68 Removing the wiring terminals and circuit breakers
3.
Place the removed wiring terminals and circuit breakers into the ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Install the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers, as shown in the following figure.
1.
Attach the new wiring terminals to the positions of the removed ones in sequence, and use
one M4 screw to secure each wiring terminal.
2.
Attach the new circuit breakers to the positions of the removed ones, and use the two M4
screws reserved in Step 5.2 to secure the circuit breakers.
3.
Install power cables between the wiring terminals and circuit breakers.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

826
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-69 Installing the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers
Step 7 Connect power cables to the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 5-70 Connecting power cables to the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers
(1) Negative terminal for (2) Positive terminal for (3) Negative terminal for (4) Positive terminal for
the upper storage batteries the upper storage batteries the lower storage batteries the lower storage batteries
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

827
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
----End

Prerequisites
DANGER
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
Power cable
for the
heating film
in the battery
cabinet
Heating film
OT terminal
(M6)
Transfer
terminal
To be reused
RTN(+)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries
OT terminal
(M6)
Storage
battery
OT terminal
(M8)
Wiring
terminal for
storage
batteries
The cable is
newly
delivered.
NEG(-)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries
OT terminal
(M6)
Storage
battery
OT terminal
(M8)
Wiring
terminal for
storage
batteries
The cable is
newly
delivered.

828
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Cable
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
Descriptio
n
RTN(+)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries
OT terminal
(M6)
Storage
battery
OT terminal
(M8)
Wiring
terminal for
storage
batteries
The cable is
newly
delivered.
NEG(-)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries
OT terminal
(M6)
Storage
battery
OT terminal
(M8)
Wiring
terminal for
storage
batteries
The cable is
newly
delivered.
Procedure
NOTICE
Step 2 Install the storage batteries.
1.
Install the storage batteries from bottom up and from left to right.
2.
Remove the covers from the wiring terminals of the storage batteries, and install copper
bars between the poles of neighboring storage batteries for series connection.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

829
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 3 Install the power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-72 Installing the power cables for the storage batteries
bind them.
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

830
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

Prerequisites
The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a cable cutter, and a multi-purpose
crimping tool.
Context
The principles for grounding a BTS3900A are as follows:
l
The lower cabinets are connected to the RFC through an equipotential cable.
The RFC is connected to the ground busbar through a PGND cable.
The principles for grounding a DBS3900 are as follows:

l
The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to other
lower cabinets through equipotential cables.
The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to an
external ground bar through a PGND cable.
The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable.
Table 5-13 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable
Cable
Cross-Sectional Area of
the Core Wire and Size of
the OT Terminal
Color
PGND cable

0.025 in.2)
Green and yellow
Equipotential
cable

0.025 in.2)
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the PGND cable and equipotential cable.
1.
2.
Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the
OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

831
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 5-74.

1.
Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar on the inner wall of the RFC, and
then use spring washers and screws to secure the OT terminals of the PGND cable.
NOTE
When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as shown in
Figure 5-73 Installing an OT terminal correctly
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the external ground copper bar, as shown in

832
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-74 Installing a PGND cable
(1) Ground bar in the cabinet
(2) PGND cable
(3) Onsite ground bar
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

833
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

5.9.1 Installing a BBU Case

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in an
APM30 or TMC.
Prerequisites
Context
When two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l
During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30, the BBU
is installed in the APM30. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC.
When a second BBU is installed in the APM30, it is recommended that the second BBU
Figure 5-75 shows the positions for installing BBU cases in an APM30 and a TMC.
Figure 5-75 Positions for installing BBU cases
Procedure
Step 1 Record the electronic serial number (ESN) on the BBU case and report it to the base station
commissioning personnel. For details, see Obtaining the ESN.
1.
Align the two cable claws with the holes on both sides of the BBU case.
2.
Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

834
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-76 Installing cable claws on the BBU case

1.
Place the BBU on the guide rails and gently push the BBU case into the cabinet.
2.
Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ear on each side of the BBU case to 2 Nm
(17.70 lbfin.).
Figure 5-77 Installing a BBU case
1.
CAUTION
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

835
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTE
2.
3.
EPU in the APM30.
NOTE
Figure 5-78 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30. When the BBU case is installed in a TMC, the cable
connections are the same.
1.
CAUTION
NOTE
2.
3.
DCDU-12C in the TMC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

836
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
CAUTION
Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connected to the
BBU first and then to the DCDU. The operation in the reverse sequence may cause personal
injury or component damage.
NOTE
Figure 5-79 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC. When the BBU case is installed in an extension
TMC, the cable connections are the same.
Cables.
----End

Context
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

837
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
CAUTION
Operation Rules
l
operations.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

838
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
CAUTION
installed.

BBU.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

839
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

1.
2.
3.
5.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the outdoor distribution
module 06D-2 (shortened to ODM) and outdoor fiber distribution 06 (shortened to OFD) on the
top or side of a cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

840
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Prerequisites
l
The following tools are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a Phillips
screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose
pliers.
An ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed on one side of a single cabinet, or two
ODM or OFD mounting frames can be installed on one side of stacked cabinets or both
sides of a single cabinet. The ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed depending on
site space and the number of ODMs or OFDs to be installed.
An ODM/OFD mounting frame or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are preferentially

installed on the right side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets. If an ODM/OFD mounting
frame or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are installed on the left side of a single cabinet
or stacked cabinets, only one ODM or OFD can be installed one ODM/OFD mounting
frame.
Context
Figure 5-85 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with six or less RRUs configured)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

841
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-86 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with 7 to 12 RRUs configured)
Procedure
l
Installing a mounting frame or two mounting frames on one side of a single cabinet
or mounting frames or both sides of a single cabinet
1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
figure.

842
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
2.
following figure.
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

843
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
4.
(1)
5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
844
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

(2)
6.
Optional: If two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames need to be installed on both

sides of a single cabinet, the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on
the other side of the cabinet according to Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5.
Installing mounting frames on one side of stacked cabinets

1.
figure.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
following figure.
845
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

846
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
4.
Use two M6x14 screws to secure the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on
the installed ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame.
5.
Figure 5-95 Tightening the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame and its
attachment plate (1)
6.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

847
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-96 Tightening the second attachment plate
Installing the ODM06D or OFD06

1.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D or OFD06 to 1.2
Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as shown in the following figure.

848
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-97 Installing mounting ears
2.
Place the ODM06D or OFD06 on the bulges of pre-securing parts on the ODM06D/
OFD06 mounting frame, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the right side of the cabinet, the
ODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on one side or in the middle of the mounting frame.
l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the left side of the cabinet, the ODM06D
or OFD06 can be installed only in the middle of the mounting frame.
Figure 5-98 Pre-securing the ODM06D or OFD06
(1) Pre-securing part
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

849
BTS3900A
3.

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Use four M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D or OFD06 onto the ODM06D/OFD06
mounting frame to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.). This is a recommended tightening torque.
Figure 5-99 Securing the ODM06D or OFD06
----End

Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

850
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
----End
5.9.5 Installing the SLPU

During the upgrade, if there is no vacant slot for installing a UELP or UFLP in the BBU case,
an SLPU needs to be configured.
Prerequisites
and ESD gloves are available.
Context
The following figure shows the recommended position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 or
APM30H.
l
When the SLPU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that SLPU be installed in
the top 1 U space in the APM30H.
When the SLPU is installed in the APM30, it is recommended that SLPU be installed in
the 1 U space below the BBU in the APM30.
Figure 5-101 Position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 or APM30H
(1) Recommended position for installing the SLPU in (2) Recommended position for installing the SLPU in
an APM30
an APM30H
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

851
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Procedure
Step 1 Install cable claws on both sides of the SLPU case, and move the mounting ear on each side one
hole backwards. Use four M4 screws to secure the mounting ears to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), as
Figure 5-102 Installing a cable claw
Step 2 Slide the SLPU into the cabinet, and then use a screwdriver to tighten the two M6 screws on the
mounting ears of the SLPU to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 5-103.
Figure 5-103 Installing the SLPU
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

852
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 3 Install the surge protection transfer cable, as shown in Figure 5-104.
NOTE
The following figure shows the connection of an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable and an E1/T1 cable in
GSM mode. For the transmission cable connections in other modes, see "Transmission Cable Connections" in
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description or DBS3900 Hardware Description.
Figure 5-104 Installing a surge protection transfer cable
(1) T1: E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
(1) T2: E1/T1 cable
Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to
bind them.
----End

during the upgrade.
5.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two Cabinets

transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between two cabinets
during the upgrade from BTS3900A (with breathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).

Table 5-14 lists the changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

853

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
Table 5-14 Changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Input
power
cable
for the
APM3
0 (in
AC
scenar
ios)
To be
replac
ed
(new
cable
s need
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
OT
termin
al
(M6)
AC
INPU
T port
on the
EPU
Depen
ding on
the
externa
l
equip
ment
Extern
al
power
equip
ment
Input
power
cable
for the
TMC
(in AC
scenar
ios)
To be
reuse
d.
The
conne
ctor at
one
end
needs
to be
replac
ed.
EPC4
connec
tor
LOAD
7 port
on the
EPU
OT
termin
al (M6,
4 mm2
or
0.006
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T
silkscr
een on
the
DCD
U-12C

854

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Input
power
cable
for the
TMC
(in DC
scenar
ios)
To be
replac
ed
(new
cable
s need
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Extern
al
power
equip
ment
OT
termin
al (M6,
25
mm2 or
0.039
in.2)
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T
silkscr
een on
the
DCD
U-12C
Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in DC
scenar
ios)
To be
replac
ed
(new
cable
s need
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment
OT
termin
al (M6,
a group
of
cables
with a
crosssection
al area
of 35
mm2
[0.054
in2] or
two
groups
of
cables
with a
crosssection
al area
of 16
mm2
[0.025
in2])
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T
silkscr
een on
the
DCD
U-13A
in the
RFC

855
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in AC
scenar
ios)
To be
replac
ed
OT
termin
al
(M6)
RFC1
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0
OT
termin
al
RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T
silkscr
een on
the
DCD
U-13A
in the
RFC
RRU
power
cable
Adde
d
EPC5
or
EPC4
connec
tor
One of
LOAD
0 to
LOAD
8 ports
on the
DCD
U-12B
Depen
ding on
the
externa
l
equip
ment
PWR
port on
the
RRU
Power
cable
for the
heater
in the
TMC
To be
reuse
d
Bare
wire
8-pin
transf
er
termin
al on
the
inner
left
wall
of the
APM3
0
Bare
wire
8-pin
transf
er
termi
nal on
the
inner
left
wall
of the
TMC

856

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Chan
ge
Type
Before the Upgrade

Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
After the Upgrade

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Power
cables
for the
batter
y
cabine
t
To be
replac
ed
(new
cable
s need
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or
0.054
in.2)
BAT
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0
OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2 or
0.054
in.2)
Wirin
g
termin
al for
the
storag
e
batteri
es in
the
BBC
Power
cable
for the
heatin
g film
in the
batter
y
cabine
t
To be
replac
ed
(new
cable
s need
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)
8-pin
wiring
termin
al in
the
APM3
0
Juncti
on
termin
al for
the
input
power
cable
of the
heatin
g film
in the
BBC
Equip
otentia
l cable
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabin
et
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t
OT
termin
al (M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabine
t
PGND
cable
To be
reuse
d
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
cabine
t
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d
busba
r
outsid
e the
cabin
et
OT
termin
al
(M6)
Groun
d bar
in the
cabine
t
OT
termin
al (M6)
Groun
d
busbar
outsid
e the
cabine
t

857
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTE
of the new RRU.
Signal Cables
Table 5-15 Signal cables changes
Cable
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
APMIBBU
monitor
ing
signal
cable
To
be
reus
ed
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
APMI
in the
APM3
0
RJ45
conne
ctor
MON
1 port
on the
UPEU
in the
BBU
in the
APM3
0
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
CMU
EA in
the
APM3
0
RJ45
conne
ctor
MON
1 port
on the
UPEU
in the
BBU
in the
APM3
0
FMUABBU
monitor
ing
signal
cable
To
be
repl
ace
d
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
FMU
A in
the
RFC
RJ45
conne
ctor
MON
0 port
on the
UPEU
in the
BBU
in the
APM3
0
RJ45
conne
ctor
COM_
IN
port on
the
CMU
EA
assem
bly in
the
RFC
RJ45
conne
ctor
MON
0 port
on the
UPEU
in the
BBU
in the
APM3
0

858
BTS3900A
Cable
BBU
intercon
nection
cable
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
To
be
reus
ed

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
DLC
conne
ctor
One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU
DLC
conne
ctor
l CI
por
t on
the
U
MP
T
in
the
BB
U
DLC
conne
ctor
One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU
DLC
conne
ctor
l CI
por
t on
the
U
MP
T
in
the
BB
U
l S0
por
t on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
l S0
por
t on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U
BBU
alarm
cable
To
be
reus
ed
RJ45
conne
ctor
EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU
RJ45
conne
ctor
Extern
al
alarm
device
RJ45
conne
ctor
EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU
RJ45
conne
ctor
Extern
al
alarm
device
Cable
between
two
combin
ed base
stations
To
be
reus
ed
DB15
male
conne
ctor
GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU
MD36
or
DB15
male
conne
ctor
DGLU
b port
on the
DCTB
DB15
male
conne
ctor
GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU
MD36
or
DB15
male
conne
ctor
DGLU
b port
on the
DCTB

859
BTS3900A
Cable
Externa
l dry
contact
monitor
ing
signal
cable
Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe
To
be
reus
ed

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Before the Upgrade
After the Upgrade
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at
One
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Conn
ector
at the
Other
End
Instal
lation
Positi
on
Bare
wire
SLPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment
Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment
Bare
wire
SLPU
Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment
Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment

Table 5-16 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI electrical cables
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
E1/T1
cable
To be
reused
DB26 male
connector
OUTSIDE port
on the UELP
Depending on
the external
equipment
External
transmission
equipment
FE/GE
Etherne
t cable
To be
reused

port near the
OUTSIDE
silkscreen on
the UFLP
RJ45 connector
Router that is
connected to
the BSC
FE/GE
fiber
optic
cable
To be
reused
LC connector
l FC
connector
Router that is
connected to
the BSC
l FE optical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT,
UMPT, or
UTRP in
the BBU
l SC
connector
l LC
connector
l FE optical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

860
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
E1/T1
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable
To be
reused
DB25
connector
INSIDE port
on the UELP
DB26
connector
E1/T1 port on
the GTMU,
WMPT/UMPT,
or UTRP in the
BBU
FE/GE
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable
To be
reused
RJ45 connector l FE
electrical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT, or
UMPT in
the BBU
RJ45 connector
FE electrical
port in the
INSIDE part on
the UFLP in the
SLPU
LC connector
FE optical port
on the WMPT/
UMPT, LMPT/
UMPT, or
GTMU in the
BBU
RJ45 connector
FE electrical
port on the
WMPT/UMPT,
LMPT/UMPT,
or GTMU in the
BBU
l FE
electrical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
optical
ports
To be
reused
LC connector
FE optical port
on the GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU
Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
electric
al ports
To be
reused

port on the
GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU

861

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
Cable
Chang
e Type
Connector at
One End
Installation
Position
Connector at
the Other End
Installation
Position
CPRI
electric
al cable
To be
reused
SFP20 male
connector
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
GTMU in
the BBU
SFP20 male
connector
l CPRI0 or
CPRI1 port
on one of
MRFU 0 to
MRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
GRFU 0 to
GRFU 5
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5 (or
CPRI0 to
CPRI2)
ports on the
WBBP in
the BBU
l CPRI0 port
on one of
WRFU 0 to
WRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
LRFU 0 to
LRFU 5
l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
LBBP in the
BBU
RF Cables
Table 5-17 RF cables changes
Cable
Change
Type
Connector
at One End
Installatio
n Position
Connector
at the Other
End
Installatio
n Position
RF jumper
To be reused
DIN straight
male
connector
Antenna
feeder
DIN elbow
male
connector
ANT_TX/
RXA and
ANT_RXB
ports on the
RFU
Inter-RFU
RF signal
cable
To be reused
QMA elbow
male
connector
RX_OUTA
port on the
RFU
QMA elbow
male
connector
RX_INB
port on the
RFU

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

862
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30

Input power cables for the APM30 connect the external power equipment to the input wiring
terminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the APM30.
Prerequisites
l
Context

An AC-powered BTS3900A supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110
V AC dual-live-wire power supplies. To support different types of power supply, the APM30
needs to use different input power cables, as shown in Table 5-18.
Table 5-18 Specifications of input power cables for the APM30
Cable
Input power
cables for the
APM30
supplied with
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
L1
wire
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
Brown
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
l They need to
be prepared
onsite.
L2
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
L3
wire
Gray
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
N
wire
Blue
OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment

l Black cable
with dual
insulation
layers and
four core
wires
863

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
Cable
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
Brown
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
l They need to
be prepared
onsite.
Input power
cables for the
APM30
supplied with
220 V AC
single-phase
power
L wire
N
wire
Blue
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
Input power
cables for the
APM30
supplied with
L1
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
L2
wire
Red
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
N
wire
White
OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)
Depending
on the
external
equipment
l Two wires (L
and N), each
with a single
core and two
insulation
layers
l They need to
be prepared
onsite.
l Three wires
(L1, L2, and
N), each with
a single core
and two
insulation
layers
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the APM30.
1.
2.
Add OT terminals to both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assembling
Step 2 Install the input power cables for the APM30, as shown in Figure 5-105, Figure 5-106, or
Figure 5-107.
1.
2.
NOTE
3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Route the power cables into the cabinet along the left side of the cabinet interior, connect
each wire to the corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
864
BTS3900A
4.

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-105 Installing input power cables for the APM30 on the EPU side (220 V AC threephase)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

865
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-106 Installing input power cables for the APM30 on the EPU side (220 V AC singlephase)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

866
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-107 Installing the input power cable for the APM30 on the EPU side (110 V AC duallive-wire)
bind them.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30 to the TMC

Power cables from the APM30 to the TMC feed power from the APM30 to all components in
the TMC. You need to replace the connectors at both ends of the power cables from the APM30
to the TMC to reuse the power cables.
Prerequisites
l
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

867

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A

Table 5-19 lists the specifications of the power cables from the APM30 to the TMC.
Table 5-19 Specifications of power cables from the APM30 to the TMC
Cable
Input power
cables for
the TMC
Wire
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
EPC4 connector
OT terminal
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
OT terminal (M6,
4 mm2 or 0.006 in.
2)
They can be
reused and their
connectors need
to be replaced
onsite.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC.
1.
2.
Add connectors to each end of the input power cables for the TMC according to the
specifications in Table 5-19. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power
Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cables for the TMC, as shown in Figure 5-108.
1.
2.
Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cables to the
DC output port LOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30.
3.
terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC, and tighten the screws on the OT terminals to
4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).
4.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

868
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-108 Installing input power cables for the TMC
bind them.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30 to RFCs

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from the APM30
to RFCs.
Prerequisites
l
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

869
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

Table 5-20 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30 to RFCs.
Table 5-20 Specifications of power cables from the APM30 to RFCs
Cable
DCDU-13A
power cables
Power cables
between
cascaded
DCDU-13As
Wire
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)
Cables are
newly
delivered.
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)
OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)
Cables are
newly
delivered.
NEG
(-)
wire
Blue
Procedure
Step 1 Install input power cables for the RFC (between the APM30 and the DCDU-13A on the inner
left wall of the RFC), as shown in Figure 5-109.
1.
in the APM30.
NOTE
If two RFCs are configured, connect the input power cables for the second RFC to the RFC2 terminals on
the EPU.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

870
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 2 Install power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As (between the left and right DCDU-13As),
1.
terminals on the left DCDU-13A.
2.
terminals on the right DCDU-13A.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

871
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-110 Installing power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As
bind them.
----End
Installing Power Cables from the APM30 to the BBC

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from the APM30
to the BBC.
Prerequisites
l
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

872
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

Table 5-21 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30 to the BBC.
Table 5-21 Specifications of power cables from the APM30 to the BBC
Cable
Power cables
for the
battery
cabinet
Wire
Color
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
RTN
(+)
wire
Red
OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.054 in.2)
OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.054 in.2)
NEG
(-)
wire
Black
They are
delivered and
their connectors
need to be added
onsite.
Procedure
Step 1 Add connectors to the power cables to be installed according to the specifications in the preceding
table.
1.
2.
Add connectors at each end of the cables by performing the following operations:
Step 2 Install power cables for the BBC, as shown in Figure 5-111.
1.
Connect the OT terminals (M8) at one end of the power cables to the DC output terminals
near the BAT silkscreen on the right side of the EPU in the APM30.
2.
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the right side of the BBC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

873
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-111 Installing power cables for the battery cabinet
bind them.
----End

When an AC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables and
distribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the EPU in the
APM30H to the ODM.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

874
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Context
l

guide.
Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Cord end
terminal
OT terminal
(M6)
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Cord end
terminal
Depending on
the RRU port
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Main
power
cables
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
RRU
power
cables
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

875
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1.

NOTE
2.
3.
sequence.
4.
5.
6.
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

876
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 6 Connect main power cables to the EPU in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

877
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1.
Add OT terminals to the main power cables according to the instructions in Assembling
2.
in the APM30H.
bind the cable.
----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

878

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A
Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC

RFC when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Prerequisites
l
Context

Table 5-23 lists the specifications of input power cables for the RFC.
Table 5-23 Specifications of input power cables for the RFC
Cable
Wire
Color
Input power
cables for the
RFC
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
(16 mm2 or
0.025 in.2,
two groups)
NEG
Blue
(-) wire
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2)
Depending on
the external
power
equipment
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Procedure
1.
2.
Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the RFC according to Table 1.
Step 2 Install input power cables for the RFC, as shown in Figure 5-116.
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

879
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
bind them.
----End
Installing Input Power Cables for the TMC

TMC when -48 V DC power is supplied.
Prerequisites
l
Context
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

880
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

Table 5-24 lists the specifications of input power cables for the TMC.
Table 5-24 Specifications of input power cables for the TMC
Cable
Wire
Color
Input power
cables for the
TMC
RTN
(+)
wire
Black
(16 mm2 or
0.025 in.2,
one group)
NEG
Blue
(-) wire
One End
The Other
End
Remarks
OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.025
in.2)
Depending on
the external
power
equipment
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC.
1.
2.
Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the TMC according to Table
5-24. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the input power cables for the TMC, as shown in Figure 5-117.
1.
terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

881
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-117 Installing input power cables for the TMC
bind them.
----End

When a DC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables and
distribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the external power
equipment to the ODM.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

882
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Prerequisites
l
Context

l
RRU. For details about how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related
RRU installation guide.
Cable
Color
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Cord end
terminal
Depending on
the external
power
equipment
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Cord end
terminal
Depending on
the RRU port
They need to be
prepared onsite.
Main
power
cables
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
RRU
power
cables
RTN
(+)
Black
NEG
(-)
Blue
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

883
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1.

NOTE
2.
3.
sequence.
4.
5.
6.
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

884
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 6 Connect the connectors at one end of RRU power cables to RRUs.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

885
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 7 Connect main power cables to the external power equipment.

1.
Add connectors to each end of the power cables according to the instructions in Assembling
the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.
2.
Connect the cord end terminals at one end of power cables to the input ports on the ODM.
3.
Connect the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.
bind the cable.
----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

886
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Installing E1/T1 Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing E1/T1 cables.
Context
l

When a TMC uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of E1/
T1 cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30 that is shown in Figure
5-122.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cables to the OUTSIDE ports on the UELP, as shown in Figure
5-122.
NOTE

Cables.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

887
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-122 Installing E1/T1 cables
Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cables out of the cable hole on the bottom left side of the
cabinet.
bind them.
----End
Installing FE/GE Ethernet Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE Ethernet cables.
Context
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

888
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
FE/GE Ethernet cables are shielded straight-through cables.
When a TMC uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of FE/
GE Ethernet cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30 that is shown in
Figure 5-124.
Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE Ethernet cables in a proper position within 1 m (3.28 ft) from
the cable hole of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 5-123.
1.
Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE Ethernet cables, and strip a length of about
40 mm (1.57 in.) jacket from the cables to expose the shield layers
2.
Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through the
clip.
3.
Attach the ground clip to the shield layers of the FE/GE Ethernet cables and tighten the M4
screws on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm (0.27 lbfin.).
Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) port
near the OUTSIDE silkscreen on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 5-124.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

889
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTE

Cables.
Figure 5-124 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables
Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole on
bind them.
----End
Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

890
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Context
l

labeled as MM.
The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multimode optical
FE/GE fiber optic cables have an LC connector at one end and an FC, SC, or LC connector
at the other end.
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on an LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, the two ports
cannot be used simultaneously.
SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, the two
ports cannot be used simultaneously.
This section uses the procedure for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H as
an example. The procedures for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H and a
TMC11H are the same.
NOTICE
within 20 minutes.
Procedure
1.
BBU board.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

891
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 2 Insert the optical modules into the corresponding FE/GE optical ports, as shown in Figure
5-126.
NOTE

Cables.
Step 3 Stick temporary labels to the FE/GE fiber optic cables to be installed.
Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables into the optical module, as shown in Figure
5-126.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

892
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-126 Installing FE/GE fiber optic cables
Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole on
bind them.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the FE/GE fiber optic cables with engineering labels. For
----End

Scenarios
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

893
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30

between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30.
Context
l
in the APM30 or TMC. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function. For
the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.
Table 5-26 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30
Cable
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30)
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
in the
APM30
Remarks
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30), as shown in
1.
2.
APM30.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

894
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
APM30)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC

between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

895
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
in the
APM30
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
battery
cabinet
OT terminal
Temperature
sensor in the
BBC
2-pin
connector
TEM_BAT
port on the
PMU in the
APM30
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30), as shown by
illustration 1 in the following figure.
1.
2.
APM30.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the battery cabinet (between the
BBC and APM30), as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.
1.
Connect the 2-pin connector at one end of the power cable to the TEM_BAT port on the
PMU in the APM30.
2.
Connect the temperature sensor at one end of the cable to the cable bridge at the upper left
side of BBC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

896
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-128 Installing a monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the battery
cabinet (between the BBC and APM30)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 TMC

between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 TMC.
Context
l
of the cabinets. The following table lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables
between two cabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

897
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1 RFC+1 APM30+1 TMC
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
in the
APM30
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC and
RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the TMC
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
To be reused
Procedure
1.
2.
APM30.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC and RFC), as
shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the TMC.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the
RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

898
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
the TMC and RFC)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMC

between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMC.
Context
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

899
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMC
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
in the
APM30
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC and
RFC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the TMC
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
battery
cabinet
OT terminal
Temperature
sensor in the
BBC
2-pin
connector
TEM_BAT
port on the
PMU in the
APM30
To be reused
Procedure
1.
2.
APM30.
Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC and RFC), as
shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the TMC.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the RFC.
Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the battery cabinet (between the
BBC and APM30), as shown by illustration 3 in the following figure.
1.
Connect the temperature sensor at one end of the cable to the cable bridge at the upper left
side of BBC.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the TEM_BAT port on the PMU in the APM30.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

900
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-130 Installing monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMC
bind the cable.
----End

V DC Scenarios
Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC

between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

901
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Context
l
Table 5-30 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario
of 1 RFC+1 TMC
Cable
One End
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC)
The Other End
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU in the
TMC
Remarks
To be
reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC), as shown in
Figure 5-131.
1.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the TMC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

902
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
TMC)
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMCs

between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMCs.
Context
Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the
cabinets. Table 5-31 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets,
which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

903
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1 RFC+2 TMCs
Cable
One End
The Other End
Remarks
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
TMC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
in the TMC
To be reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
RFC and
extension
TMC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the
extension
TMC
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
To be reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC), as shown by
1.
2.
TMC), as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the extension
TMC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

904
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1 RFC+2 TMCs
bind the cable.
----End
Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMCs

between two cabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMCs.
Context
l
Principles.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

905
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
of 2 RFCs+2 TMCs
Cable
One End
The Other End
Change
Type
Connector
Installatio
n Position
Connector
Installatio
n Position
CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
RJ45
connector
MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU in the
TMC
To be
reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
the RFC and
extension
TMC)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
fan
assembly in
the
extension
TMC
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the RFC
To be
reused
Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
two RFCs)
RJ45
connector
COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the right
RFC
RJ45
connector
COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA
assembly in
the left RFC
To be
reused
Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC), as shown by
1.
2.
TMC), as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the right
RFC.
2.
in the extension TMC.
by illustration 3 in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

906
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1.
Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the left
RFC.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the
right RFC.
2 RFCs+2 TMCs
bind the cable.
----End

This section describes how to install inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or single-mode base
station.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

907
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
(1) Rate
(2) Wavelength
Context
Cable Connections.
Interconnection
Mode
BBU 0
BBU 1
UCIU+UMPT
M0 port on the UCIU
M1 port on the UCIU
NOTE
NOTICE
minutes.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

908
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
NOTE
mode.
1.
2.
1.
1.
2.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

909
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTE
l When both BBUs are installed in an APM30, install inter-BBU signal cables, as shown in Figure 5-137.
When BBU 0 and BBU 1 are installed in an APM30 and a TMC, respectively, install inter-BBU signal
cables, as shown in Figure 5-138.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

910
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
----End

Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

911
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTICE
NOTE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

912
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1.
2.
(221.27 lbfin. to 309.78 lbfin.).
Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumpers according to the instructions in Attaching the Color
Ring.
feeder.
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

913
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
5.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables

CPRI electrical cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RFUs.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove dustproof bags from the connectors at both ends of the CPRI electrical cables.
NOTE

Description.
Step 3 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cables through the cable holes on the left side of the
power cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the corresponding
RFUs, as shown in Figure 5-143.
Figure 5-143 Installing CPRI electrical cables
Step 4 Connect the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables to the CPRI0 ports on the
panels of the RFUs, as shown in Figure 5-143.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

914
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
bind them.
NOTE
l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cables at the top of the DCDU-13A in the RFC or in
the base of the RFC.
l Lay out the cables according to the manners in Figure 5-143. Ensure that the cables are routed to the RFUs
----End
5.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables

CPRI fiber optic cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RRUs.
Context
l
This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The CPRI fiber optic cables are
labeled as MM.
NOTICE
within 20 minutes.
l
Station Cables.
Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing
CPRI Cables.
Procedure
1.
2.
Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP. Then insert
an optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the
RF module.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

915
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTE
3.
Step 2 Install CPRI fiber optic cables, as shown in Figure 5-145 and Figure 5-146.
1.
Stick temporary labels to the CPRI fiber optic cables to be installed.
2.
Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors on the fiber optic cables.
3.
the optical modules in the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP, and then insert the DLC connectors
labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module in the RF module.
NOTICE
l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout fiber optic
in.), respectively.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

916
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-146 Installing CPRI fiber optic cables
Step 3 Route CPRI fiber optic cables out of the cabinet from the cable hole on the left bottom. For
details about how to route the cables, see Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Replace the temporary labels on the CPRI fiber optic cables with engineering labels. For detailed
----End


Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

917
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

No.
Item
design.
The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired. For details, see
3.14.3 Repainting.

No.
Item
Antirust powder on the cabinet door is cleared.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Item
All self-made PGND cables are copper-based and have proper core diameters. There

918
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
No.
Item
or crimped.
shrink tubing.
The flat washer and the spring washer are well mounted on all OT terminals, and
the OT terminals are intact and contact with the wiring terminals properly.
The exterior of the storage battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.
The shell of the storage battery is clean without any leakage trace.
The wiring post on the storage battery stands properly without any damage, and the
post is not covered with any acid substances.
10
11
and negative poles.
12
The voltage of the storage battery is normal.

l The voltage of a 2 V storage battery cell ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.
l The voltage of a 12 V storage battery cell ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.
l The total voltage of the storage batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.
13
The circuit breakers for the storage batteries are set to OFF.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No.
Item
the same direction.
Different types of cables are bound separately when being routed, for example, the
power cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber optic cables, and E1/T1/FE cables.
All the labels at both ends of the cables are legible.

919
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
No.
Item
without sharp edges. An extra length of 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.2 in.) of the
Any unused port is properly protected.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
No
.
Cabinet
Item
APM30 or TMC
the filler module.
APM30 or TMC
The ELU has been installed. For detailed operations, see 5.4.5
Replacing the AFMU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are
APM30 or TMC
APM30 or TMC

920
BTS3900A
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
No
.
Cabinet
Item
APM30 or TMC
the Cabinet.
APM30 or TMC
see 5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 5.9.1 Installing a
BBU Case.
APM30 or TMC
the Cabinet.
APM30
The input power cable for the APM30 has been replaced. For
detailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cables for the
APM30.
APM30
The power transfer cable for the APM30 has been installed. For
10
APM30
The PGND cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. For
11
APM30

12
TMC

Cabinet.
13
RFC
The ELU assembly has been installed. For detailed operations, see
4.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel. Ensure
that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An
incorrect or faulty ELU may cause problems in heat dissipation
or monitoring.
14
RFC

monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, ELU signal
cable, and monitoring signal cable for the fan have been installed.
Cabinet.
15
RFC
The input power cable for the RFC has been replaced. For detailed
operations, see Installing Power Cables from the APM30 to
RFCs or Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC.
16
detailed operations, see (Optional) Installing RRU Power
Cables or (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables.

921
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
No
.
Cabinet
Item
17
BBC
The power cable for the storage batteries has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 5.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries and
Cables in the Battery Cabinet.

Prerequisites
l
been set to OFF.
Context
DANGER
NOTICE
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

922
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

Base
Station
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A
(Ver.B)
EPS 01A or EPS 01C,

DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box

equipment.)
BTS3900A
(Ver.C)
EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box

EPU03A-04
EMUA, and FAN 02B.)
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

923
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Base
Station
Power Device(1)
Circuit Breaker
BTS3900A
(Ver.D)
EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

EPU05A-04
IBBS200T
NOTE
Process
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

924
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Procedure
l
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

925
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
1.
2.
3.
cabinet.
4.
Cabinet
Compone
nt
APM30H
PMU

PSU

Fan
assembly

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Fan in the
front door
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
Fan or TEC
in the front
door

and off for 1s).
IBBS700D
Fan in the
front door
and
CMUEA

IBBS700T
TEC and
CMUF

5.
6.
7.

926
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

Cabinet
Compone
nt
APM30H
BBU

and off for 1s).
TMC11H
RFC
FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

Fan in the
front door
RFU

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

RRU

for 1s).

NOTE
8.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

927

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
BTS3900A

Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to all
components in the
cabinet

the BBU
Check as follows:

units.

replace the board.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

928
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
to step 2.
component.
component.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

1.
2.
3.
and DCDU-12B.
4.
DCDU-12C.
5.
6.

929
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

Cabinet
Compone
nt
TMC11H
BBU

and off for 1s).
for 1s).
RFC
FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

Fan in the
front door
RFU

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

RRU

7.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

supply to all
components in the
cabinet

units.

930
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Failure Type
Handling Measure

the BBU
Check as follows:
replace the board.

supply to other
components in the
cabinet
Check as follows:
to step 2.
component.
component.
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

931
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

and checked.

Context
Procedure
(1) Barcode label
(4) Nameplate
1.
for the cabinet.
2.
----End
5.13.2 Sealing Cable Holes

After all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable holes on the base.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

932
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Procedure
Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet, as
Figure 5-150 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet
(1) Fireproof mud
1.
2.
3.

power cables
electrical cables

equipotential cable

(6) Screw
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

933
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Step 3 Push the baffle plates on both sides of the base forwards until the baffle plates contact with the
cables, and then tighten the screws on the baffle plates, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-152 Closing baffle plates of the cable holes on both sides of the base
Step 4 Push the baffle plate on the rear of the base forwards until the baffle plate contact with the cables,
and then tighten the screw on the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure.
Step 5 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

934
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
Figure 5-154 Sealing cable holes on the base
(1) Fireproof mud
Step 6 Tighten the two screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate, as shown
----End
5.13.3 Repainting
must be repaired.
Prerequisites
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

935
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

Applied to
Color
Huawei Code
International Code
Cabinet
RAL7035
YB026
RAL7035
Base
3010 light gray
YB030
Pantone 422U
Procedure
Figure 5-157.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

936
BTS3900A

BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
NOTICE
minutes.
NOTE
----End
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

937

BTS3900A Installation Guide For Enhancing Existing Cabinets (06) (PDF) - en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BTS3900A Installation Guide For Enhancing Existing Cabinets (06) (PDF) - en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BTS3900A

Installation Guide for Enhancing

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

About This Document

V200R013C00 and later versions

V100R003C00 and later versions

V100R013C00 and later versions

V100R004C00 and later versions

Base station installation personnel

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

Book titles are in italics.

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Command arguments are in italics.

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

2.8.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................106

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)................................................266

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

3.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs and RRUs............................................................282

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

3.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................463

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).............................................530

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

4.6 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................588

5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).................736

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

5.2.3 Document Preparations............................................................................................................................................749

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

5.10 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................853

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing

Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide

2.6.2 Replacing the Front Door

Add the step of replacing an N-shaped fixing bracket

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A

The filler module in APM30H(Ver.D_B) and

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential